Mustek | PVR-A1 | Operating instructions | Mustek PVR-A1 Operating instructions

Mustek PVR-A1 Operating instructions
AV SURROUND AMPLIFIER
AVC-A1XVA
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
2 We greatly appreciate your purchase of the AVC-A1XVA.
2 To be sure you take maximum advantage of all the features the AVC-A1XVA has to offer, read these instructions
carefully and use the set properly. Be sure to keep this manual for future reference should any questions or
problems arise.
“SERIAL NO.
PLEASE RECORD UNIT SERIAL NUMBER ATTACHED TO THE REAR OF THE
CABINET FOR FUTURE REFERENCE”
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED
SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended
to alert the user to the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
• DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We declare under our sole responsibility that this product, to which this
declaration relates, is in conformity with the following standards:
EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN61000-3-2 and EN61000-3-3.
Following the provisions of 73/23/EEC, 2004/108/EC and 93/68/EEC
Directive.
• ÜBEREINSTIMMUNGSERKLÄRUNG
Wir erklären unter unserer Verantwortung, daß dieses Produkt, auf das
sich diese Erklärung bezieht, den folgenden Standards entspricht:
EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN61000-3-2 und EN61000-3-3.
Entspricht den Verordnungen der Direktive 73/23/EEC, 2004/108/EC und
93/68/EEC.
• DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE
Nous déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité que l’appareil, auquel se
réfère cette déclaration, est conforme aux standards suivants:
EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN61000-3-2 et EN61000-3-3.
D’après les dispositions de la Directive 73/23/EEC, 2004/108/EC et
93/68/EEC.
• DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITÀ
Dichiariamo con piena responsabilità che questo prodotto, al quale la
nostra dichiarazione si riferisce, è conforme alle seguenti normative:
EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN61000-3-2 e EN61000-3-3.
In conformità con le condizioni delle direttive 73/23/EEC, 2004/108/EC e
93/68/EEC.
• DECLARACIÓN DE CONFORMIDAD
Declaramos bajo nuestra exclusiva responsabilidad que este producto al
que hace referencia esta declaración, está conforme con los siguientes
estándares:
EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN61000-3-2 y EN61000-3-3.
Siguiendo las provisiones de las Directivas 73/23/EEC, 2004/108/EC y
93/68/EEC.
• EENVORMIGHEIDSVERKLARING
Wij verklaren uitsluitend op onze verantwoordelijkheid dat dit produkt,
waarop deze verklaring betrekking heeft, in overeenstemming is met de
volgende normen:
EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN61000-3-2 en EN61000-3-3.
Volgens de bepalingen van de Richtlijnen 73/23/EEC, 2004/108/EC en
93/68/EEC.
• ÖVERENSSTÄMMELSESINTYG
Härmed intygas helt på eget ansvar att denna produkt, vilken detta intyg
avser, uppfyller följande standarder:
EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN61000-3-2 och EN61000-3-3.
Enligt stadgarna i direktiv 73/23/EEC, 2004/108/EC och 93/68/EEC.
2
CAUTION:
• The ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation
openings with items, such as newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, etc.
• No naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, should be placed on the
apparatus.
• Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of battery
disposal.
• Do not expose the set to dripping or splashing fluids.
• No objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the
apparatus.
ACHTUNG:
• Die Belüftung sollte auf keinen Fall durch das Abdecken der
Belüftungsöffnungen durch Gegenstände wie beispielsweise Zeitungen,
Tischtücher, Vorhänge o. Ä. behindert werden.
• Auf dem Gerät sollten keinerlei direkten Feuerquellen wie beispielsweise
angezündete Kerzen aufgestellt werden.
• Bitte beachten Sie bei der Entsorgung der Batterien die geltenden
Umweltbestimmungen.
• Das Gerät sollte keinerlei Flüssigkeit, also keinem Tropfen oder Spritzen
ausgesetzt werden.
• Auf dem Gerät sollten keinerlei mit Flüssigkeit gefüllten Behälter wie
beispielsweise Vasen aufgestellt werden.
ATTENTION:
• La ventilation ne doit pas être gênée en recouvrant les ouvertures de la
ventilation avec des objets tels que journaux, rideaux, tissus, etc.
• Aucune flamme nue, par exemple une bougie, ne doit être placée sur
l’appareil.
• Veillez à respecter l’environnement lorsque vous jetez les piles usagées.
• L’appareil ne doit pas être exposé à l’eau ou à l’humidité.
• Aucun objet contenant du liquide, par exemple un vase, ne doit être placé
sur l’appareil.
PRECAUZIONI:
• Le aperture di ventilazione non devono essere ostruite coprendole con
oggetti, quali giornali, tovaglie, tende e così via.
• Non posizionare sull'apparecchiatura fiamme libere, come ad esempio le
candele accese.
• Prestare attenzione agli aspetti legati alla tutela dell'ambiente quando si
smaltisce la batteria.
• L'apparecchiatura non deve essere esposta a gocciolii o spruzzi.
• Non posizionare sull'apparecchiatura nessun oggetto contenete liquidi,
come ad esempio i vasi.
PRECAUCIÓN:
• La ventilación no debe quedar obstruida por hacerse cubierto las
aperturas con objetos como periódicos, manteles, cortinas, etc.
• No debe colocarse sobre el aparato ninguna fuente inflamable sin
protección, como velas encendidas.
• A la hora de deshacerse de las pilas, respete la normativa para el cuidado
del medio ambiente.
• No se expondrá el aparato al goteo o salpicaduras cuando se utilice.
• No se colocarán sobre el aparato objetos llenos de líquido, como jarros.
WAARSCHUWING:
• De ventilatie mag niet worden belemmerd door de ventilatieopeningen af
te dekken met bijvoorbeeld kranten, een tafelkleed, gordijnen, enz.
• Plaats geen open vlammen, bijvoorbeeld een brandende kaars, op het
apparaat.
• Houd u steeds aan de milieuvoorschriften wanneer u gebruikte batterijen
wegdoet.
• Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan druppels of spatten.
• Plaats geen voorwerpen gevuld met water, bijvoorbeeld een vaas, op het
apparaat.
OBSERVERA:
• Ventilationen bör inte förhindras genom att täcka för
ventilationsöppningarna med föremål såsom tidningar, bordsdukar,
gardiner osv.
• Inga blottade brandkällor, såsom tända ljus, bör placeras på apparaten.
• Tänk på miljöaspekterna när du bortskaffar batteri.
• Apparaten får inte utsättas för vätska.
• Inga objekt med vätskor, såsom vaser, får placeras på apparaten.
NOTE ON USE / HINWEISE ZUM GEBRAUCH /
OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION / NOTE SULL’USO
NOTAS SOBRE EL USO / ALVORENS TE GEBRUIKEN / OBSERVERA
• Avoid high temperatures.
Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed
on a rack.
• Vermeiden Sie hohe Temperaturen.
Beachten Sie, daß eine ausreichend Luftzirkulation
gewährleistet wird, wenn das Gerät auf ein Regal
gestellt wird.
• Eviter des températures élevées
Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur suffisante
lors de l’installation sur une étagère.
• Evitate di esporre l’unità a temperature alte.
Assicuratevi che ci sia un’adeguata dispersione del
calore quando installate l’unità in un mobile per
componenti audio.
• Evite altas temperaturas
Permite la suficiente dispersión del calor cuando
está instalado en la consola.
• Vermijd hoge temperaturen.
Zorg voor een degelijk hitteafvoer indien het
apparaat op een rek wordt geplaatst.
• Undvik höga temperaturer.
Se till att det finns möjlighet till god värmeavledning
vid montering i ett rack.
• Handle the power cord carefully.
Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.
• Gehen Sie vorsichtig mit dem Netzkabel um.
Halten Sie das Kabel am Stecker, wenn Sie den
Stecker herausziehen.
• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec précaution.
Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du cordon.
• Manneggiate il filo di alimentazione con cura.
Agite per la spina quando scollegate il cavo dalla
presa.
• Maneje el cordón de energía con cuidado.
Sostenga el enchufe cuando desconecte el cordón
de energía.
• Hanteer het netsnoer voorzichtig.
Houd het snoer bij de stekker vast wanneer deze
moet worden aan- of losgekoppeld.
• Hantera nätkabeln varsamt.
Håll i kabeln när den kopplas från el-uttaget.
• Keep the set free from moisture, water, and dust.
• Halten Sie das Gerät von Feuchtigkeit, Wasser und
Staub fern.
• Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau et
lapoussière.
• Tenete l’unità lontana dall’umidità, dall’acqua e dalla
polvere.
• Mantenga el equipo libre de humedad, agua y polvo.
• Laat geen vochtigheid, water of stof in het apparaat
binnendringen.
• Utsätt inte apparaten för fukt, vatten och damm.
• Unplug the power cord when not using the set for
long periods of time.
• Wenn das Gerät eine längere Zeit nicht verwendet
werden soll, trennen Sie das Netzkabel vom Netzstecker.
• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation lorsque l’appareil
n’est pas utilisé pendant de longues périodes.
• Disinnestate il filo di alimentazione quando avete
l’intenzione di non usare il filo di alimentazione per un
lungo periodo di tempo.
• Desconecte el cordón de energía cuando no utilice el
equipo por mucho tiempo.
• Neem altijd het netsnoer uit het stopkontakt wanneer
het apparaat gedurende een lange periode niet wordt
gebruikt.
• Koppla ur nätkabeln om apparaten inte kommer att
användas i lång tid.
* (For sets with ventilation holes)
• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.
• Die Belüftungsöffnungen dürfen nicht verdeckt
werden.
• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.
• Non coprite i fori di ventilazione.
• No obstruya los orificios de ventilación.
• De ventilatieopeningen mogen niet worden beblokkeerd.
• Täpp inte till ventilationsöppningarna.
• Do not let foreign objects in the set.
• Keine fremden Gegenstände in das Gerät kommen
lassen.
• Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans l’appareil.
• E’ importante che nessun oggetto è inserito
all’interno dell’unità.
• No deje objetos extraños dentro del equipo.
• Laat geen vreemde voorwerpen in dit apparaat vallen.
• Se till att främmande föremål inte tränger in i
apparaten.
• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in
contact with the set.
• Lassen Sie das Gerät nicht mit Insektiziden, Benzin
oder Verdünnungsmitteln in Berührung kommen.
• Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du
benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.
• Assicuratevvi che l’unità non venga in contatto con
insetticidi, benzolo o solventi.
• No permita el contacto de insecticidas, gasolina y
diluyentes con el equipo.
• Laat geen insektenverdelgende middelen, benzine of
verfverdunner met dit apparaat in kontakt komen.
• Se till att inte insektsmedel på spraybruk, bensen och
thinner kommer i kontakt med apparatens hölje.
• Never disassemble or modify the set in any way.
• Versuchen Sie niemals das Gerät auseinander zu
nehmen oder auf jegliche Art zu verändern.
• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil d’une
manière ou d’une autre.
• Non smontate mai, nè modificate l’unità in nessun
modo.
• Nunca desarme o modifique el equipo de ninguna
manera.
• Nooit dit apparaat demonteren of op andere wijze
modifiëren.
• Ta inte isär apparaten och försök inte bygga om den.
3
CAUTION:
A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING:
To completely disconnect this product from the mains, disconnect
the plug from the wall socket outlet.
The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply
to the unit and must be within easy access by the user.
This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can be
reused. Please dispose of any materials in accordance with
the local recycling regulations.
When discarding the unit, comply with local rules or
regulations.
Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but
disposed of in accordance with the local regulations
concerning chemical waste.
This product and the accessories packed together constitute
the applicable product according to the WEEE directive
except batteries.
VORSICHT:
Um dieses Gerät vollständig von der Stromversorgung
abzutrennen, trennen Sie bitte den Netzstecker von der
Wandsteckdose ab.
Die Hauptstecker werden verwendet, um die Stromversorgung
zum Gerät völlig zu unterbrechen; er muss für den Benutzer gut
und einfach zu erreichen sein.
PRECAUTION:
Pour déconnecter complètement ce produit du courant secteur,
débranchez la prise de la prise murale.
La prise secteur est utilisée pour couper complètement
l’alimentation de l’appareil et l’utilisateur doit pouvoir y accéder
facilement.
ATTENZIONE:
Per scollegare definitivamente questo prodotto dalla rete di
alimentazione elettrica, togliere la spina dalla relativa presa.
La spina di rete viene utilizzata per interrompere completamente
l’alimentazione all’unità e deve essere facilmente accessibile
all’utente.
PRECAUCIÓN:
Para desconectar completamente este producto de la alimentación
eléctrica, desconecte el enchufe del enchufe de la pared.
El enchufe de la alimentación se utiliza para interrumpir por
completo el suministro de alimentación a la unidad y debe de
encontrarse en un lugar al que el usuario tenga fácil acceso.
HINWEIS ZUM RECYCLING:
Das Verpackungsmaterial dieses Produktes ist für zum Recyceln geeignet
und kann wieder verwendet werden. Bitte entsorgen Sie alle Materialien
entsprechend der örtlichen Recycling-Vorschriften.
Beachten Sie bei der Entsorgung des Gerätes die örtlichen Vorschriften und
Bestimmungen.
Die Batterien dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll geworfen oder verbrannt
werden; bitte geben Sie die Batterien gemäß örtlichen Bestimmungen an
den Sammelstellen oder Sondermüllplätzen ab.
Dieses Produkt zusammen mit den Zubehörteilen ist das geltende Produkt
der WEEE-Direktive, davon ausgenommen sind die Batterien.
UNE REMARQUE CONCERNANT LE RECYCLAGE:
Les matériaux d’emballage de ce produit sont recyclables et peuvent être
réutilisés. Veuillez disposer de tout matériau conformément aux réglements
de recylage locaux.
Lorsque vous mettez cet appareil au rebut, respectez les lois ou
réglementations locales.
Les piles ne doivent jamais être jetées ou incinérées, mais mises au rebut
conformément aux réglements locaux concernant les déchets chimiques.
Ce produit et les accessoires emballés ensemble sont des produits conformes à
la directive DEEE sauf pour les piles.
NOTA RELATIVA AL RICICLAGGIO:
Om de voeding van dit product volledig te onderbreken moet de
stekker uit het stopcontact worden getrokken.
De netstekker wordt gebruikt om de stroomtoevoer naar het
toestel volledig te onderbreken en moet voor de gebruiker
gemakkelijk bereikbaar zijn.
I materiali di imballaggio di questo prodotto sono riutilizzabili e riciclabili.
Smaltire i materiali conformemente alle normative locali sul riciclaggio.
Per smaltire l’unità, osservare la normativa in vigore nel luogo di utilizzo.
Non gettare le batterie, né incenerirle, ma smaltirle conformemente alla
normativa locale sui rifiuti chimici.
Questo prodotto e gli accessori inclusi nell’imballaggio sono applicabili alla direttiva
RAEE, ad eccezione delle batterie.
FÖRSIKTIHETSMÅTT:
ACERCA DEL RECICLAJE:
Koppla loss stickproppen från eluttaget för att helt skilja produkten
från nätet.
Stickproppen används för att helt bryta strömförsörjningen till
apparaten, och den måste vara lättillgänglig för användaren.
Los materiales de embalaje de este producto son reciclables y se pueden
volver a utilizar. Disponga de estos materiales siguiendo los reglamentos de
reciclaje de su localidad.
Cuando se deshaga de la unidad, cumpla con las reglas o reglamentos
locales.
Las pilas nunca deberán tirarse ni incinerarse. Deberá disponer de ellas
siguiendo los reglamentos de su localidad relacionados con los desperdicios
químicos.
Este producto junto con los accesorios empaquetados es el producto aplicable
a la directiva RAEE excepto pilas.
VOORZICHTIGHEID:
EEN AANTEKENING WAT BETREFT HET RECYCLEREN:
Het inpakmateriaal van dit product is recycleerbaar en kan opnieuw gebruikt
worden. Er wordt verzocht om zich van elk afvalmateriaal te ontdoen
volgens de plaatselijke voorschriften.
Volg voor het wegdoen van de speler de voorschriften voor de verwijdering
van wit- en bruingoed op.
Batterijen mogen nooit worden weggegooid of verbrand, maar moeten
volgens de plaatselijke voorschriften betreffende chemisch afval worden
verwijderd.
Op dit product en de meegeleverde accessoires, m.u.v. de batterijen is de
richtlijn voor afgedankte elektrische en elektronische apparaten (WEEE) van
toepassing.
EN KOMMENTAR OM ÅTERVINNING:
Produktens emballage är återvinningsbart och kan återanvändas. Kassera
det enligt lokala återvinningsbestämmelser.
När du kasserar enheten ska du göra det i överensstämmelse med lokala
regler och bestämmelser.
Batterier får absolut inte kastas i soporna eller brännas. Kassera dem enligt
lokala bestämmelser för kemiskt avfall.
Denna apparat och de tillbehör som levereras med den är de som uppfyller
gällande WEEE-direktiv, med undantag av batterierna.
4
2 INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing the DENON AVC-A1XVA AV Surround Amplifier. This remarkable component has been engineered to provide superb
surround sound listening with home theater sources such as DVD, as well as providing outstanding high fidelity reproduction of your favorite music
sources.
As this product is provided with an immense array of features, we recommend that before you begin hookup and operation that you review the
contents of this manual before proceeding.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
z
x
c
v
b
Before Using...............................................................................7
Cautions on Installation............................................................7
Cautions on Handling................................................................8
Features .............................................................................8 ~ 10
Connections .............................................................................10
Connecting Audio Components.................................................11
Connecting Video Components .................................................12
Connecting video components equipped with S-Video
jacks...........................................................................................13
Connecting video components equipped with Component
Video video jacks .......................................................................14
Connecting equipment with HDMI terminals............................15
Connecting equipment with DVI terminals ...............................16
The video conversion function...................................................17
On screen display for component video outputs and
HDMI output..............................................................................17
Connecting the external input (EXT.IN) jacks ............................18
Connecting the ZONE2 jacks.....................................................19
Connecting a component with video and audio jacks to
the V.AUX input jacks ................................................................19
DENON LINK connections.........................................................20
Connecting IEEE1394 devices...................................................21
Speaker system connections ..............................................22, 23
n Part Names and Functions
Front panel...........................................................................24, 25
Display .......................................................................................26
Remote control unit...................................................................27
m System Setup...........................................................................28
Use the following buttons to set up the system ......................28
System setup items and default values............................28 ~ 31
Speaker system layout ..............................................................32
Before setting up the system....................................................33
Auto Setup / Room EQ..............................................................33
Measurement flow ...............................................................34
Before performing the Auto Setup procedure .....................35
(I) Connecting the microphone for Auto Setup ........................35
[1] Auto Setup / Room EQ ......................................................36
1-1. Setting the Auto Setup.........................................................36
(II) Extra Setup ...........................................................................37
(III) Preliminary measurements...................................................38
(IV) Speaker System measurement......................................39, 40
(V) Check of the measurement result .................................41, 42
About the error message .....................................................42
1-2. Setting the Room EQ Setup...........................................43, 44
1-3. Setting the Direct Mode.......................................................44
1-4. Setting the MIC Input Select................................................45
1-5. Check the Parameter ...................................................46 ~ 48
[2] Speaker Setup ....................................................................48
2-1. Setting the type of speakers ..........................................49, 50
2-2. Setting the low frequency distribution ...........................50, 51
2-3. Setting the Delay Time ...................................................51, 52
2-4. Setting the Channel Level ..............................................53, 54
2-5. Setting the Crossover Frequency.........................................55
Setting the crossover frequency individually
for the different channels...............................................56
2-6. Selecting the Surround Speakers for the
different surround modes.....................................................57
2-7. Setting the THX Audio Setup
[1] Setting for using a THX Ultra2 compatible
subwoofer ......................................................................58
[2] Surround Back Speaker Position Settings......................59
[3]
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
[4]
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
[5]
5-1.
Audio Input Setup ..............................................................60
Setting the Digital In Assignment ..................................60, 61
Setting the EXT.IN Setup................................................62, 63
Setting the Input Function Level ..........................................64
Setting the Function Rename ........................................65, 66
Setting the IEEE1394 Assignment .......................................67
Selecting the IEEE1394 Auto Function ................................68
Video Setup ........................................................................69
Setting the HDMI/DVI In Assignment ............................69, 70
Setting the Component In Assignment................................71
Setting the Video Convert Mode..........................................72
Setting the HDMI/Componernt Out ...............................73, 74
Setting the Audio Delay........................................................75
Setting the On Screen Display (OSD) ..................................76
Advanced Playback ............................................................77
Setting the 2ch Direct/Stereo...............................................78
Setting the front B speakers when the surround
mode is set to the 2-channel Direct or Stereo...............78
5-2. Setting the Dolby Digital Setup ............................................79
5-3. Setting Auto Surround Mode ...............................................80
5-4. Setting the Manual EQ Setup ........................................81, 82
Procedure for copying the “Flat” correction curve........83
[6] Zone Setup (ZONE2 = 5.1/7.1ch) ......................................84
6-1. Setting the type of speakers for ZONE2 ..............................85
6-2. Setting the low frequency distribution for ZONE2 ...............86
6-3. Setting the Delay Time for ZONE2.................................87, 88
6-4. Setting the Channel Level for ZONE2...........................89, 90
6-5. Setting the Crossover Frequency for ZONE2.......................91
6-6. Setting the Video Setup for ZONE2
[1] Video Convert Mode ................................................92, 93
[2] Audio Delay ....................................................................93
6-7. ZONE3 and ZONE4 tone control and channel level
setting.............................................................................94, 95
Zone Setup setting when ZONE2 is set to STEREO or
MONO..........................................................................................95
[7] Option Setup.......................................................................96
7-1. Setting the Channel Setup ...................................................96
Channel setup flow ..................................................96, 97
The number of channels that can be selected ..............98
The subwoofer output composition...............................98
Connecting the preouts..................................................99
7-2. Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment...........................100
Power amplifier assignment flow ........................100, 101
Amp Assign mode........................................................102
Bi-Amp connection.......................................................102
Table of power amplifier assignment modes ....102 ~ 104
Table of channels to which power amplifiers can
be assigned ..................................................................104
7-3. Setting the Volume Control ........................................105, 106
7-4. Setting the Trigger Out...............................................106, 107
7-5. Setting the AC Outlet Assignment.....................................108
7-6. Protecting the setting and memory backup
[1] User Memory .......................................................109, 110
[2] Setup Lock ...........................................................110, 111
7-7. Setting the Network Setup
[1] Setting the IP Address .........................................111, 112
[2] Setting the Proxy..........................................................113
[3] Setting the Network Option.................................114, 115
After Completing system setup .................................................115
5
, Remote Control Unit
.
⁄0
⁄1
⁄2
6
Inserting the Batteries .............................................................116
Using the Remote Control Unit ...............................................116
Operating DENON audio components ............................117, 118
Preset memory ........................................................................119
Operating a component stored in the preset memory ...120, 121
Learning function .....................................................................122
System call ......................................................................123, 124
Punch Through ........................................................................124
Setting the back light’s lighting time .......................................125
Setting the brightness .............................................................125
Resetting .................................................................................126
Operation
Operating the Remote control unit..........................................127
Before operating ......................................................................128
Playing the input source ..................................................129, 130
Playback using external input (EXT.IN) jacks ...................131, 132
Playing audio sources (CDs and DVDs) ...................................132
After stating playback
[1] Setting the Room EQ...................................................133
[2] Listening over headphone............................................133
[3] Turning the sound off temporarily (MUTING)...............133
[4] Combining the currently playing sound with
the desired image (VIDEO SELECT) ............................133
[5] Checking the currently playing program source, etc. ..134
[6] Switching the surround speakers ................................134
[7] Switching between HDMI and DVI monitor output.....134
[8] Selection of resolution setting (SCALE) .......................135
Multi-source recording/playback
[1] Playing one source while recording another
(REC OUT mode)..........................................................135
[2] Recording Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel
sources.........................................................................136
[3] Dolby Headphone recording.........................................136
Surround
Adjustment steps that need to be performed prior to
surround sound playback
[1] Test Tone ......................................................................137
[2] Channel Level.......................................................137, 138
Fader function..........................................................................138
Playing modes for different sources .......................................139
THX Surround EX / Home THX Cinema mode
[1] Playing sources recorded in Dolby Surround in the
Home THX Cinema Surround mode ....................140, 141
[2] To play in the THX Surround EX/Home THX Cinema
Surround mode for sources recorded in Dolby Digital
or DTS ..........................................................................142
Dolby Digital mode and DTS Surround .........................143 ~ 145
Night mode ..............................................................................145
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Dolby Pro Logic II) mode ................146, 147
DTS NEO:6 mode ............................................................148, 149
The Dolby Headphone .....................................................149, 150
Memory and call-out functions (USER MODE function) .........150
DENON Original Surround Modes
Surround modes and their features.........................................151
DSP surround simulation .................................................152, 153
Tone control setting
[1] Adjusting the tone using the Remote control
unit .......................................................................153, 154
[2] Adjusting the tone from the Main unit ................154, 155
Using the Network Audio Function
Internet radio function .............................................................155
Music server function..............................................................155
System requirements ......................................................156, 157
Listening to lnternet radio ...............................................158, 159
Presetting (registering) lnternet radio stations ........................160
Registering lnternet radio stations in your favorites........161, 162
Character search function (searching by first letter) ...............162
Updating the list of radio stations............................................163
Playing music files stored on the computer (music server)
.........................................................................................164, 165
Operating the AVC-A1XVA using a browser ............................165
⁄3 Multi Zone
Multi-zone playback with multi-source ....................................166
[1] ZONE2 playback ................................................166 ~ 168
[2] ZONE3 playback...........................................................169
[3] ZONE4 playback...........................................................170
[4] Outputting a program source to amplifier, etc., in a
ZONE2 room (ZONE2 SELECT mode) .........................171
[5] Outputting a program source to amplifier, etc., in a
ZONE3 or ZONE4 room
(ZONE3, ZONE4 SELECT mode)..................................171
Remote control unit operations during multi-source
playback ...................................................................................172
System Setup for multi-zone ...................................................173
Adjustment steps that need to be performed prior to
surround sound playback in ZONE2
[1] Test Tone ......................................................................173
[2] Channel Level...............................................................174
Fader function..........................................................................175
ZONE2 Surround......................................................................176
Memory and call-out functions of ZONE2
(USER MODE function) ...........................................................177
ZONE2 tone control setting.............................................178, 179
⁄4 Last Function Memory ..........................................................179
⁄5 Initialization of the Microprocessor.....................................179
⁄6 Troubleshooting.....................................................................180
⁄7 Additional Information
Optimum surround sound for different sources......................181
Surround back speakers ..........................................................182
Speaker setting examples
[1] For THX Surround EX systems
(using surround back speakers) ...........................183, 184
[2] When not using surround back speakers ....................184
Surround
[1] Dolby Surround ....................................................185, 186
[2] DTS Digital Surround............................................186, 187
[3] DTS-ES™......................................................................187
[4] DTS 96/24 ....................................................................188
[5] Home THX Cinema Surround...............................188, 189
[6] THX Surround EX .........................................................189
Audyssey MultEQ XT ..............................................................190
HDCD.......................................................................................190
DENON LINK ...........................................................................191
About IEEE1394 ......................................................................191
About HDMI.............................................................................191
Advanced AL24 Processing.....................................................191
Windows Media Connect ........................................................192
vTuner ......................................................................................192
Windows Media DRM .............................................................192
Surround modes and parameters....................................193, 194
Relationship between the video input signal and
monitor output (MAIN ZONE)..........................................195, 196
Relationship between the video input signal and
monitor output (ZONE2) ..........................................................196
⁄8 Specifications.........................................................................197
List of preset codes.....................................................198 ~ 233
2 ACCESSORIES
Check that the following parts are included in addition to the main unit:
q Operating instructions ..............................................................1
w CD-ROM (Operating instructions) ............................................1
e Service station list ....................................................................1
r Power supply cord....................................................................1
w
r
t Remote control unit (RC-1036).................................................1
y LR6/AA alkaline batteries .........................................................2
u Setup microphone (DM-S305)..................................................1
t
y
u
1 BEFORE USING
Pay attention to the following before using this unit:
• Moving the set
To prevent short circuits or damaged wires in the connection cords,
always unplug the power supply cord and disconnect the
connection cords between all other audio components when
moving the set.
• Store these instructions in a safe place.
After reading, store these instructions along with the warranty in a
safe place.
• Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ
from the actual set for explanation purposes.
• Before turning the power switch on
Check once again that all connections are proper and that there are
not problems with the connection cords. Always set the power
switch to the standby position before connecting and disconnecting
connection cords.
2 CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION
Noise or disturbance of the picture may be generated if this unit or
any other electronic equipment using microprocessors is used near a
tuner or TV.
If this happens, take the following steps:
• Install this unit as far as possible from the tuner or TV.
• Set the antenna wires from the tuner or TV away from this unit’s
power supply cord and input/output connection cords.
• Noise or disturbance tends to occur particularly when using indoor
antennas or 300 Ω/ohms feeder wires. We recommend using
outdoor antennas and 75 Ω/ohms coaxial cables.
Note
Note:
For heat dispersal, do not install this equipment in a confined
space such as a book case or similar unit.
Wall
7
3 CAUTIONS ON HANDLING
• Switching the input function when input jacks are not
connected
A clicking noise may be produced if the input function is switched
when nothing is connected to the input jacks. If this happens,
either turn down the MASTER VOLUME control or connect
components to the input jacks.
• Whenever the power switch is in the STANDBY state, the
apparatus is still connected on AC line voltage.
Please be sure to turn off the power switch or unplug the cord
when you leave home for, say, a vacation.
• Muting of PRE OUT jacks and SPEAKER terminals
The PRE OUT jacks and SPEAKER terminals include a muting
circuit. Because of this, the output signals are greatly reduced for
several seconds after the power switch is turned on or input
function, surround mode or any other-set-up is changed. If the
volume is turned up during this time, the output will be very high
after the muting circuit stops functioning. Always wait until the
muting circuit turns off before adjusting the volume.
4 FEATURES
1. DENON Proprietary Digital Technology
1) NEW D.D.S.C.-Digital (Dynamic Discrete Surround Circuit)
Powered by four high performance, high speed 32 bit floating
point DSP processors, the AVC-A1XVA represents the pinnacle
of precision DSP processing technology. Unlike competitive
units, DENON’s discrete surround technology consists of
selected individual processors and ancillary elements, working
in harmony via proprietary DENON inter-IC digital communication
technology.
2) DENON Link
With select DENON DVD players that feature DENON Link
digital outputs, encrypted digital multi-channel audio transfers
to the AVC-A1XVA directly, eliminating unnecessary digital-toanalog and subsequent analog-to-digital conversions for the
highest possible signal transfer integrity. The DENON Link
function supports up to ultra high resolution 192 kHz DVD-A
digital datastreams, for maximum reproduced fidelity.
3) Latest AL24 DSP Processing
DENON’s acclaimed Advanced AL24 DSP processing improves
the fidelity of high resolution stereo PCM sources such as CD
and DVD (up to 192 kHz sampling frequencies), by
sophisticated DSP processing algorithms that improve low
level detail and enhance fidelity by upsampling and adaptive
filtering techniques. Advanced AL24 provides increased
dynamic range and spatial information; bring out all the
nuances with optimum clarity and natural fidelity.
4) AL24 DSP Processing For All Channels
For the AVC-A1XVA, DENON’s AL24 processing supports
multi-channel DVD-Audio for all channels, including the ZONE2
multi-channel theater channels, for optimum fidelity and low
level detail reproduction in both the MAIN ZONE as well as the
second multi-channel ZONE2 system.
2. Latest Surround Decoding Technology
1) Dolby Digital
Using advanced digital audio compression and decoding
technologies, Dolby Digital provides up to 5.1 channels of wide
bandwidth, wide dynamic range multi-channel high fidelity
surround sound. Dolby Digital is the default digital multichannel audio delivery system for DVD and USA/Canada high
definition television systems.
2) Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx adds the ability to provide up to 7.1 channel
reproduction from conventional stereo (2 channel) sources and
5.1channel sources, including surround back reproduction with
a 6.1 or 7.1 surround sound system. Pro Logic IIx has three
modes: one for movie-based soundtracks; one for stereo
music sources, and a game mode for game consoles with
stereo (2 channel) audio outputs.
8
3) Dolby Headphone
Developed jointly by Dolby Laboratories and Lake Technology
Ltd. of Australia, Dolby Headphone decoding provides thrilling
surround sound effects of your favorite movie and music
sources when using conventional stereo headphones.
4) DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
DTS provides up to 5.1 channels of wide-range, high fidelity
surround sound from sources such as DTS-encoded CDs,
DVDs with DTS soundtracks, and DVD-Audio discs that provide
DTS soundtracks.
5) DTS-ES and DTS Neo:6
The AVC-A1XVA also supports the DTS-ES 6.1 matrix and
discrete encoded surround formats, and also features DTS
Neo:6 stereo-to-surround decoding with both Music and Movie
modes for superb surround sound from conventional stereo
sources.
6) DTS 96/24 Decoding
Digital Theater Systems 96/24 provides ultra high resolution 24
bit, 96 kHz sampling for optimum wide bandwidth fidelity and
superb dynamic range. The AVC-A1XVA is equipped to
faithfully decode DTS 96/24 discs.
7) HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital
Using sophisticated encoding and decoding technologies, the
HDCD format provides improved fidelity and dynamic range
from encoded Compact Discs (which number in the thousands
of titles). The AVC-A1XVA, via a standard digital audio
connection from a CD player or DVD player, internally
recognizes and decodes HDCD discs for optimum fidelity and
widest dynamic range.
8) Home THX Ultra2 Certified
Home THX is the unique collaboration between THX Ltd. and
audio/video equipment manufacturers. THX Ultra2 certification
is the highest performance level, and provides a rigorous set of
performance standards along with proprietary surround sound
post-processing technologies, all designed to maximize the
surround soundtrack playback experience in the home theater.
In addition, the AVC-A1XVA is fully compatible with THX
Surround EX, which provides extended surround sound via
additional surround back channel reproduction, first employed
on Star Wars Episode 1 – The Phantom Menace, and featured
on many major motion pictures since. As well, the AVCA1XVA’s power amplifier section fully complies with the latest
THX Ultra2 standards, and two new addition surround modes
are also provided – THX Ultra2 Cinema mode and THX Music
mode. In addition, the AVC-A1XVA also incorporates THX’s
new THX Games mode, for thrilling surround sound effects
from two channel game box audio sources.
3. Movie & Music Surround For The Whole House
The AVC-A1XVA’s versatile Multi Source functions let you select
different audio and video sources for each room in your home.
Different audio and video multi-channel sources can be enjoyed in
the home theater (Main room), as well as a multi-channel audio
and video source directed to a second room. Additional zones (3
and 4) can also receive video and stereo audio as well. The AVCA1XVA features Freely Assignable Ten Power Amp Channels, so
that you can decide which power amp channels can be dedicated
to the MAIN ZONE, the secondary zone (ZONE2) as well as to two
additional zones (ZONE3 and ZONE4), as well as providing line
level outputs to external power amplifiers.
1) ZONE2 Theater Capability
With up to 9.1 system in the main home theater room, the
AVC-A1XVA provides for a second, fully 5.1 capable system in
ZONE2, with component video and five amplifier channels as
well, with video up-conversion if desired.
2) ZONE3 Independent Audio & Video
The AVC-A1XVA provides the ability for a third independent
zone, with selectable audio and video sources.
3) ZONE4 Independent Audio
ZONE4 is ideal for a room where you can enjoy a different
stereo source, for background music listening.
4. Ten High Power Assignable Power Amplifiers
1) Featuring high current, THX-certified high power amplifier
channels, the AVC-A1XVA is equipped to drive high
performance loudspeakers with unprecedented dynamic range
and low impedance drive capability, with each of the ten
amplifier channels rated at 170 W into 8 Ω/ohms. Each channel
can be freely assigned to the main home theater room, as well
as assigned to additional zones for multi-channel or stereo or
even monophonic distributed audio/video and audio-only
functions. For example, you might choose to have seven
amplifier channels dedicated to a full THX Surround EX & DTS
Surround EX 7.1 channel system in the main room, while still
allowing a powered stereo function in the second zone, and a
third monophonic background music function in another room.
Or, you could have a principal 5.1 channel setup in the main
home theater room, while having a secondary powered 5.1
system in the second zone. You could even have (with
compatible bi-amplified-capable speakers) a true 5.1 bi-amped
system in the main room, along with additional line-levelpowered systems in up to three additional rooms.
5. Audiophile Audio Quality Throughout
1) Separated Pure Audio & Video Chassis Construction
For optimum audio and video quality, the AVC-A1XVA features
dedicated and physically separated low and high level audio
and video circuits to prevent degrading mutual interference.
2) Optimum Chassis Stability
As the AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a massive toroidal main
power supply and additional secondary power supplies,
centrally located within the chassis, a fifth chassis foot helps
reduce the physical vibration that can cause mechanicallyinduced vibration-related distortions.
3) Multiple Separate Power Supply Topologies
No less than six individual power transformers (one very large
toroidal unit, and five additional lower voltage power
transformer units) are provided, ensuring that each critical subsection draws power from its own dedicated supply,
eliminating minute fluctuations that occur with single
transformer-equipped competitive units.
4) Multiple Toroidal Sub-Windings
The massive main toroidal power transformer (which powers
the ten amplifier channels block) features dedicated subwindings and high current, ultra stable DC rectifiers and high
rated smoothing/storage capacitors, with a tremendous
132,000 µF total storage capacity.
5) Pure Direct Mode
According to the selected input source, the Pure Direct Mode
provides the optimum decoding by switching off any and all
unnecessary processing (video disable, tone bybass, and other
unnecessary circuits).
6) Dual Surround Speaker Mode
DENON was the first to introduce Dual Surround Mode
Speaker Switching, where two different types (and positions)
of surround speakers could be chosen according to the source
material – diffuse surround speakers located at the sides of the
listening position for movie surround sound, and directional
surround speakers located at the room’s rear corners for music
surround sound. The AVC-A1XVA also adds the ability to have
both powered (AVC-A1XVA amplified) music and surround
sound speaker systems, according to each individual home
theater’s setup circumstances.
7) Highest Quality Input & Output Terminals
The AVC-A1XVA audio and video input terminals are goldplated, as are the ten speaker terminal pairs.
6. High Resolution Video Section
1) Component Video Switching
In addition to composite and S-Video switching, the AVCA1XVA provides no less than five sets of component video
inputs via RCA-type coaxial connectors, as well as an additional
sixth set of component video inputs via BNC connectors, as
well as two sets of component video outputs (one for RCAtype coaxial, one for BNC connectors), with additional
capability for component video output to ZONE2. These
component video circuits are fully HD-compatible, with a flat
response to 100 MHz, far above the 38 MHz requirement for
true HD reproduction, ensuring crisp and clear HDTV picture
quality.
2) Video Up And Down Conversion Function
To eliminate video signal incompatibility, the AVC-A1XVA is
equipped with video up-conversion and down-conversion.
Composite and S-Video signals are internally up-converted to
component video for the MAIN ZONE, and down-converted for
480i component video signals. ZONE2 features downconversion from S-Video to composite video.
3) Progressive Scanning & Scaling Function
Via high quality Faroudja DCDi™ (*1) processing, the AVCA1XVA converts standard definition interlaced video to higher
resolution progressive scanning format – 480i interlace to 480p
progressive. For non-copy-protected video signals, further upconversion to HD 1080i video is also provided, for highest
visual quality with compatible HD video displays.
4) High Resolution 12 bit/216 MHz Video D/A Conversion
Featuring Analog Devices ADV-7310 Noise Shaped Video (*2)
digital-to-analog converters, the AVC-A1XVA provides superior
high resolution video output free from video noise and
conversion artifacts.
5) Superior S-Video Processing
A 3-dimensional Y-C separation circuit provides artifact-free
composite video to S-Video up-conversion, and Time Base
Correction for optimum color sharpness with composite video
inputs (MAIN ZONE).
7. Latest Digital A/V Input/Output Capability With Future Upgrade
Ability
1) HDMI/DVI Switching
High-Definition Multimedia Interface provides digital audio and
video signal transfer between source components, the AVCA1XVA, and compatible video displays with HDMI digital
interface. Digital Visual Interface provides similar digital
input/output capability for digital video signals. The AVC-A1XVA
is equipped with three HDMI inputs and one DVI input, and
one each HDMI and DVI outputs to compatible video displays.
Each HDMI/DVI input feeds both HDMI and DVI outputs, for
optimum compatibility with today’s HDMI- and DVI-equipped
video displays.
9
2) IEEE 1394 Compatability
Two IEEE 1394 digital interface inputs are provided, allowing
SACD DSD and DVD-Audio digital audio signal input capability
with select DENON DVD players that feature IEEE 1394 digital
output function, and feature DENON’s D.A.S.S. (DENON Audio
Synchronized System) function, which reduces data jitter for
superior high resolution DSD and PCM reproduction.
3) Ethernet Function
For full compatibility with external control systems, such as
AMX and Crestron, the AVC-A1XVA features Ethernet
connectivity.
4) Network Audio
Connecting the AVC-A1XVA to a computer using an Ethernet
cable allows you to enjoy Internet radio stations and music
servers and to make settings on the computer.
5) RS-232C Serial Input/Output Function
For full compatibility with external control systems, such as
AMX and Crestron, the AVC-A1XVA features a RS-232C serial
I/O port. A second RS-232C serial I/O port is provided on the
front panel, for future software and system upgrade capability.
6) Future Surround Format Inputs & Outputs
For possible future surround sound formats, the AVC-A1XVA
features up to ten channel audio inputs (nine main channels
plus an additional low frequency effects channel), with high
resolution A/D conversion on each input. A second set of 5.1
analog inputs is also provided, for connection to surround
sources such as SACD and/or DVD-Audio players.
8. Easy-To-Use Functions
1) Automatic Setup With Room Equalization
Featuring the newest Audyssey MultEQ XT technology, the
AVC-A1XVA provides automatic room equalization with
multiple measurement points for optimum response
throughout the listening room. A high quality measuring
microphone (DENON DMS-305) is provided.
2) Three User-Definable Easy Modes
Three User Modes are provided, allowing you to store and
recall your favorite Surround modes with individual level
memories at the touch of a button.
3) Digital Audio Delay Function
For optimum picture and sound synchronization, the AVCA1XVA features an adjustable digital audio delay function,
variable from 0 ~ 200 milli-seconds.
4) Adjustable Crossover Frequencies
For the widest compatibility with various main speaker and
subwoofer combinations, the AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a
choice of ten different crossover frequencies (40, 60, 80, 90,
100, 110, 120, 150, 200 and 250 Hz crossover points),
individually adjustable for each of the main speaker systems.
5) The AVC-A1XVA provides dual subwoofer outputs, along with
an additional subwoofer output dedicated for the Low
Frequency Effects channel (MAIN ZONE).
6) Auto Surround Mode
For each input source, a separate memory stores your
preferred surround sound mode and other settings, eliminating
the need to re-configure the Surround mode parameters
whenever you switch between input sources.
7) Assignable High Current Trigger Outputs
Four different 12 Volt trigger outputs allow the automatic
activation of externally controlled devices, such as motorized
drop-down screens, motorized drapery, motorized screen
masking systems and other trigger-activated systems. Each
port supports 12V/250mA trigger-activated functions,
assignable by zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3, or ZONE4).
8) Assignable AC Outlet
Assignable AC convenience outlet is provided, and it can be
activated by choice of input source or surround sound mode by
each zone, to activate specific external components as
necessary.
9) Front Panel Convenience Inputs
A set of front panel A/V inputs allows quick connection of A/V
sources, such as a video camcorder or a game console.
10) Operating the remote control unit
The RC-1036 remote control has a backlit EL display whose
contents change according to the mode or function selected,
with the appropriate remote commands for that mode or
function.
11) Large Fluorescent Display
For easy setup and system monitoring, the AVC-A1XVA
features a clearly readable FL display that provides extensive
system status and setup monitoring.
12) AC Input
Detachable power supply cord.
13) Other Useful Functions
Digital Audio Input to Analog Recording Output conversion
Input Source Re-naming Function
Audio Level Memories for each input
Personal Memory Plus function stores surround mode, level
memories, analog or digital input selection for each input
Volume Level Limiter provides a user-definable pre-set volume
level for multi-zone audio operation
Power On Volume Level Memory provides a user-definable
volume level that is activated every time the AVC-A1XVA is
powered up
Setup Lock Function prevents mis-operation at start-up
Personal Default Memory function
*1:
*2:
“DCDi™” is trademark of Faroudja, a division of Genesis
Microchip Inc.
“NSV” is a trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.
5 CONNECTIONS
• Do not plug in the power supply cord until all connections have
been completed.
• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with
left, right with right).
• Insert the plugs securely. Incomplete connections will result in
the generation of noise.
• Use the AC OUTLET for audio equipment only. Do not use
them for hair driers, etc.
10
• Note that binding pin plug cords together with power supply
cords or placing them near a power transformer will result in
generating hum or other noise.
• Noise or humming may be generated if a connected audio
equipment is used independently without turning the power of
this unit on. If this happens, turn on the power of the this unit.
Connecting Audio Components
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.
CD player
CD recorder or Tape deck
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
B
DIGITAL AUDIO
Connecting a tape deck
Connecting a CD player
Connections for recording:
Connect the tape deck’s recording input jacks (LINE IN or REC) to this unit’s
tape recording (OUT) jacks using pin plug cords.
Connections for playback:
Connect the tape deck’s playback output jacks (LINE OUT or PB) to this unit’s
tape playback (IN) jacks using pin plug cords.
Connect the CD player’s analog output
jacks (ANALOG OUTPUT) to this unit’s CD
jacks using pin plug cords.
Connecting a turntable
Connect the turntable’s output cord to the AVCA1XVA’s PHONO jacks, the L (left) plug to the L jack,
the R (right) plug to the right jack.
Ground wire
NOTE:
This unit cannot be used with MC cartridges
directly. Use a separate head amplifier or step-up
transformer.
Connecting the pre-out jacks
Use these jacks if you wish to connect external power amplifier(s) to increase
the power of the front, center, surround and surround back sound channels,
or for connection to powered loudspeakers.
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to left channel.
Turntable
(MM cartridge)
If humming or other noise is generated when the ground wire is connected,
disconnect the ground wire.
R
Route the connection cords, etc., in such a way that
they do not obstruct the ventilation holes.
L
R
AC outlets (wall)
AC 230V, 50Hz
power supply
cord
(Supplied)
L
L
R
L
R
MD recorder, CD recorder or other
component equipped with digital
input/output jacks
CD player or other component
equipped with digital output jacks
B
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL
DENON Link terminal
Use this terminal to connect a DENON DVD player for
high quality digital multichannel sound.
(See page 20)
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OPTICAL
Connecting the DIGITAL jacks
Use these for connections to audio equipment with
digital output. Only one type of connector needs to
be used, you can decide which based on availability
of coaxial and optical inputs. Refer to pages 60, 61
for instructions on setting this terminal.
NOTES:
• Use 75 Ω/ohms cable pin cords for coaxial connections.
• Use optical cables for optical connections, removing the
cap before connecting.
Connecting the AC OUTLET
AC OUTLET
• SWITCHED (total capacity – 100 W)
The power to the outlet is turned on and off in conjunction with the POWER switch on the main unit, and when the power
is switched between on and standby from the remote control unit.
No power is supplied from this outlet when this unit’s power is at standby. Never connect equipment whose total capacity
is above 100 W.
NOTES:
• Only use the AC OUTLET for audio equipment. Never use them for hair driers, TVs or other electrical appliances.
• The AC outlet can be set to turn on and off for the different functions.
For details, see “Setting the AC Outlet Assignment”. (See page 108)
11
Connecting Video Components
• To connect the video signal, connect using a 75 Ω/ohms video signal cord. Using an improper cable can result in a drop in picture quality.
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.
• The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a function for up and down converting video signals. (See page 17)
The signal connected to the video signal terminal is output to the S-Video and component video monitor out terminals.
But the REC OUT terminals have no conversion function, so when recording connect the appropriate video terminals.
Connecting a DVD player or a video disc player (VDP)
DVD player or video disc player (VDP), etc.
AUDIO
R
R
OUT
L
DVD
• Connect the video disc player’s video output jack (VIDEO OUTPUT) to the VIDEO (yellow) DVD IN jack using a
75 Ω/ohms video coaxial pin plug cord.
• Connect the video disc player’s analog audio output jacks (ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT) to the AUDIO DVD IN
jacks using pin plug cords.
• VDP can be connected to the VDP jacks in the same way.
VIDEO
OUT
L
TV
AUDIO
R
R
OUT
L
Monitor
VIDEO
OUT
Connecting a TV tuner
TV
• Connect the TV’s tuner’s video output jack (VIDEO OUTPUT) to the
VIDEO (yellow) TV IN jack using a 75 Ω/ohms video coaxial pin plug
cord.
• Connect the TV’s tuner’s audio output jacks (AUDIO OUTPUT) to the
AUDIO TV IN jacks using pin plug cords.
L
DBS tuner
Connecting a monitor
Connecting a DBS tuner
B
AUDIO
R
R
OUT
L
VIDEO
IN
DBS
• Connect the DBS tuner’s video output jack (VIDEO OUTPUT) to the
VIDEO (yellow) DBS IN jack using a 75 Ω/ohms video coaxial pin
plug cord.
• Connect the DBS tuner’s audio output jacks (AUDIO OUTPUT) to the
AUDIO DBS IN jacks using pin plug cords.
VIDEO
OUT
MONITOR OUT
• Connect the TV’s video input
jack (VIDEO INPUT) to the
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack
using a 75 Ω/ohms video
coaxial pin plug cord.
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
L
R
L
Note on connecting the digital
input jacks
• Only audio signals are input to
the digital input jacks. For details,
see page 11.
R
R
OUT
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
R
R
OUT
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
Video deck 1
L
IN
L
L
IN
L
OUT IN
VIDEO
Video deck 2
OUT IN
VIDEO
Connecting the video recorders
NOTE:
• Connecting a LD (laser disc) player with a Dolby
Digital RF Output.
The AVC-A1XVA does not have a DD RF demodulator
function. Therefore, you need to use a commercially
available outboard DD RF demodulator and connect its
digital output to one of the AVC-A1XVA available digital
inputs. Refer to the demodulator’s owner’s manual for
further information.
12
• There are four sets of video deck (VCR) jacks, so four video decks can be connected for
simultaneous recording or video copying.
Video input/output connections:
• Connect the video deck’s video output jack (VIDEO OUT) to the VIDEO (yellow) VCR-1 IN jack,
and the video deck’s video input jack (VIDEO IN) to the VIDEO (yellow) VCR-1 OUT jack using
75 Ω/ohms video coaxial pin plug cords.
Connecting the audio output jacks
• Connect the video deck’s audio output jacks (AUDIO OUT) to the AUDIO VCR-1 IN jacks, and the
video deck’s audio input jacks (AUDIO IN) to the AUDIO VCR-1 OUT jacks using pin plug cords.
Connect other video decks to the VCR-2, VCR-3 or VCR-4 jacks in the same way.
Connecting video components equipped with S-Video jacks
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.
• A note on the S-Video input jacks
The input selectors for the S-Video inputs and Video inputs work in conjunction with each other.
• The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a function for converting video signals. (See page 17)
The signal connected to the S-Video signal terminal is output to the composite video and component video monitor out terminals.
But the REC OUT terminals have no conversion function, so when recording connect the S-Video terminals.
DBS tuner
S-VIDEO
OUT
Monitor TV
Connecting a DBS tuner
• Connect the DBS tuner’s S-Video output jack (S-VIDEO OUTPUT) to the
S-VIDEO DBS IN jack using an S-Video connection cord.
B
TV
Connecting a TV
S-VIDEO
OUT
Connecting a monitor
• Connect the TV’s S-Video output jack (S-VIDEO
OUTPUT) to the S-VIDEO TV IN jack using an
S-Video jack connection cord.
DVD player or video disc player (VDP)
S-VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
IN
MONITOR OUT
• Connect the TV’s or DBS tuner’s S-Video input
(S-VIDEO INPUT) to the S-VIDEO MONITOR
OUT jack using a S-Video jack connection cord.
Connecting a DVD player or a video disc player (VDP)
DVD
• Connect the DVD player’s S-Video output jack to the S-VIDEO DVD IN jack using a S-Video
connection cord.
• VDP can be connected to the VDP jacks in the same way.
• It is also possible to connect a video disc player, DVD player, video camcorder, game machine,
etc., to the V.AUX jacks.
Connect the components’ audio inputs and outputs as described on page 11.
Video deck 1
Video deck 2
OUT
IN
S-VIDEO
NOTES:
• The video signal ZONE2 MONITOR OUT (yellow), S-Video
signal ZONE2 MONITOR OUT jack or component signal ZONE2
MONITOR OUT output switches together with the input
function selected with the ZONE2 SELECT (See page 171). To
use as the monitor output, set “SOURCE” as the ZONE2 input
function. The on screen display signals are output from the
ZONE2 MONITOR OUT (See page 171).
• The video signal ZONE3 MONITOR OUT (yellow) or S-Video
signal ZONE3 MONITOR OUT output switches together with
the input function selected with the ZONE3/REC SELECT (See
pages 166 ~168). To use as the monitor output, set “SOURCE”
as the ZONE3/REC SELECT input function. At this time, the on
screen display signals are not output from the ZONE3
MONITOR OUT (See page 169).
OUT
IN
S-VIDEO
Connecting the video decks
• Connect the video deck’s S-Video output jack (S-OUT) to the
1 IN jack and the video deck’s S-Video input jack (S-IN) to the
1 OUT jack using S-Video jack connection cords.
• Connect the video deck’s S-Video output jack (S-OUT) to the
2 IN jack and the video deck’s S-Video input jack (S-IN) to the
2 OUT jack using S-Video jack connection cords.
S-VIDEO VCRS-VIDEO VCRS-VIDEO VCRS-VIDEO VCR-
Connect the third and fourth video deck to the VCR-3 and VCR-4 jacks in the
same way.
13
Connecting video components equipped with Component Video (color difference) video jacks
(Component - Y, PB, PR ; Y, CB, CR)
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.
• The signals input to the component (color difference) video jacks are not output from the VIDEO output jack (yellow) or the S-Video output jack.
• Some video sources with component video outputs are labeled Y, PB, PR, or Y, CB, CR, or Y, B-Y, R-Y. These terms all refer to component video
color difference output.
• The function assigned to the component video input can be changed at the system setup. For details, see “Setting the Component In
Assignment”. (See page 71)
DVD player
Connecting a DVD player
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
PB
PR
Connecting a monitor
MONITOR OUT jack
• Connect the TV’s component (color difference) video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT) to the
COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-2 jack using 75 Ω/ohms coaxial video pin-plug cords.
• Connect the TV’s component (color difference) video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT) to the
COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-1 jack using BNC connectors.
• The COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-1 and the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-2 can be used simultaneously.
• The component video input and/or output jacks may be labeled differently
on some TVs, monitors or video components (Y, PB, PR; Y, CB, CR; Y, B-Y, RY). Check the owner’s manuals for other components for further
information.
14
Monitor
DVD IN jacks
• Connect the DVD player’s component (color difference) video output jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT) to the COMPONENT DVD IN jack using 75
Ω/ ohms coaxial video pin-plug cords.
• In the same way, another video source with component video outputs such
as a DTV/DBS tuner, etc., can be connected to the TV/DBS component
(color difference) video jacks.
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Y
PB
PR
Connecting equipment with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) terminals
• A simple 1-cable connection (using a commercially available cable) with a device having an HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector
allows digital transfer of the digital images of DVD-Video and other sources, and the multi-channel sound of DVD-Audio and DVD-Video.
• The HDMI and DVI-D monitor output connectors on the AVC-A1XVA can only be used one at a time, not simultaneously.
• To provide audio output from AVC-A1XVA’s audio output connector, select “Amp” at the System Setup.
• To provide audio output from the TV, select “TV” at the System Setup. For details, see “Setting the HDMI/DVI In Assignment”. (See pages 69,
70)
DVD player
Connecting a DVD player
HDMI IN terminals
• Connect the DVD player’s HDMI output terminals to the HDMI IN terminal using HDMI cable.
HDMI
OUT
Monitor equipped with
HDMI input connectors
HDMI cable
(commercially available)
Connecting a monitor
HDMI IN
(HDCP)
HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal
• Connect the TV’s HDMI input terminals to the HDMI OUT terminal using HDMI
cable.
HDMI cable
(commercially available)
NOTE:
• The audio signals on the multi/stereo area of super audio CDs are not output.
Use a compatible player to play DVD-Audio discs that are copyright protected by
CPPM.
• Among the devices that support HDMI, some devices can control other devices via the HDMI connector; however, the AVC-A1XVA cannot be
controlled by another device via the HDMI connector.
• The audio signals from the HDMI connector (including the sampling frequency and bit length) may be limited by the equipment that is
connected.
• The on screen display signals are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT.
• Use a cable including the HDMI logo (HDMI certified product) for connection of the HDMI terminal. Normal playback may not be possible if a
cable that does not include the HDMI logo (non-HDMI-certified product) is used.
Copyright Protection System
To play back the digital video and audio of DVD-Video and DVD-Audio through an HDMI/DVI-D connection, both the connected player and
monitor are required to support a copyright protection system called HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is
copy protection technology that comprises data encryption and authentication of the partner equipment. The AVC-A1XVA supports HDCP.
Please see the user’s manual of your video display for more information about this.
15
Connecting equipment with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) terminals
• Connection with equipment that has a DVI (Digital Visual Interface)-D connector permits the transfer of digital images. Make an audio
connection also.
• Commercially-available DVI cables are available in 24-pin and 29-pin types. The AVC-A1XVA supports the 24-pin DVI-D cable.
• The HDMI and DVI-D monitor output connectors on the AVC-A1XVA can only be used one at a time, not simultaneously.
• The on screen display signals are not outputted from the DVI-D MONITOR OUT.
DVD player
Connecting a DVD player
DVI-D IN terminal
• Connect the DVD player’s DVI-D output terminals to the DVI-D IN terminal using DVI-D cable.
DVI-D
OUT
DVI-D IN
(HDCP)
Monitor equipped with
DVI-D input connectors
Connecting a monitor
24P DVI-D cable
(commercially available)
DVI-D MONITOR OUT terminal
• Connect the TV’s DVI-D input terminal to the DVI-D MONITOR OUT terminal using
DVI-D cable.
24P DVI-D cable
(commercially available)
Note on connecting a HDMI/DVI
• The table below indicates the compatibility of connections between
the HDMI/DVI-D output connector of the AVC-A1XVA and monitors
that support HDMI/DVI-D.
16
Monitor with
HDMI
Monitor with DVI-D
(HDCP compatible)
Monitor with DVI-D
(HDCP incompatible)
HDMI output
terminal
C
(Video / Audio)
C
(Only Video)
E
DVI-D output
terminal
C
(Only Video)
C
(Only Video)
E
Copyright Protection System
To play back the digital video and audio of DVD-Video
and DVD-Audio through an HDMI/DVI-D connection,
both the connected player and monitor are required to
support a copyright protection system called HDCP
(High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System).
HDCP is copy protection technology that comprises data
encryption and authentication of the partner equipment.
The AVC-A1XVA supports HDCP. Please see the user’s
manual of your video display for more information about
this.
2 The analog video to HDMI conversion function
The video conversion function
The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a function for up and down
converting video signals.
Because of this, the AVC-A1XVA’s MONITOR OUT terminal can be
connected to the monitor (TV) with a set of cables offering a higher
quality connection, regardless of how the player and the AVC-A1XVA’s
video input terminals are connected.
Generally speaking, analog video connections using the component
video terminals offer the highest quality playback, followed by
connections using the S-Video terminals, then connections using the
regular video terminals (yellow).
• The AVC-A1XVA’s video up-conversion function lets you output
analog video input signals (component – 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 1080i
or 720p; S-Video and composite video - 480i/576i) to the HDMI
monitor output terminal.
• With the AVC-A1XVA, the resolution of the signal output to the
HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal can be selected (See page 69, 70).
The resolutions with which the monitor is compatible can be
checked using the STATUS button on the main unit or the ON
SCREEN button on the remote control unit.
• The resolution of the signal output to the component monitor output
terminal can be set on the AVC-A1XVA.
The flow of the video signals.
(HDMI / DVI-D
terminals)
(HDMI / DVI-D
terminals)
(Component video
terminals)
(Component video
terminals)
NOTE:
• If you do not want to use the function for converting analog video
signals to HDMI signals, select “OFF” for “Analog to HDMI
Convert” at “Setting the HDMI/Component out”(See pages 73,
74).
In this case, the function for video up conversion to the
component video terminal operates.
(MONITOR OUT ZONE2)
(S-Video terminal)
(S-Video terminal)
(MONITOR OUT ZONE2)
(Video terminal)
(Video terminal)
(MONITOR OUT ZONE2)
This unit’s input terminals
This unit’s output terminals
: only MAIN ZONE 480i/576i
Cautions on the ZONE2 video conversion function:
There is no TBC (Time Base Collector) for ZONE2.
When the component video terminals are used to connect the AVCA1XVA with a TV (or monitor, projector, etc.) and the video (yellow) or
S-Video terminals are used to connect the AVC-A1XVA with a VCR,
depending on the combination of the TV and VCR the picture may
flicker in the horizontal direction, be distorted, be out of sync or not
display at all when playing video tapes.
If this happens, connect a commercially available video stabilizer, etc.,
with a TBC (time base corrector) function between the AVC-A1XVA
and the VCR, or if your VCR has a TBC function, turn it on.
On screen display for component video
outputs and HDMI output
• When viewing component video signals or HDMI signals via the
AVC-A1XVA, the on screen display is displayed on the monitor when
the “System Setup” operations are performed and when the
remote control unit’s ON SCREEN button is operated.
• To view the on screen display using an HDMI monitor, set “Analog
to HDMI Convert” at “HDMI Out Setup” to “ON” (default).
• When only component video signals are input to the AVC-A1XVA,
the characters of the on screen display are not displayed over the
picture.
NOTES:
• It is not possible to down-convert from HDMI and DVI-D input
signals to the component, S-Video or composite video monitor
output terminals.
• Video down conversion to the MAIN ZONE’s monitor output is
only possible when the component video input resolution is 480i
(interlaced standard definition video – NTSC format, for North
America) or 576i (interlaced standard definition video – PAL
format, for Europe and other countries).
• To set the video conversion function for the MAIN ZONE to
“OFF” (See page 72).
• Set the resolution of the video output to one that is compatible
with the resolution of your monitor.
• When “Component” is set at “Scaler” under “HDMI/Component
Out”, the signals are output to the HDMI/DVI-D monitor output
terminal with their original resolution. Use a monitor compatible
with a resolution of 480i/576i.
17
Connecting the external input (EXT. IN) jacks
• AVC-A1XVA is equipped with two analog external input terminals for 9.1 channels and 5.1 channels.
• These jacks are for inputting multi-channel audio signals from an outboard decoder, or a component with a different type of multi-channel
decoder, such as a DVD-Audio player, or a multi-channel Super Audio CD player, or other future multi-channel sound format decoder.
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.
L
R
Decoder with 10-, 8- or 6-channel analog output
18
L
R
L
R
L
Center
R
Surround
L
Subwoofer
R
Front
Surround back
L
Surround B
Surround A
Subwoofer
Front
For instructions on playback using the
external input (EXT. IN) jacks, see pages
131, 132.
See pages 62, 63 for “Setting the EXT.IN
Setup”.
Center
R
Decoder with 6-channel analog output
Connecting the ZONE2 jacks
2 ZONE2 preout CONNECTIONS
• If another power amplifier is connected, the ZONE2 preout (variable level) jacks can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 the
same time. (See page 166)
• The ZONE2 video out is only use for the ZONE2.
• The connection diagram below is an example of multi-channel playback in ZONE2. Please see page 168 when you would like to have 2channel playback in ZONE2.
CONTROL terminal
Another room
These terminals are used for an exteral controller.
Perform the following operation before using an external
controller connected to the RS-232C terminal:
1. Press the ON/STANDBY button on the main unit and set
the unit to the operating mode.
2. Perform the operation to turn off the power from the
external control.
3. Check that the product has been set to the standby
mode.
After checking the above, check the connections of the
external controller. Operation is possible.
TV
Power amplifier
TRIGGER OUT
Turn the DC 12V voltage on and off for the individual functions
and surround modes.
For details, see “Setting the Trigger Out”. (See pages 106, 107)
Extension jacks for future use.
L
R
INFRARED SENSOR
R
L
OUTPUT
INPUT
AUX OUT
For instructions on operations using the MULTI ZONE jacks, see pages 166 ~ 179.
See pages 169, 170 for the connection method of ZONE3 and ZONE4.
INFRARED RETRANSMITTER
Connecting a component with video and audio jacks to the V.AUX input jacks
• To connect the video signal, connect using a 75 Ω/ohms video signal cord.
Connecting a Video game
Connecting a video camera
• Connect the Video game component’s output
jacks to this unit’s V. AUX INPUT jacks.
• Connect the video camera component’s output
jacks to this unit’s V. AUX INPUT jacks.
Video game
L
Video camera
R
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
R
L
R
L
VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO OUT
R
L
R
L
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
LINE OUT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
LINE OUT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
19
DENON LINK connection
• High quality digital sound with reduced digital signal transfer loss can be enjoyed by connecting a separately sold DENON LINK compatible DVD
Player.
DVD player
2 Playback using the DENON LINK connector
Digital transfer and multi-channel playback of DVD-Audio discs and other multi-channel sources is possible by connecting the AVC-A1XVA to a
DENON DVD player equipped with a DENON LINK connector using the connection cable included with the DVD player.
2 DENON LINK Setting
When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK” with the System Setup
Digital In Assignment. (See pages 60, 61)
• When the input mode is AUTO and the signals are not be able to transferred by DENON LINK, the unit automatically changes over the input
to the selected signals (ANALOG, EXT. IN or IEEE1394).
1
Assign DENON LINK to the input source.
q Select the input source.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
w Select “DLINK”.
*Digital In
DVD
: DLINK
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Select the input for the playback of signals that cannot
be transferred by DENON LINK.
q Select “DLINK” setting.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
w Select input signal (ANALOG, EXT.IN or IEEE1394).
*Digital In
NoSig.: ANALOG
(Main unit)
20
(Remote control unit)
Connecting IEEE1394 devices
• Use an S400-compatible 4-pin IEEE1394 cable to connect.
• Video signals are not transferred with the AVC-A1XVA’s IEEE1394 interface, so when connecting a video device connect the video signals as
well.
• Assign the IEEE1394 input the input source. (See page 67)
DVD player
2 IEEE1394 network
q Up to 17 devices can be connected using daisy chain type connections.
w Up to 63 devices can be connected using tree type connections.
Do not loop the connections.
e Select IEEE 1394 input. “LINK CHECK” will be displayed while the IEEE 1394 connection is being checked.
r If the connection is looped, “LOOP CONNECT” is displayed. Check the connections and undo the loop.
NOTES:
• Do not use an IEEE1394 cable to connect the AVC-A1XVA with a computer.
• The AVC-A1XVA will not operate when connected to equipment other than that conforming to “IEEE1394 AUDIO (A&M protocol)”
standards or when connected to computer peripherals.
• Also please note that operation is not guaranteed even when connected to IEEE1394-compatible equipment. Whether or not data and
control signals can be sent and received between interconnected IEEE1394-compatible equipment depends on the functions of the
different equipment. Please read the operating instructions of the equipment to be connected.
21
Speaker system connections
• Connect the speaker terminals with the speakers making sure that
like polarities are matched (< with < , > with >). Mismatching of
polarities will result in weak central sound, unclear orientation of
the various instruments, and the sense of direction of the stereo
being impaired.
Speaker Impedance
• Speakers with an impedance from 6 to 16 Ω/ohms can be
connected.
• The protector circuit may be activated if the set is played for long
periods of time at high volumes when speakers with an impedance
lower than the specified impedance are connected.
NOTES:
• NEVER touch the speaker terminals when the power is on.
Doing so could result in electric shocks.
• When making connections, take care that none of the individual
conductors of the speaker cord come in contact with adjacent
terminals, with other speaker cord conductors, or with the rear
panel and screws.
Connecting the speaker cords
1. Loosen by turning
counterclockwise.
2. Insert the cord.
3. Tighten by turning
clockwise.
Either tightly twist or terminate the core wires.
Protector circuit
• This unit is equipped with a high-speed protection circuit. The purpose of this circuit is to protect the speakers under
circumstances such as when the output of the power amplifier is inadvertently short-circuited and a large current flows,
when the temperature surrounding the unit becomes unusually high, or when the unit is used at high output over a long
period which results in an extreme temperature rise.
When the protection circuit is activated, the speaker output is cut off and the power supply indicator LED flashes. Should
this occur, please follow these steps: be sure to switch off the power of this unit, check whether there are any faults
with the wiring of the speaker cables or input cables, and wait for the unit to cool down if it is very hot. Improve the
ventilation condition around the unit and switch the power back on.
If the protection circuit is activated again even though there are no problems with the wiring or the ventilation around the
unit, switch off the power and contact a DENON service center.
Note on speaker impedance
• The protector circuit may be activated if the set is played for long periods of time at high volumes when speakers with
an impedance lower than the specified impedance (for example speakers with an impedance of lower than 4 Ω/ohms)
are connected. If the protector circuit is activated, the speaker output is cut off. Turn off the set’s power, wait for the set
to cool down, improve the ventilation around the set, then turn the power back on.
Cooling fan
• The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a cooling fan to prevent the temperature inside the set from rising. The fan is activated
under certain usage conditions. It is temperature sensitive, to minimize or prevent audible fan noise.
22
Connections
• By default, the speaker system setting is set to 9.1 channels.
• The output of each power amplifier can be assigned to any desired channel to best suit the application.
For details, refer to “Setting the Channel Setup” and “Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment”. (See pages 100 ~ 104)
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.
FRONT SPEAKER SYSTEMS
(L)
SURROUND SPEAKER
SYSTEMS (A)
CENTER SPEAKER SYSTEM
(R)
(L)
(R)
(L)
(R)
IN
• Precautions when connecting speakers
If a speaker is placed near a TV or video monitor, the
colors on the screen may be disturbed by the
speaker’s magnetism. If this should happen, move
the speaker away to a position where it does not
have this effect.
(L)
(R)
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKER SYSTEMS
Connection jack for
subwoofer with built-in
amplifier (subwoofer), etc.
SURROUND SPEAKER
SYSTEMS (B)
NOTE:
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to left channel (L5).
23
6 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Front Panel
• For details on the functions of these parts, refer to the pages given in parentheses ( ).
!4
!3
!8
!5
!2
!9
!0
@0
!6 !7
qw e
r
t
@1 @2 @3 @4 @5
#3 #5 #7 #9 $1
#2 #4 #6 #8 $0
24
!1
y
@6 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1
$2
$3 $4 $5 $6 $7
u i o
q Power ON/STANDBY button .................................................(127)
w Power indicator......................................................................(127)
e Power switch.................................................................(127, 179)
r Headphones jack (PHONES)..................................................(133)
t V.AUX INPUT jacks ..................................................................(19)
y SETUP MIC jack ......................................................................(35)
u USER MODE 1 button...........................................................(150)
i USER MODE 2 button...........................................................(150)
o USER MODE 3 button...........................................................(150)
!0 MASTER VOLUME control knob ...........................................(130)
!1 Master volume indicator........................................................(130)
!2 Display .....................................................................................(26)
!3 Remote control sensor ..........................................................(116)
!4 FUNCTION knob ....................................................................(128)
!5 SOURCE button.....................................................................(128)
!6 ZONE2 SELECT button..........................................................(171)
!7 ZONE3/4/REC SELECT button.......................................(135, 171)
!8 Multi Zone power indicators..................................................(172)
!9 Input source indicators ..........................................................(129)
@0 MultEQ XT indicator ..............................................................(133)
@1 STANDARD button ................................................................(143)
@2 HOME THX CINEMA button .................................................(140)
@3 9CH STEREO button .............................................................(152)
@4 DSP SIMULATION button .....................................................(152)
@5 SYSTEM SETUP button...........................................................(28)
@6 CH SELECT/ENTER button..............................................(28, 137)
@7 SURROUND PARAMETER button.........................................(140)
@8 CINEMA button .............................................................(146, 148)
@9 MUSIC button................................................................(146, 148)
#0 GAME button.........................................................................(146)
#1 ROOM EQ button..................................................................(133)
#2 PURE DIRECT button ............................................................(132)
#3 VIDEO SELECT button ..........................................................(133)
#4 DIRECT/STEREO button ........................................................(132)
#5 MONITOR SELECT button ....................................................(134)
#6 INPUT MODE button.............................................................(129)
#7 SCALE button ........................................................................(135)
#8 ANALOG button.....................................................................(129)
#9 DIMMER button ....................................................................(134)
$0 EXT.IN button.................................................................(130, 131)
$1 VIDEO ON/OFF button ..........................................................(132)
$2 CURSOR button.......................................................................(28)
$3 TONE CONTROL button........................................................(154)
$4 TONE DEFEAT button ...........................................................(154)
$5 SURROUND SPEAKER button ..............................................(134)
$6 SURROUND BACK button.....................................................(142)
$7 STATUS button ......................................................................(134)
25
Display
!4
q w
q INPUT SIGNAL indicator
The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input
signal.
w INPUT SIGNAL CHANNEL indicator
The channels included in the input source will light.
This lights when the digital signal is inputted.
e Information display
This displays the surround mode, function name or setting
value, etc.
r OUTPUT SIGNAL CHANNEL indicator
The audio channels that can be output light.
t SPEAKER indicator
This lights corresponding to the settings of the surround
speakers of the various surround modes.
y Decoder indicator
This lights when each decoder is operating.
u MASTER VOLUME indicator
This displays the volume level.
The Setup item number is displayed in System Setup.
26
!3!2 !1 !0 o i
u
y
r t
e
i IEEE1394 indicator
This lights during playback in a IEEE1394 connection.
o MULTI (ZONE) indicator
ZONE3 mode is selected in ZONE3/REC SELECT.
!0 REC OUT SOURCE indicator.
REC OUT mode is selected in ZONE3/REC SELECT.
!1
DENON LINK indicator
This lights during playback in a DENON LINK connection.
!2 V.OFF indicator
This lights when the operation of the video circuit has been
turned off.
!3 AL24 indicator
The AL24 indicator lights when the PURE DIRECT, DIRECT,
STEREO, MULTI CH PURE DIRECT , MULTI CH DIRECT, MULTI
CH IN mode is selected in the PCM input signal.
!4 INPUT MODE indicator
This lights corresponding to the setting of the INPUT mode.
Remote control unit
• For details on the functions of these parts, refer to the pages given in parentheses ( ).
Remote control signal transmitter
·····················································(116)
IR segment
·····················································(119)
Mode selector buttons
·····················································(117)
USER MODE/SYSTEM
CALL buttons ·····················(123, 150)
INPUT MODE SELECTOR button
·····················································(129)
ROOM EQ button
·····················································(133)
Surround mode/System
buttons ·······························(117, 129)
NIGHT button
·····················································(145)
SYSTEM SETUP button
·······················································(28)
CURSOR buttons
·······················································(28)
Tuner system buttons
·····················································(118)
TEST TONE button
·····················································(137)
SPEAKER button
·····················································(134)
Power buttons
·····················································(127)
CH SELECT/ENTER button
SURROUND PARAMETER button
·····················································(140)
·····················································(28, 137)
ON SCREEN button
·····················································(133)
Tuner system buttons
·····················································(118)
Master volume control buttons
·····················································(130)
HOME/VIDEO SELECT button
·············································(117, 133)
MUTE button
·····················································(133)
FUNCTION/NUMBER
buttons ·······························(119, 128)
RC SETUP button
·····················································(119)
NOTE:
• For instructions on setting the remote control
unit back light’s lighting time (See page 125).
27
7 SYSTEM SETUP
• Once all connections with other AV components have been completed as described in “CONNECTIONS” (see pages 10 ~ 23), make the various
settings described below on the monitor screen using the AVC-A1XVA’s on screen display function.
These settings are required to set up the listening room’s AV system centered around the AVC-A1XVA.
2 Use the following buttons to set up the system
1
Check that the remote control unit set to AMP mode.
2
SYSTEM SETUP button
Press this to display the system setup menu.
ENTER button
Press this to switch the display.
Also use this button to complete the setting.
CURSOR buttons
Use these to move the cursors the left, right, up and down on
the screen.
NOTES:
• The AVC-A1XVA’s on screen display function is designed for use with high resolution monitors, so it may be difficult to read small
characters on TVs with small screens or low resolutions.
• The setup menu is not displayed when headphones are being used.
2 System setup items and default values (set upon shipment from the factory)
1. Auto Setup/Room EQ
Auto Setup / Room EQ
28
Default settings
Page
–
36 ~ 42
1
Auto Setup
This unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and measures
the acoustic characteristics of your room to permit an appropriate
automatic setting.
2
Room EQ
Setup
Set the Room EQ setting with All or Assign for each surround mode.
All, Room EQ = OFF
43, 44
3
Direct Mode
Setup
Set the ON/OFF setting of Room EQ, in the case of the surround
mode is in Direct or Pure Direct.
OFF
44
4
Mic Input
Select
Set this to switch the Mic Input jack for use for Mic or V.AUX Lchannel input jack.
Mic
45
2. Speaker Setup
Speaker Setup
1
2
3
Default settings
Speaker
Configuration
Input the combination of speakers in your system and their
corresponding sizes (SMALL for regular speakers, LARGE for fullsize, full-range) to automatically set the composition of the signals
output from the speakers and the frequency response.
Subwoofer
Setup
This selects the subwoofer for playing deep bass signals.
Delay Time
Page
Front Sp.
Center Sp.
Subwoofer
Surround Sp.
A/B
Surround Back
Sp.
Small
Small
Yes
Small
Small / 2spkrs
LFE —THX—
This parameter is for optimizing the timing with which the audio
signals are produced from the speakers and subwoofer according to
the listening position.
Front L & R
Center
50, 51
Surround
L & R (A)
Subwoofer
49, 50
Surround
L & R (B)
Surround
Back
51, 52
3.6 m (12 ft) 3.6 m (12 ft) 3.6 m (12 ft) 3.0 m (10 ft) 3.0 m (10 ft) 3.0 m (10 ft)
4
Channel Level
This adjusts the volume of the signals output from the speakers and Front L Front R Center Surround Surround Surround Surround Surround Surround Subwoofer
Back L
Back R
L (A)
L (B)
R (A)
R (B)
subwoofer for the different channels in order to obtain optimum
effects.
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
53, 54
5
Crossover
Frequency
Set the frequency (Hz) below which the bass sound of the various
speakers is to be output from the subwoofer.
55, 56
Surround
Speaker Setup
Use this function when using multiple surround speaker
combinations for more ideal surround sound. Once the
combinations of surround speakers to be used for the
different surround modes are preset, the surround
speakers are selected automatically according to the
surround mode.
6
7
THX Audio
Setup
FIXED —THX—
Surround
mode
THX/DOLBY/
DTS
CINEMA
THX/DOLBY/
DTS
MUSIC
THX/DOLBY
GAME
WIDE
SCREEN
9 CH
STEREO
DSP
SIMULATION
MULTI CH
MODE
Surround
speaker
A
A
A
A+B
A+B
A+B
A
57
Boundary Gain
Compensation
When using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer,
set the subwoofer’s frequency response.
THX Ultra2 Subwoofer = NO
58
Surround Back
Speaker Position
When using two surround back speakers, set
the distance of the two speakers.
The Distance Between SBL/SBR = 0 m to 0.3 m
59
3. Audio Input Setup
Audio Input Setup
1
2
Digital In
Assign
This assigns the digital input jacks for the different input
sources.
EXT.IN Setup
Set the EXT.IN terminal playback method.
Default settings
Page
Input
source
CD
DVD
VDP
TV
DBS
VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4
CDR/
TAPE
V.AUX TUNER
Digital
Inputs
COAX
1
COAX
2
COAX
3
COAX
4
COAX
5
OPT 1 OPT 2 OPT 3 OPT 4
OPT 5
OPT 6
EXT.IN-1
Setup
60, 61
OFF
Mode = DSP, Surr.B = NOT USED, S.Back = NOT USED,
SW Level = +15 dB, Input ATT. = OFF
EXT.IN-2
Setup
62, 63
Mode = DSP, SW Level = +15 dB, Input ATT. = OFF
3
Input Function
Lev.
CDR/
The playback level is corrected individually for the different input TUNER PHONO CD TAPE DVD VDP TV DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.AUX Aux
sources.
0 dB
0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
4
Function
Rename
The names of the different input source can be changed as desired
TUNER PHONO
and displayed on the display.
5
IEEE1394
Assign
The connected IEEE1394 device can be automatically identified to
assign the input source.
–
67
6
IEEE1394
Auto Func.
Set the function for associating playback of the connected IEEE1394
device on or off.
Auto Function = OFF
68
CD
CDR/
DVD
TAPE
VDP
DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.AUX
TV
Net
Audio
64
65, 66
4. Video Setup
Video Setup
Default settings
Page
HDMI/DVI In
Assign
The HDMI or DVI input terminals are assigned for the different input
sources.
Select HDMI or DVI for the monitor output terminal.
Select the HDMI audio signal playback method.
DVD
VDP
TV
DBS
VCR-1
VCR-2
VCR-3
VCR-4
V.AUX
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
2
Component In
Assign
This assigns the color difference (component) video input jacks for
the different input sources.
DVD
VDP
TV
DBS
VCR-1
VCR-2
VCR-3
VCR-4
V.AUX
1-RCA
2-RCA
3-RCA
4-RCA
5-RCA
6-BNC
NONE
NONE
NONE
3
Video Convert
Mode
This sets whether or not to use the video conversion function.
4
HDMI/
Component
Out
Set the format of the signal up-converted to the HDMI monitor
output or component output terminal.
5
Audio Delay
Set the audio delay timing to synchronize the sound and video.
6
On Screen
Display
This sets whether or not to display the on screen display that
appears on the monitor screen when the controls on the remote
control unit or main unit are operated.
1
69, 70
71
ON
72
Convert = ON, Scaler = HDMI, Aspect = Full, Resolution = 480p/576p
Color Space = Y Cb Cr, RGB Mode = Normal
73, 74
0 ms
75
Function/Mode = ON, Master Volume = ON, Mode = Mode 1
76
29
5. Advanced Playback
Default settings
Page
1
2ch
Direct/Stereo
The speaker settings can be changed specifically for playing in the 2channel direct or stereo mode.
Advanced Playback
Basic
78
2
Dolby Digital
Setup
Turn the audio compression on or off when down-mixing Dolby
Digital signals.
OFF
79
3
Auto Surround
Mode
Set the Auto surround mode function.
Auto Surround Mode = ON
80
4
Manual EQ
Setup
This parameter is for optimizing the Room EQ with which the audio
signals are produced from the speakers.
All Channels and Frequency=0dB
81 ~ 83
Default settings
Page
6. Zone Setup
Zone Setup
1
2
Subwoofer
Mode
This selects the subwoofer used in ZONE2 for playing the low base
sound.
3
Delay Time
This parameter is for optimizing the timing of the sound produced
from the various speakers and subwoofer according to the listening
position in ZONE2.
4
Channel Level
This adjusts the volume of the signal output from the various
speakers and subwoofer used in ZONE2.
5
Crossover
Frequency
Set the frequency (in Hz) below which deep bass appearing in the
main channels will be routed to the ZONE2 subwoofer.
Video Setup
Video
Convert
Mode
Audio Delay
6
7
30
Speaker
Configuration
The components of the signals output from the various speakers and
the frequency response can be set automatically inside the set by
inputting the existence/absence of combinations of speakers and
their size (corresponding to their low frequency playback capability)
for the speakers used in ZONE2 during surround playback in ZONE2.
Zone3/4
Tone/Ch.Lev.
Front Sp.
Center Sp.
Subwoofer
Surround Sp.
Small
Small
Yes
Small
85
LFE
86
Front L & R
Center
Subwoofer
Surround L & R
3.6 m (12 ft)
3.6 m (12 ft)
3.6 m (12 ft)
3.0 m (10 ft)
87, 88
Front L
Front R
Center
Surround L
Surround R
Subwoofer
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
89, 90
80 Hz
91
This sets whether or not to use the video conversion
function.
ON
92, 93
Set the delay time the sound is synchronized with the
picture which are outputted in ZONE2.
0 ms
93
Adjust the tone and channel level of the sound output
from ZONE3 and ZONE4.
Zone3
Bass = 0 dB, Treble = 0 dB, HPF = OFF, L/R = 0 dB
Zone4
Bass = 0 dB, Treble = 0 dB, HPF = OFF, L/R = 0 dB
94, 95
7. Option Setup
Option Setup
1
Channel Setup
Default settings
The number of channels that you wish to play back in each zone are
assigned to each zone accordingly.
Main Zone
Zone2
9.1 CH
5.1 CH
Page
Zone3
Zone4
Stereo
Stereo
96 ~ 99
Normal
2
3
Power Amp
Assign
Volume
Control
Power Amplifiers can be assigned to the various channels according
to your system’s requirements.
This sets the volume level of each zone output.
Volume Limit:
This sets the upper limit for the
master volume.
Power On Level: This sets the volume level upon
switching on the power of each
zone.
Mute Level:
This sets the amount of attenuation
of the audio output when each
zone is muted.
Volume Level:
This sets whether the output level
of ZONE2 to 4 is fixed or variable.
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
FL
C
SLA
SLB
SBL
FR
–
SRA
SRB
SBR
Main
Vol.Limit = OFF, P. On Lev. = LAST, Mute Lev. = FULL
Zone2
Vol.Lev. = VAR, Vol.Limit = OFF, P. On Lev. = LAST, Mute Lev. = FULL
Zone3
Vol.Lev. = VAR, Vol.Limit = OFF, P. On Lev. = LAST, Mute Lev. = FULL
Zone4
Vol.Lev. = VAR, Vol.Limit = OFF, P. On Lev. = LAST, Mute Lev. = FULL
100 ~ 104
105
ZONE = MAIN, All Surround Modes = ON
Trigger
Out 1
TUNER PHONO
OFF
OFF
CDR/
DVD
TAPE
VDP
TV
DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.AUX Aux
OFF OFF ON
ON
ON
ON
CD
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ZONE = 2
4
Trigger Out
Setup
This sets the Trigger Out output for the different input
sources.
If “Zone=Main” is selected, settings can be made for
the individual surround modes.
Trigger
Out 2
TUNER PHONO
ON
ON
CD
CDR/
DVD
TAPE
VDP
ON
ON
ON
ON
TV
DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.AUX Aux
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ZONE = 3
Trigger
Out 3
TUNER PHONO
ON
ON
CD
CDR/
TAPE
DVD
VDP
TV
DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.AUX
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
106, 107
ON
ZONE = 4
Trigger
Out 4
TUNER PHONO
ON
ON
CD
CDR/
TAPE
DVD
VDP
TV
DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.AUX
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ZONE = MAIN
5
AC Outlet
Assign
This sets the AC outlet to on or off for the different input sources.
TUNER PHONO
ON
6
7
Setup
Memory/Lock
ON
CD
CDR/
DVD
TAPE
VDP
TV
DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.AUX Aux
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
108
ON
User Memory
This stores the current user settings in the
memory.
–
109, 110
Setup Lock
This sets whether or not to lock the system setup
settings so that thay cannot be changed.
Setup Lock = OFF
110, 111
IP Address
The IP address-related settings are made here.
ON
111, 112
Proxy
The proxy-related settings can be changed here.
OFF
113
Network
Setup
Network
Option
Power
saving
Set whether or not to accept control
from the network in the standby
mode.
ON
114
PC
Language
Select the language of the computer’s
OS.
eng
114
31
2 Speaker system layout
Basic system layout (For a THX Ultra2 system)
• The following is an example of the basic layout for a system consisting of eight speaker systems and a television monitor:
Subwoofer
Center speaker system
Surround back speaker systems
Front speaker systems
Set these at the sides of the TV or screen with
their front surfaces as flush with the front of the
screen as possible.
Surround speaker systems
Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema,THX Music mode and THX Games mode.
Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right speakers. It is also
recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers (front left (FL) and front right (FR),
surround left (SL) and surround right (SR), surround back left (SBL) and surround back right (SBR)) is less than 60 cm (2 ft).
With the AVC-A1XVA it is also possible to use the surround speaker selector function to choose the best layout for a variety of sources and
surround modes.
• Surround speaker selector function
This function makes it possible to achieve the optimum sound fields for different sources by switching between two systems of surround
speakers (A and B). The settings of the different speakers (A only, B only or A+B) are stored in the memory for the different surround
modes, so they are set automatically when the surround mode is selected.
A
B
A
SB
SB
B
Using A only
(Multi surround speaker system)
32
A
B
A
SB
SB
B
Using B only
(Single surround speaker system)
(SB: Surround Back Speakers)
Before setting up the system
1
Check that all the connections are correct, then turn on the main unit’s power.
Setup will not be possible when the unit is set to Pure Direct ON, the Video Off mode, or when the headphones are plugged in. Therefore,
please cancel the mode or reverse the condition.
2
Display the System Setup Menu.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*System Setup
Auto Set/RoomEQ
NOTES:
• The System Setup menu composition is of a layered design that includes the related items below the large table title as contained in the
tables of pages 28 ~ 31.
• Wherever your position in System Setup, one more press of the System Setup button permits a move to one level higher.
Auto Setup / Room EQ
The Auto Setup and Room EQ function of this unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and measures the acoustic characteristics of your
room to permit an appropriate automatic setting.
The AVC-A1XVA’s Audyssey MultEQ XT function has the feature that it provides the optimum listening environment at all listening positions in the
home theater, where there are often multiple listeners viewing programs together. To achieve this, it is first necessary to use a microphone to
measure test tones generated from the different speakers at the various listening positions. All this measured data is analyzed with a unique
method to comprehensively improve acoustic characteristics in the listening area. For optimum effectiveness, measurements should be
performed at six or more points. Move the microphone successively within the listening area surrounded by the speakers as shown on the
diagram below to measure the test tones. When listening to music or viewing movies with the whole family, move the microphone successively
to the different positions in which the members of the family sit (“ ” on the diagram indicates the points of installation) and measure repeatedly
(Example q). Even if the number of people using the home theater is small, taking multiple measurements at or near the listening positions makes
it possible to correct the sound more effectively (Example w).
The AVC-A1XVA’s Room EQ function offers three correction curves: “Audyssey”, “Front” and “Flat”. These can be selected after performing the
auto setup procedure. Details of the different correction curves are described below.
Audyssey : This adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics.
Front
: This adjusts the characteristics of each speaker to the characteristics of the front speakers.
Flat
: This the frequency response of all speakers flat.
This is suitable for multi-channel music reproduction, from discrete music sources such as Dolby Digital 5.1, DTS, DVD-Audio and
Super Audio CD.
About the main listening position (*M)
The main listening position is the point where a listener sits most often or the listening position when only one person is listening. Measurements
on the AVC-A1XVA start from this point. Correction for the speaker distance (“Delay Time”) is set based on this point.
Example w:
Example q:
*M
*M
33
2 Measurement flow
I. Connect the microphone to be used for the auto setup procedure.
Please place the measuring microphone at ear height at the main listening
position.
By default, the speaker system
setting is set to 9.1 channels.
Please set under “Extra Setup”,
only when you want to change
this arrangement.
II. Extra Setup
q Channel Setup
w Power Amp Assign
III. Preliminary measurement items
q Measuring the background noise (noise in the room)
w Determining whether or not speakers are connected (speaker detection)
e Checking the polarities of the speakers
NOTE:
• A moderately loud test tone is output during
the measurement. Please consider this should
you be planning night time measurements, and
consider not allowing small children into the
listening time.
III. Check the results of the speaker detection.
(Main (1st) listening position)
IV.Speaker system measurement items
q
w
e
r
Speaker Configuration
Delay Time
Channel Level
Crossover Frequency


 t Room EQ
:
:
:
:
This sets the speaker bass reproduction ability.
This sets the optimum delay time from each speaker corresponding to the listening position.
This sets the volume that is output from each speaker.
This set the frequency (Hz) below which the bass sound of the various speakers is to be output from
the subwoofer.
: This sets the frequency response of each speaker.
Continue measuring ?
Select “OK Next” and put the
microphone at next point.
Quit measuring ?
Select “Calculate”.
V. Check the results of the speaker system measurements.
V. Store the measurement results in the memory.
Move the microphone to the 2nd
to 8th listening positions and
repeat the measurement.
34
Before performing the Auto Setup procedure
1
2
Check again that the speakers are securely connected to the AVC-A1XVA.
3
The auto setup procedure uses the OSD (on screen display) function, so connect the AVC-A1XVA to a TV, projector, or other monitor.
Set the volume to halfway and set the crossover frequency to the maximum or Low pass filter off if your subwoofer can adjust the output
volume and the crossover frequency. Some subwoofers have a standby mode. Be sure to turn this function off before performing the
Auto Setup procedure.
I. Connecting the microphone for Auto Setup
1
Connect the microphone for Auto Setup to the Setup Mic jack on the front panel of the unit.
2
Mount the auto setup microphone onto a camera tripod, etc.,
and place it at ear height at the main listening position (*) in
the listening room with the sound receptor facing the ceiling.
When placing the microphone, adjust the height so that the
microphone’s sound receptor is at the height of the ears of
the listener.
Be sure that at the beginning, the measurement is started
with the microphone set up at the main listening position.
Microphone
NOTE:
• Do not disconnect the microphone until the settings are
completed.
35
1
Setting the Auto Setup / Room EQ
1
Select “Auto Setup / Room EQ” at the System Setup
Menu.
*System Setup
Auto Set/RoomEQ
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Auto Setup / Room EQ menu screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*AutoSet/RoomEQ
Auto Setup
1-1. Setting the Auto Setup
1
Select “Auto Setup” at the Auto Setup / Room EQ
menu.
*AutoSet/RoomEQ
Auto Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Auto Setup screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Auto Setup
Start
The message “Connect Microphone” is displayed
if no microphone is connected. If so, connect the
auto setup microphone.
36
II. Extra Setup
• By default, the speaker system setting is set to 9.1 channels.
Perform this setting if you want to change the channel setup to match the speaker system you are using or to conduct the power amplifier
assignment procedure. If you do not want to perform this “Extra Setup” procedure, proceed to the “Preliminary measurements” on page 38.
1
Select “Extra Setup”.
*Auto Setup
Extra Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Press the cursor left button.
Switch to the Extra Setup screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Choose the setting you want to change then press the ENTER button to switch to the setting
screen.
• For instructions on making the “Channel Setup” settings, see pages 96 ~ 99.
• For instructions on making the “Power Amp Assign” settings, see pages 100 ~ 104.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
The speakers measured with this Auto Setup procedure are based on the setting of these
“Channel Setup” and “Power Amp Assign” functions.
(Remote control unit)
4
Once the settings are completed, press the ENTER button at the each setting screen.
The Extra Setup menu re-appears.
(Main unit)
5
*Extra Setup
Channel Setup
(Remote control unit)
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button to return to the Auto Setup screen.
37
III. Preliminary measurements
• This procedure is used to automatically determine the background noise, whether or not speakers are connected, and the polarities of the
connected speakers.
1
Select the “Start” and press the cursor left button.
Start the preliminary measurements.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
*Auto Setup
Start
(Remote control unit)
Cautions when making the measurements:
• It is not possible to measure properly if there are any obstacles between the speakers
and microphone. Check that there are no obstacles.
• Please do not stand between or near the speakers and the microphone during the
measurements.
• To avoid affecting the measurements, turn off the air-conditioner or any other device that
makes noise and take the measurements with the room as quiet as possible.
• Measurement is canceled when MASTER VOLUME is operated while the Auto Setup is
performed.
2
The screen shown at the right appears once the
preliminary measurements are completed.
Press the ENTER button to switch the Speaker
Detect Check screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Sp Detect Check
Check the results of the speaker detection.
Press the ENTER button to switch to the second screen.
If the check ends, press the ENTER button again.
3
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
[First screen]
[Second screen]
NOTE:
• Subsequent measurements will be made based on this data, so be sure to check the results of these measurements.
If the results are not as expected or if an error message is displayed, select “Retry” and perform the measurements again. (For
details on the error messages, see page 42.)
If the results of remeasurement are still not as expected or if an error message is displayed, turn off the power switch and check
the speaker connections. Then start the measurements again from the beginning.
38
IV. Speaker system measurement
• With these measurements, the “Speaker Configuration”, “Delay Time”, “Channel Level”, “Crossover Frequency” and “Room EQ” are analyzed
automatically. The main listening position is measured first, so leave the microphone where it is.
1
Select the “OK Start” and press the cursor left
button.
Measurements for the first point start.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
Main Position
OK Start
(Remote control unit)
NOTE:
• With these measurements, test tones are not output from channels to which speakers
have been judged not to be connected in the preliminary measurements. Do not change
the connection of speakers or the subwoofer’s volume after performing the preparation
measurements and before performing these measurements.
2
q The screen shown at the right appears once the measurements for the main listening
position are completed.
Next the measurements for the second point will be taken. Place the microphone at the
second listening position. For instructions on the position in which the microphone should
be placed, see page 36. (When making the measurements, be sure to position the
microphone at the approximate ear height of the seated listener(s).)
w Select the “OK Next” and press the cursor left
button.
Measurements for the second point start.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
(Main unit)
2nd Position
OK Next
(Remote control unit)
Perform step 2 repeatedly.
The more measurement points, the better the resulting room correction effect. We recommend a minimum of 6 measurement points –
8 measurement points provides the best room correction effect.
39
After measuring at the number of points according
to your listening environment, select “Calculate”
and press the cursor left button.
The speaker system is analyzed.
4
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
7th Position
Calculate
(Remote control unit)
5
40
(Remote control unit)
The amount of time required for the analysis
depends on the number of speakers and the
number of measuring points. The greater the
number of speakers and measuring points, the
longer the time required. For example, for 9.1channel systems and 6 measuring points, the
calculations require approximately 5 minutes.
Measurements can be ended when there are 5
or more measurement locations; however, to
obtain better results, measurements at 6 or
more locations is recommended.
Once the calculations are completed, a screen for confirming the results of the measurements appears.
V. Check of the measurement result
• The results of the measured items can be checked.
For instructions on checking the equalizer parameters, see pages 46 ~ 48.
1
Select the items.
The measurement results of each item can be
checked here.
(Main unit)
*Auto Setup
Sp Config.Check
(Remote control unit)
2
Press the ENTER button and display the verification screen.
Press the ENTER button to switch to the second screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
[Speaker Config. Check]
3
NOTE:
• When measurements have been made using the measurement microphone, speakers
with a built-in filter such as subwoofers might be set with a value that differs from the
physical distance because of the internal electrical delay.
[Delay Time Check]
[Channel Level Check]
[Crossover Freq. Check]
If the check ends, press the ENTER button again.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Select whether or not to save the data you have
checked.
Select the following items based on the
measurement results.
Store : Set with the checked measurement value.
Cancel : If you do not want to set the contents
you have checked, cancel the auto setup
settings.
*Auto Setup
Store
41
When “Store” is selected, all parameters are stored
up.
After the data is stored, the “Auto Setup / Room EQ”
menu screen appears automatically.
5
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTE:
• Do not turn off the power while the data is
being stored. If the power is turned off while
the data is being stored, the Room EQ
parameters stored in the memory will be
cleared, and it will not be possible to select the
“Audyssey”, “Front” or “Flat” equalizer
settings.
Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the interaction with the room, you may notice different results from physical
measurement. If this happens, THX recommends setting the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually.
Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice irregular results when setting the level and/or distance of the main speakers. If
this happens, THX recommends setting them manually.
Please note that any THX main speakers should be set to Small (80 Hz). If you set up your speakers using Auto Setup, please make sure
manually that any THX speakers are set to Small with 80 Hz crossover.
About the error message
• These error messages will be displayed when performing the measurements of Auto Setup and the automatic measurements can not be
completed because of the speaker arrangement, measurement environment, or other factors. Please check the following matters, reset the
pertinent items, and measure again. Be sure to turn off the AVC-A1XVA’s power before checking the speaker connections.
Screen example
Cause
Measures
• The speakers required for producing suitable
reproduction have not been detected.
q The front L and front R speakers were not properly
detected.
w Only one channel of the surround (A) and surround
(B) speakers was detected.
e Sound was output from the R channel when only
one surround back speaker was connected.
r The surround back or the surround (B) speaker
was detected, but the surround (A) speaker was
not detected.
If multiple errors occur, use the cursor left and right
buttons to check the contents.
• Check that the pertinent speakers are
properly connected.
• The speaker polarity is connected in reverse.
• Check the polarity of the pertinent
speakers.
• For some speakers, the screen below
may be displayed even though the
speakers are properly connected.
If so, select “Skip0”.
If multiple errors occur, use the cursor left and right
buttons to check the contents.
42
• There is too much ambient noise in the room and the
measurements cannot be made accurately.
• Either turn off the power of the
device that generated the noise
during the measurements or move
the device away.
• Try again at a time when it is quieter.
• The measurement microphone is not connected, or
all of speakers have not been detected.
• Connect the measurement microphone
to the microphone connector.
• Check the speaker connection.
1-2. Setting the Room EQ Setup
• Select the setting of an Equalizer that has been set with Auto Setup or Manual EQ.
1
Select “Room EQ Setup” at the Auto Setup / Room
EQ menu.
*AutoSet/RoomEQ
Room EQ Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Room EQ Setup screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Room EQ Setup
SurMode: ALL
Select ALL or Assign.
ALL
: Sets the Equalizer for all surround modes.
Assign : Sets the Equalizer individually for each surround mode.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
q When the “ALL” is selected and press the ENTER
button, display the Select the EQ Curve screen.
Select the Equalizer setting.
OFF
: The Equalizer is not used.
Audyssey : Adjusts the frequency response of
all speakers to correct the effects of
room acoustics.
Front
: Adjusts the frequency response of
the surround speakers to match the
characteristics of the front channel
speakers.
Flat
: Adjusts the frequency response of
*Room EQ Setup
all speakers to the flattest response.
EQ
: Audyssey
This mode is suitable for multi-channel
music surround sound sources.
Manual : Selects the setting value that was set in the Manual EQ setup.
For details of the “5-4. Manual EQ Setup”, see pages 81 ~ 83.
w If “Assign” is selected, select the desired equalizer setting using the ROOM EQ buttons on
the Main unit or Remote control unit. Equalizer settings for the individual surround modes can
be stored in the memory.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Whenever the ROOM EQ button on Main unit or
Remote control unit is pressed, the display
switches as shown below.
OFF
Audyssey
Manual
Front
Flat
NOTES:
• The Equalizer setting of “Audyssey”, “Flat” and “Front” can be selected after performing the Auto Setup.
• When the speaker set as “None” with the Auto Setup is changed to on manually, the equalizer of “Audyssey”, “Front” and “Flat”
cannot be used.
• The Equalizer setting can be selected directly by ROOM EQ button on the Main unit or Remote control unit.
• When headphones are connected, the Room EQ cannot be used.
43
Enter the setting.
The Auto Setup / Room EQ menu reappears.
5
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
1-3. Setting the Direct Mode
• Perform the ON/OFF setting of Room EQ when the surround mode is Direct or Pure Direct.
1
Select “Direct Mode Setup” at the Auto Setup /
Room EQ menu.
*AutoSet/RoomEQ
Direct Mode
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Direct Mode Setup screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Select ON or OFF.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Enter the setting .
The Auto Setup / Room EQ menu reappears.
(Main unit)
44
*Direct Mode
Room EQ:
OFF
(Remote control unit)
1-4. Setting the MIC Input Select
• Sets whether the setup microphone is connected to the PIN JACK (V.AUX L channel) connector or the MINI JACK (SETUP MIC) connector.
• Use this setting when using a microphone other than the included one for measurements when performing the auto setup procedure.
• The microphone included with the AVC-A1XVA is a measurement microphone designed specifically for use during the auto setup procedure.
Select “Mic” and connect the included microphone to the “SETUP MIC” mini-jack. When conducting the auto setup procedure using a separate
high performance condenser microphone for measurements, select “V.AUX L” and connect the microphone to the “V.AUX Lch” pin jack.
Please ask the DENON Authorized Service Center about the usable microphone other than the included one.
Select “Mic Input Select” at the Auto Setup / Room
EQ menu.
1
*AutoSet/RoomEQ
Mic In Select
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Mic Input Select screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Mic In Select
Mic
Select the “Mic” or “V.Aux L”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Enter the setting.
The Auto Setup / Room EQ menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
45
1-5. Check the Parameter
• The results of the measured items can be checked.
• The EQ parameters that were set in Auto Setup can be checked.
• This item is automatically displayed, after the measurement result of the “Auto Setup / Room EQ” is decided.
1
Select “Parameter Check” at the Auto Setup / Room
EQ menu.
*AutoSet/RoomEQ
Parameter Check
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Parameter Check screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Select the items.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Press the ENTER button and display the verification screen.
For instructions on checking the results of each item, see pages 41, 42.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
EQ parameters can be checked here.
Select “EQ Parameter Check” at the Parameter
Check screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
6
*ParameterCheck
EQ Check
Display the EQ Parameter Check screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
7
*EQ Check
Audyssey
Select the Equalizer curve.
(Main unit)
46
*ParameterCheck
Sp Config.Check
(Remote control unit)
Display the parameter screen.
The display is only an approximate picture of the
response and that correction is happening at all
frequencies.
8
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
EQ Chk Audyssey
FL/FR
:Next
9
Select the speaker channel.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
10
If the check ends, select “Exit” and press the ENTER
button.
The EQ Parameter Check screen reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
EQ Chk Audyssey
Exit
(Remote control unit)
11
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the EQ
Parameter Check screen.
The Parameter Check screen reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
*EQ Check
Exit
(Remote control unit)
12
The results of the “Auto Setup” procedure can be
reset even if the settings have been changed after
performing the “Auto Setup” procedure.
Select “Restore Yes 0” then press the cursor left
button.
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
*ParameterCheck
Restore
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
47
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the
Parameter Check screen.
The Auto Setup / Room EQ menu reappears.
13
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
14
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the
Auto Setup / Room EQ menu screen.
The System Setup Menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
*ParameterCheck
Exit
(Main unit)
*AutoSet/RoomEQ
Exit
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Setting the Speaker Setup
• If the “Auto Setup” procedure has already been performed, there is no need to make this setting.
• Perform this setting if you wish to make the settings for your speaker systems manually.
1
Select “Speaker Setup” at the System Setup Menu.
*System Setup
Speaker Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Speaker Setup menu screen.
(Main unit)
48
(Remote control unit)
*Speaker Setup
Speaker Config.
2-1. Setting the type of speakers
• The composition of the signals output to each channels and the frequency response are adjusted automatically according to the combination of
speakers actually being used.
1
Select “Speaker Config.” at the Speaker Setup
menu.
*Speaker Setup
Speaker Config.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Speaker Config. screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Set whether speakers are connected or not and, if so, their size parameters.
q Select the speaker.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Speaker Config
Front
: Small
w Select the parameter.
Center Sp.
Front Sp.
Subwoofer
Surround Sp. A
Surround back Sp.
Surround Sp. B
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Enter the setting.
The Speaker Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTE:
• Select “Large” or “Small” not according to the actual size of the speaker but according to the speaker’s capacity for playing low frequency
(bass sound below the frequency set for the Crossover Frequency) signals. If you do not know, try comparing the sound at both settings
(setting the volume to a level low enough so as not to damage the speakers) to determine the proper setting.
49
• Parameters
Large.....................Select this when using speakers that can fully reproduce deep bass well below 80 Hz.
Small ....................Select this when using speakers that are not capable of handling deep bass well below 80 Hz. Most home theater main and
surround speakers perform best when configured as SMALL. Deep bass content in any channel with a SMALL speaker is
routed to the subwoofer(s).
None .....................Select this when no speakers are installed.
Yes/No..................Select “Yes” when a subwoofer is installed, “No” when a subwoofer is not installed.
2 spkrs/1 spkr......Select the number of speakers to be used for the surround back channel.
A subwoofer with sufficient low frequency playback capability can better handle deep bass than most main and surround speakers, and the
system’s overall performance will be greatly enhanced when SMALL is set for the main (front) and surround speakers.
To take full advantage of the performance of the Home THX certified speaker systems, set the front, center and surround speaker size
parameters to “Small” and the subwoofer to “Yes”.
For the majority of speaker system configurations, using the SMALL setting for all main and surround speakers and connected subwoofer(s)
set to ON will yield the best results.
When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to “Yes”, and when “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically
set to “Large”.
2-2. Setting the low frequency distribution
• Set the subwoofer mode according to the speaker system being used.
• Select the play mode that provides bass reproduction with body.
1
Select “Subwoofer Setup” at the Speaker Setup
menu.
*Speaker Setup
Subwoofer Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Subwoofer Setup screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Select the setting.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
LFE–THX– : For any channel(s) that are set to LARGE, low frequencies in that channel’s
corresponding source are directed to that loudspeaker only. Low frequencies
that are directed to the subwoofer(s) are from the program source LFE channel,
and from other channels where the speakers are set to SMALL. THX
recommends this mode so that bass interference is less likely to occur in the
room.
LFE+Main : Low frequencies from speaker channels that have been set to LARGE are
reproduced from those speakers as well as from the subwoofer(s). Depending
upon the characteristics of the LARGE main speakers, this mode may provide a
more even low frequency response throughout the listening room.
Enter the setting.
The Speaker Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
50
*SubwooferSetup
Mode: LFE-THX-
(Remote control unit)
NOTES:
— Assignment of low frequency signal range (2-1) —
• The only signals produced from the subwoofer channel are LFE signals (during playback of Dolby Digital or DTS signals) and the low
frequency signal range of channels set to “Small” in the setup menu. The low frequency signal range of channels set to “Large” are
produced from those channels.
— Subwoofer Setup (2-2) —
• The subwoofer mode setting is only valid when and “Yes” is set for the subwoofer in the “2-1. Speaker Configuration” settings (see
pages 49, 50).
• When the input signal is analog or a PCM signal not including LFE signals, if “LFE-THX-” is selected, the low frequency component is not
output from the subwoofer. To output the subwoofer channel, select “LFE+Main”.
2-3. Setting the Delay Time
• Input the distance between the listening position and the different speakers to set the delay time for the surround mode.
• Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Music modes and THX Games mode.
Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right speakers.
It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers (front left (FL) and front right
(FR), surround left (SL) and surround right (SR), surround back left (SBL) and surround back right (SBR)) is less than 60 cm (2 ft).
Preparations:
Measure the distances between the listening position and the speakers (L1 to L6 on the diagram at
the right).
L1: Distance between center speaker and listening position
L2: Distance between front speakers and listening position
L3: Distance between surround speakers and listening position
L4: Distance between surround back speakers and listening position
L5: Distance between subwoofer and listening position
L6: Distance between surround back L and surround back R
1
FL
Center
Subwoofer
L1
FR
L2
Listening position
L5
L4
L3
SL
SBL
L6
SR
SBR
Select “Delay Time” at the Speaker Setup menu.
*Speaker Setup
Delay Time
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Delay Time screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Delay Time
Meters
:
Feet
Select the desired unit, “Meters” or “Feet”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Example: When “Meters” is selected
51
4
Once “Meters” or “Feet” is selected in step 3, the
Delay Time screen appears automatically.
*Delay Time
FL
:
3.60m
5
Select the speaker to be set.
The picture of the speaker selected blinks.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
6
Set the distance between the center speaker and listening position.
The distance changes in units of 0.1 meters (1 foot) or 0.01 meters (0.1 foot) each time the
button is pressed. Select the value closest to the measured distance.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Example: When the distance is set to 3.0 m
for the center speaker
When “Step” is selected, you can select the unit of “0.1 m (1 ft)” or “0.01 m (0.1 ft)”.
When “Yes” is selected for “Default”, then press the cursor left button to reset to the
default values.
Please note that the difference of distance for every speaker should be 6.0 m (20 ft) or less. If
you set an invalid distance, a CAUTION notice, such as screen right will appear. In this case,
please relocate the blinking speaker(s) so that its distance is no larger than the value shown in
highlighted line.
7
Enter the setting.
The Speaker Setup menu reappears.
The AVC-A1XVA automatically sets the optimum
surround delay time for the listening room.
(Main unit)
52
(Remote control unit)
2-4. Setting the Channel Level
•
•
•
•
Use this setting to adjust so that the playback level between the different channels is equal.
From the listening position, listen to the test tones produced from the speakers to adjust the level.
The level can also be adjusted directly from the Remote control unit. (For details, see pages 137, 138.)
The level of each channel should be adjusted to 75 dB (C-weighted, slow meter mode) on a sound level meter at the listening position.
If a sound level meter is not available adjust the channels by ear so the sound levels are the same. Because adjusting the subwoofer level test
tone by ear is difficult, use a well known music selection and adjust for natural balance.
1
Select “Channel Level” at the Speaker Setup menu.
*Speaker Setup
Channel Level
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Channel Level screen.
(Main unit)
*Channel Level
T.Tone: Auto
(Remote control unit)
3
Select the mode.
Select “Auto” or “Manual”.
(Main unit)
*Channel Level
T.Tone: Auto
(Remote control unit)
Auto :
Adjust the level while listening to the test tones
produced automatically from each speaker.
Manual :
Select the speaker from which you want to produce
the test tone to adjust the level.
4
Example: When the “Auto” mode is selected
Select “Test Tone Start”.
*Channel Level
Tone Start:Yes
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
Select “Yes”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
53
6
a. When “Auto” mode is selected:
Test tones are automatically emitted from each speaker.
The test tones are emitted from each speaker in the following order,
at 4-second intervals the first time and second time around, 2second intervals the third time around and on:
(Main unit)
FL
C
FR
SRA
SW
SLA
SLB
SBL
SRB
Flashing
2spkrs
SBR
SB
1spkr
When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” for “2-1.
Speaker Configuration”, this is set to “SB”.
(Remote control unit)
Example: When the volume is set to –11.5 dB
while the test tone is being
produced from the Front Lch
speaker
Use the cursor left and right buttons to adjust all the speakers to the
same volume.
The volume can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in units of 0.5
dB.
TestTone Auto
FL
:
-11.5dB
b. When “Manual” mode is selected:
q Select the speaker.
w Adjust all the speakers to the same
volume.
Flashing
Example: “Manual” mode is selected.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
7
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
TestTone Manual
FL
:
-11.5dB
Enter the setting.
The Channel Level screen reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
To cancel the settings, press the cursor left button to select “Level Clear” and “Yes” on the Channel
Level screen, then make the settings again.
NOTES:
• When adjusting the level of an active subwoofer system, you may also need to adjust the subwoofer’s own volume control.
• When you adjust the channel levels while in the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL mode, the channel level adjustments made will affect
all surround modes. Consider this mode a Master Channel Level adjustment mode.
• After you have completed the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL adjustments, you can then activate the individual surround modes and
adjust channel levels that will be remembered for each of those modes. Then, whenever you activate a particular surround sound mode,
your preferred channel level adjustments for just that mode will be recalled. Check the instructions for adjusting channel levels within
each surround mode. (See pages 137, 138)
• You can adjust the channel levels for each of the following surround modes: PURE DIRECT/DIRECT, STEREO, DOLBY/DTS SURROUND,
HOME THX CINEMA, 9CH STEREO, WIDE SCREEN, SUPER STADIUM, ROCK ARENA, JAZZ CLUB, CLASSIC CONCERT, MONO
MOVIE, VIDEO GAME and MATRIX.
• When using either surround speakers A or B, or when using surround speakers A and B at the same time, be sure to adjust the balance
of playback levels between each channel for the various selections of “A or B” and “A and B”.
54
2-5. Setting the Crossover Frequency
• Set the crossover frequency according to the low frequency response characteristics of the various (front, center, surround and surround back)
speaker systems.
• If a connected main or surround loudspeaker has a specified –3 dB low frequency response rolloff, adjust the crossover frequency for that
speaker to match the specified low frequency response limit – e.g. 80 Hz.
• When a speaker is set to SMALL, low frequencies in that channel that are below the crossover frequency are directed to the system’s
subwoofer(s), or to speakers that are set to LARGE, for systems with no connected subwoofer(s).
1
Select the “Crossover Frequency” at the Speaker
Setup menu.
*Speaker Setup
Crossover Freq.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Crossover Frequency screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Crossover Freq
Fixed -THX-
Select the frequency.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Fixed –THX– :
Set to the THX rated 80 Hz crossover frequency.
Variable 40, 60, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 150, 200, 250 Hz :
Set as desired according to your speakers’ bass playback ability.
Advanced :
The crossover frequency can be set individually for the different speakers. (See page 56)
Enter the setting.
The Speaker Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
If “LFE+Main” is set at “2-2. Subwoofer Setup”, “SW:LFE+Main” (see pages 50, 51) is displayed
at the top right of the screen.
NOTES:
• Please set all THX Certified speakers to small and the crossover to 80 Hz.
• We recommend using with the crossover frequency set to “Fixed –THX–”, but depending on the speaker, setting it to a different
frequency may improve frequency response near the crossover frequency.
• The crossover frequency mode is valid only when subwoofer is set to ON, and when one or more speakers are set to SMALL, as
described in section “2-1. Speaker Configuration” settings.
55
2 Setting the crossover frequency individually for the different channels
1
Select “Advanced” at the Crossover Frequency
screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
*Crossover Freq
Advanced
Select the speaker to be set.
*Crossover Freq
Front
:
80Hz
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Select the frequency.
*Crossover Freq
Front
: 100Hz
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTES:
• If “LFE–THX–” is selected at “2-2. Subwoofer Setup”, the frequencies can only be selected
for speakers set to “Small” at “2-1. Speaker Configuration”.
• If “LFE+Main” is set at “2-2. Subwoofer Setup”, the frequencies can be selected regardless of the speaker size setting.
56
2-6. Selecting the Surround Speakers for the different surround modes
• This menu is displayed when both surround speakers A and B are used.
• At this screen preset the surround speakers to be used in each surround modes.
1
Select “Surround Sp Setup” at the Speaker Setup
menu.
*Speaker Setup
Surr Sp Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Surround Sp Setup screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Surr Sp Setup
CINEMA
:
A
q To select the surround mode
3
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
w To select the surround speaker
A
: When surround speakers A is used.
B
: When surround speakers B is used.
A+B : When both surround speakers A and B are used.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Enter the setting.
The Speaker Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
For the “WIDE SCREEN” and “9CH STEREO” DSP simulation modes, the surround speakers can be set separately.
See pages 62, 63 for setting the surround speaker when the “Analog” mode is selected at “3-2. EXT.IN Setup”.
57
2-7. Setting the THX Audio Setup
[1] Settings for using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer
• Make these settings when “Yes” is selected for the subwoofer in the “2-1. Speaker Configuration” settings.
This option is not available when “No” is selected. (See pages 49, 50)
Select “THX Audio Setup” at the Speaker Setup
menu.
1
*Speaker Setup
THX Audio Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the THX Audio Setup screen.
(Main unit)
*THX AudioSetup
Boundary Gain
(Remote control unit)
3
Select “Boundary Gain Compensation”, then press the
ENTER button.
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
4
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
When using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer or
subwoofer that frequency response extends to 20
Hz, select “Yes”. Otherwise select “No”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Boundary Gain
THX U2 SW:
No
• When “Yes” is selected
“Boundary Gain Compensation” can be selected
and the compensation set to “OFF”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
Boundary Gain
THX U2 SW: Yes
Press the ENTER button to return to the THX Audio Setup screen.
(Main unit)
58
• If the bass sound seems too strong
Set “Boundary Gain Compensation” to “ON”. This
activates a filter that gently reduces very deep
bass below 55 Hz to provide the flattest overall
deep bass response. Select ON or OFF according
to how strong you prefer the deep bass response
to be.
(Remote control unit)
[2] Surround Back Speaker Position Settings
• When two surround back speakers have been set in “2-1. Speaker Configuration” (See pages 49, 50), set the distance of the speakers.
This option is not available when “1spkr” selected.
• This setting is necessary to achieve the optimum effect in the THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Music modes and THX Games
mode. It is recommended that SBL/SBR speakers are placed together as close as possible.
1
Select “Surround Back Speaker Position” at the THX
Audio Setup screen and press the ENTER button.
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
*THX AudioSetup
SB Sp Position
Select the settings according to the distances of the
two surround back speakers. (See page 51)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
SB Sp Position
0m to 0.3m
Press the ENTER button to return to the THX Audio Setup screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button to return
to the Speaker Setup menu screen.
*THX AudioSetup
Exit
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the
Speaker Setup menu screen.
The System Setup Menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
*Speaker Setup
Exit
(Remote control unit)
59
3
Setting the Audio Input Setup
• Make the audio-related settings.
1
Select “Audio Input Setup” at the System Setup
Menu.
*System Setup
Audio In Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Audio Input Setup menu screen.
(Main unit)
*Audio In Setup
Digital In
(Remote control unit)
3-1. Setting the Digital In Assignment
• This setting assigns the digital input jacks of the AVC-A1XVA for the different input sources.
1
Select “Digital In Assign” at the Audio Input Setup
menu.
*Audio In Setup
Digital In
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Digital In Assign screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Select the digital input jack to be assigned to the input source.
3
q Select the input source.
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
60
*Digital In
CD
: COAX1
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
w Select the digital input jack.
Select from among COAX 1 to 6, OPT 1 to 6.
Select “OFF” for input sources for which no digital input jacks are used.
It is not possible to select the same digital input jack for different input sources.
If the same digital input jack is selected, the setting for the input source that was previously
assigned switches to “OFF”.
The HDMI input terminal is displayed when it is assigned to the input source at “4-1.
HDMI/DVI In Assignment”. (See pages 69, 70)
When “Yes” is selected for “Default”,then press the cursor left button to reset to the
default values.
Enter the setting.
The Audio Input Setup menu reappears.
4
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTES:
• The OPTICAL 3, 4 and 5 jacks on the AVC-A1XVA’s rear panel are equipped with an optical digital output jack for recording digital audio
signals to a CD recorder, MD recorder, or other digital audio recording deck. Use this for digital recording between a digital audio source
(stereo - 2 channel) and a digital audio recorder.
• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 3 OUT jack on the AVC-A1XVA’s rear panel to any jack other than
the OPTICAL 3 IN jack.
• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 4 OUT jack on the AVC-A1XVA’s rear panel to any jack other than
the OPTICAL 4 IN jack.
• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 5 OUT jack on the AVC-A1XVA’s rear panel to any jack other than
the OPTICAL 5 IN jack.
• “PHONO” cannot be selected on the Digital In Assignment screen.
Refer to “DENON LINK connections”. (See page 20)
61
3-2. Setting the EXT. IN Setup
• Set the method of playback of the analog input signal connected to the EXT.IN-1 (10 CH) and EXT.IN-2 (6 CH) terminal.
1
Select “EXT.IN Setup” at the Audio Input Setup
menu.
*Audio In Setup
EXT.IN Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the EXT.IN Setup screen.
(Main unit)
3
q Select the input terminal.
(Main unit)
w Switch to the setting screen.
(Remote control unit)
4
(Main unit)
Select the item to be set (use the cursor button to
the up and down) then select the parameter (use
the cursor left and right buttons).
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
62
*EXT.IN Setup
EXT.IN-1
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*EXT.IN-1 Setup
Mode
:
DSP
(Remote control unit)
• The items to be set differ as described below according to the selected input jack and the “Mode” selection.
EXT. IN-1 (10 CH)
EXT. IN-2 (6 CH)
Mode
DSP
ANALOG
DSP
ANALOG
Surr. B
NOT USED / USED
NOT USED / USED
–
–
S. Back
NOT USED, SBL/SBR, SB (SBL)
–
–
–
Surr. Sp
–
Surr.A / Surr.B / Surr.A+B
–
Surr. A / Surr. B / Surr. A+B
SW Level
0, +5, +10, +15 dB
0, +5, +10, +15 dB
0, +5, +10, +15 dB
0, +5, +10, +15 dB
Input ATT.
OFF, –6 dB
–
OFF, –6 dB
–
MODE :
DSP
ANALOG
: The analog input signal is converted into a digital signal and undergoes DSP processing.
System Setup settings (speaker configuration, channel delay, etc.) are reflected in the same way as for other input signals.
The surround playback mode button functions.
: The analog input signal is played without DSP processing.
SW and center channel: Down-mixing is conducted by the analog circuit. Surround and surround back channels: Not
output if “No” is selected at the speaker configuration. Channel delay: Not reflected.
S. Back :
Set when MODE is set to “DSP”. Select according to the specifications of the player being used. Also refer to the player’s operating
instructions.
NOT USED : Select when neither SBL or SBR is connected.
SB (SBL) : Select when only one surround back channel (SBL) is connected.
SBL/SBR : Select when two surround back channels (SBL and SBR) are connected.
Surr. B :
Select according to the specifications of the player being used. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.
NOT USED : Select when Surround B is not connected.
The Surround A input signal is output to the Surround B output connector.
USED
: Select when Surround B is connected. The playback in the MULTI CH DIRECT and MULTI CH IN is only possible when
MODE is set to “DSP”.
Surr. Sp :
Set when MODE is set to “ANALOG”. Select according to the specifications of the player being used. Also refer to the player’s operating
instructions.
Surr. A
: Select when using surround speakers A.
Surr. B
: Select when using surround speakers B.
Surr. A+B : Select when using both surround speakers A and B.
SW Level :
Select according to the specifications of the player being used. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.
Set the level of playback of the analog input signal connected to the Ext.In Subwoofer.
+15dB (default) recommended. (0, +5, +10 and +15 can be selected.)
INPUT ATT. :
Set when MODE is set to “DSP”.
If the OVER LOAD indicator is displayed on the fluorescent tube, select “–6 dB”.
5
Enter the setting.
The EXT.IN Setup screen reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
6
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button to return
to the Audio Input Setup menu screen.
*EXT.IN Setup
Exit
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
63
3-3. Setting the Input Function Level
• Correct the playback level of the different input sources.
• Adjust the playback levels of the devices connected to the different input sources to the same level to eliminate the need for adjusting the main
volume each time the input source is switched.
Select “Input Function Lev.” at the Audio Input
Setup menu.
1
*Audio In Setup
Input Func.Lev.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Input Function Lev. screen.
(Main unit)
3
*Input Func.Lev
TUNER :
0dB
(Remote control unit)
q Select the input source.
(Main unit)
w Adjust the level.
The level can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in units
of 1 dB.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
When “Yes” is selected for “Default”, then press the cursor
left button to reset to the default values.
4
Enter the setting.
The Audio Input Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
After completing this setting, check that the playback levels for the different sources are the same.
64
3-4. Setting the Function Rename
• The names of the input sources displayed on the front display and on the on screen display can be changed. The names or brands of the devices
connected to the input sources can be input.
1
Select “Function Rename” at the Audio Input Setup
menu.
*Audio In Setup
Function Rename
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Function Rename screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*FunctionRename
TUNER TUNER
Select the input source whose name you want to change.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Press the cursor left and right buttons.
The screen switches to the character input screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Rename TUNER
TUNER
Example: When “TUNER” is selected and
the cursor left and right buttons are
pressed
q Move the cursor to choose the position at which you want to input the character using the
cursor left and right buttons.
5
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
w Select the character to be input using the cursor up and down buttons.
Up to 8 characters can be input.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
! ” # % & ’ ( ) * + , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
65
6
Repeat step 5 to input the input source name.
To reset the input source name to the default value, press the cursor left or right button to
highlight the input source display, then press the cursor down button.
When “Yes” is selected for “Default”, then press the cursor left button to reset to the
default input source name.
Rename TUNER
Rename
Clear
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
Rename TUNER
Default : Yes
7
Once all the characters have been input, press the ENTER button.
The Function Rename screen reappears.
Use the same procedure to change other input source names as well.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
8
Enter the setting.
The Audio Input Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
When the input source is selected, the display is as shown below.
TU-1500
STEREO
Example: When the name has been changed to “TU-1500”
66
3-5. Setting the IEEE1394 Assignment
• Assign the device connected by IEEE1394 cable to an input source. The power of the device to be assigned must be turned on ahead of time.
1
Select “IEEE1394 Assign” at the Audio Input Setup
menu.
*Audio In Setup
IEEE1394 Assign
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the IEEE1394 Assign screen.
(Main unit)
3
*IEEE1394Assign
DVD-3910 ---
(Remote control unit)
q Select the device to be assigned to the
input source.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
w Select the input source.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*IEEE1394Assign
DVD-3910: DVD
4
Enter the setting.
The Audio Input Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
If you do not wish to assign the device connected by IEEE1394 cable to an input source, the IEEE1394 input can be selected by turning the
FUNCTION knob. In this case, the connection information is cleared when the power of the connected device or the AVC-A1XVA is turned off,
so the selection procedure must be performed again.
NOTES:
• By default, if no device has been connected using an IEEE1394 cable in the past, “No Connection” is displayed.
• “Connection Change” is displayed if there is a change in the IEEE1394 connection status while this screen is displayed.
• If the model name cannot be acquired from the connected IEEE1394 device, “UNKNOWN” is displayed.
• If an IEEE1394 device other than one for IEEE1394 audio playback is connected, “Not Play” is displayed and the input source cannot be
assigned.
67
3-6. Setting the IEEE1394 Auto Function
• Set whether or not to automatically play the IEEE1394 device when it is selected with the FUNCTION knob.
1
Select “IEEE1394 Auto Func.” at the Audio Input
Setup menu.
*Audio In Setup
IEEE1394 Auto
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the IEEE1394 Auto Function screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Select “ON” or “OFF”.
ON : Select this to automatically play the device.
OFF : Select this if you do not want to automatically play the device.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
NOTE:
• In some cases settings may be required on your player. Also refer to the player’s operating
instructions.
Enter the setting.
The Audio Input Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the
Audio Input Setup menu screen.
The System Setup Menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
68
*IEEE1394 Auto
Auto Func: OFF
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Audio In Setup
Exit
4
Setting the Video Setup
• Make the video-related settings.
1
Select “Video Setup” at the System Setup Menu.
*System Setup
Video Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Video Setup menu screen.
(Main unit)
*Video Setup
HDMI/DVI In
(Remote control unit)
4-1. Setting the HDMI / DVI In Assignment
• This setting assigns the HDMI input terminals and DVI-D input terminal for different input sources.
• Select which input signal, HDMI or DVI, is to be output from which monitor out jack, HDMI or DVI-D.
• Set the method for playing the audio signals included in the HDMI input signal.
1
Select “HDMI / DVI In Assign” at the Video Setup
menu.
*Video Setup
HDMI/DVI In
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the HDMI / DVI In Assign.
(Main unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
*HDMI/DVI In
DVD
: NONE
Select the HDMI input terminal or DVI-D input terminal to be assigned to the input source.
q Select the input source.
(Main unit)
w Select the input terminal.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Select from among HDMI1 to 5 and DVI-D.
If the same HDMI or DVI-D input terminal is selected, the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to “NONE”.
Select “NONE” for input sources for which both the HDMI and DVI-D input terminals are not used.
69
Select the “HDMI” or “DVI” monitor output
terminal to be used.
4
This setting can be switched directly using the
MONITOR SELECT button on the Main unit.
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
6
(Main unit)
*HDMI/DVI In
Monitor : HDMI
(Main unit)
Select the method for playing the audio signals
included in the HDMI input signal.
Select “TV” or “AMP”.
AMP : The audio signals are played according
to the AVC-A1XVA’s speaker systems.
TV
: The audio signals are played according
to the number of playable channels on
the monitor connected to the AVCA1XVA’s HDMI monitor output terminal.
NOTE:
• If a monitor is connected with an HDMI cable
but the monitor is not compatible with HDMI
audio signal playback, only the video signals
are output to the monitor from the AVCA1XVA (DVI mode).
Use the STATUS button to check which
mode is set for outputting HDMI signals from
the AVC-A1XVA (HDMI and DVI modes).
*HDMI/DVI In
Audio
:
AMP
Select the input for the playback of signals when
the audio signal of HDMI can not be reproduced.
When the audio signal of HDMI has become
unlocked, the unit automatically changes over to
the set connector (ANALOG or EXT. IN).
1~5 correspond to each HDMI 1~5 input terminal.
Select input signal (ANALOG or EXT. IN).
*HDMI/DVI In
1: EXT-1
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
7
Enter the setting.
The Video Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
70
(Remote control unit)
4-2. Setting the Component In Assignment
• This setting assigns the component video input terminal of the AVC-A1XVA for the different input sources.
1
Select “Component In Assign” at the Video Setup
menu.
*Video Setup
Component In
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Component In Assign screen.
(Main unit)
3
*Component In
DVD
: 1RCA
(Remote control unit)
Select the component (Y, PB/CB and PR/CR) video input terminal to be assigned to the input source.
q Select the input source.
(Main unit)
w Select the component video input terminal.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Select from among 1-RCA to 5-RCA and 6-BNC.
Select “NONE” for input sources for which the component (Y, PB/CB and PR/CR) video input is not to be used.
It is not possible to select the same component video input jack for different sources.
If the same component video input jack is selected, the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to “NONE”.
If “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the settings are reset to the default values.
4
Enter the setting.
The Video Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
71
4-3. Setting the Video Convert Mode
• Set whether or not to use the video conversion function.
1
Select “Video Convert Mode” at the Video Setup
menu.
*Video Setup
Video Convert
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Video Convert Mode screen.
(Main unit)
3
*Video Convert
DVD
: ON
(Remote control unit)
q Select the input source for which you want to set the Video
Convert Mode.
w Select the mode as below.
ON
OFF
The details in each mode are as follows.
(Main unit)
ON
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
: When there are multiple input signals, the input signals are detected and the input signal to be output from the video
monitor output terminal is selected automatically in the following order: component video, S-Video, composite video.
: The convert function does not operate.
The video signal input from the video input jack is only output to the video monitor out jack.
The S-Video signal input from the S-Video input jack is only output to the S-Video monitor out jack.
The component input signal input from the component input jacks is only output to the component monitor output
terminals.
OFF
NOTE:
• Down-converting from the component video signal to the S-Video and composite video signal is possible only when the resolution
of a component video signal is 480i / 576i.
4
Enter the setting.
The Video Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTES:
• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate.
If this happens, please set the conversion mode to OFF.
• When the video conversion function has been used, information such as that of text broadcasts which has been added to the video signal
might not be output. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to OFF.
72
4-4. Setting the HDMI/Component Out
• Set the format of the signal up-converted to the HDMI monitor output or component output terminal.
1
Select “HDMI/Component Out” at the Video Setup
menu.
*Video Setup
HDMI/Comp Out
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the HDMI/Component Out screen.
(Main unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
q Select the setting.
(Main unit)
*HDMI/Comp Out
A to HDMI: ON
w Select the parameter.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Analog to HDMI Convert:
• ON
• OFF
: Setting for converting analog video signals into HDMI signals.
: Setting for not converting analog video signals into HDMI signals.
Scaler:
• HDMI
: The i/p scaler can be used when outputting the input analog video signal to the HDMI monitor output terminal.
• Component: The i/p scaler can be used when outputting the input analog video signal to the component output terminal.
When “Analog to HDMI Convert” is set to “OFF”, the “Scaler” setting is automatically set to “Component” and fixed there.
Aspect:
• FULL
• NORMAL
: The video is output while maintaining the aspect ratio of the input video.
This mode is suited for playing back 16:9 video.
: A black band is added to the left and right of the input video and the video is output.
This mode is suited for playing back 4:3 video.
Resolution:
• 480p/576p : When the video signal input is a video, S-Video or 480i/576i component video signal, the resolution is converted to
480p/576p and the signal is output from the monitor output terminal.
• 1080i
: When the video signal input is a video, S-Video or 480i/576i/480p/576p component video signal, the resolution is
converted to 1080i and the signal is output from the monitor output terminal.
• 720p
: When the video signal input is a video, S-Video or 480i/576i/480p/576p component video signal, the resolution is
converted to 720p and the signal is output from the monitor output terminal.
• 1080p
: The input video signal is converted to a resolution of 1080p for output.
This cannot be selected when “Scaler” is set to “Component”.
• Through
: The video signal input is output as such from the monitor output terminal without being converted.
Color Space:
• Y Cb Cr
• RGB
: The Y Cb Cr format video signals is output via the HDMI output connector.
: The RGB format video signals is output via the HDMI output connector.
RGB Mode Setup:
• Normal
• Enhanced
: Signals are output via the HDMI output connector with a digital RGB video range (data range) of 16 (black) to 235 (white).
: Signals are output via the HDMI output connector with a digital RGB video range (data range) of 0 (black) to 255 (white).
73
When the HDMI connectors are connected, the black may seem to stand out, depending on the TV or the monitor. In this case, set
this to “Enhanced”.
When “Y Cb Cr” is selected under “Color Space”, “RGB Mode Setup” will have no effect.
The aspect ratio setting is valid when the resolution is set to 1080i, 720p or 1080p. To output with other resolutions, set the aspect
ratio on the TV.
When “Through” is set, the signal is output with the same resolution as input from the video, S-Video and component video terminals.
The OSD, however, is output with a resolution of 480i, so use a monitor compatible with this resolution.
4
Enter the setting.
The Video Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTES:
• “Scaler”, “Color Space” and “RGB Mode Setup” are only displayed when “Analog to HDMI Convert” is set to “ON”.
• When connecting to an HDCP compatible monitor equipped with DVI-D terminal using an HDMI/DVI-D converter cable, the signals are
output in RGB format, regardless of the “Color Space” setting.
• To view the on screen display using an HDMI monitor, set “Analog to HDMI Convert” at “HDMI Out Setup” to “ON” (default).
• Set the resolution of the video output to one that is compatible with the resolution of your monitor.
• When “Scaler” is set to “Component” and the video input signal includes copyright protection data, the signal is output from the
component video output terminal with a resolution of 480p/576p even if “Resolution” is set to “1080i” or “720p”.
74
4-5. Setting the Audio Delay
• When watching a DVD or other video source, the picture on the monitor may seem delayed with respect to the sound. In this case, adjust the
audio delay to delay the sound and synchronize it with the picture.
• The audio delay setting is stored separately for each input source.
1
Select “Audio Delay” at the Video Setup menu.
*Video Setup
Audio Delay
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Audio Delay screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Audio Delay
0ms
Set the delay time. (0 ms ~ 200 ms)
With a movie source, for example, adjust so that the movement of the actors’ lips is
synchronized with the sound.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Enter the setting.
The Video Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTE:
• The audio delay setting does not apply when playing in the EXT. IN mode or in the analog input direct mode or stereo mode (only when
the crossover frequency is set to “FIXED–THX–” or front speaker is set to “Large”).
75
4-6. Setting the On Screen Display (OSD)
• Use this to turn the on screen display (messages other than the menu screens) on or off.
• Sets the on screen display’s display mode.
1
Select “On Screen Display” at the Video Setup
menu.
*Video Setup
On Screen
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the On Screen Display screen.
(Main unit)
3
*On Screen
Func/Mode: ON
(Remote control unit)
q Select the item to be set.
(Main unit)
w Select the parameter.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Function/Mode Status :
Set whether or not to turn on the on screen display of the input source name and input mode when an input source is selected.
Master Volume Status :
Set whether or not to turn on the on screen display of the main volume level when the main volume is operated.
Display Mode :
Mode 1 : Flickering is not prevented.
Mode 2 : Prevents flickering of the on screen display when there is no video signal.
Use this mode if the on screen display does not appear in the Mode 1, as may happen according to the TV being used.
Enter the setting.
The Video Setup menu reappears.
4
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the
Video Setup menu screen.
The System Setup Menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
76
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Video Setup
Exit
5
Setting the Advanced Playback
• Makes more detailed audio playback settings.
1
Select “Advanced Playback” at the System Setup
Menu.
*System Setup
Advanced Play
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Advanced Playback menu screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Advanced Play
2ch DRCT/ST
77
5-1. Setting the 2ch Direct/Stereo
• Set this when you want to change the speaker settings when the surround mode is set to the 2-channel Direct or Stereo mode.
1
Select “2ch Direct / Stereo” at the Advanced Playback
menu.
*Advanced Play
2ch DRCT/ST
(Main unit)
2
(Remote control unit)
Display the 2ch Direct / Stereo screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Example: This screen is displayed in function of the settings made at “2-1. Speaker
Configuration”, “2-2. Subwoofer Setup”, “2-3. Delay Time” and “2-4. Crossover
Frequency”.
*2ch DRCT/ST
Setting Basic
3
Select “Custom”.
*2ch DRCT/ST
Setting Custom
(Main unit)
4
(Remote control unit)
q Select the setting.
(Main unit)
w Select the parameter.
(Remote control unit)
5
(Main unit)
Enter the setting.
The Advanced Playback menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2 Setting the front B speakers when the surround mode is set to the 2-channel
Direct or Stereo
When “Adv+Front B” is selected at “7-2. Power Amp Assign” and “Custom” is selected at this
setting, the “Front B” setting is displayed.
• To play signals from the Front B speaker when in the 2-channel Direct or Stereo mode, set
“Used”.
78
(Remote control unit)
5-2. Setting the Dolby Digital Setup
Sets the down-mixing method when not using a center speaker or surround speakers.
OFF: The dynamic range is not compressed.
ON: The dynamic range is compressed automatically according to the combination of speakers being used.
1
Select “Dolby Digital Setup” at the Advanced
Playback menu.
*Advanced Play
Dolby D Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Dolby Digital Setup screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Dolby D Setup
Comp. :
OFF
Select “ON” if you want to use the Compression, “OFF” if you do not want to use it.
Set “Compression” to “ON” if it seems that sound is distorted because the input level
exceeds the allowable input for the front speakers.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
NOTE:
When a center speaker or surround speakers are not connected, the sounds in those channels
are directed to the front speakers.
Enter the setting.
The Advanced Playback menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
79
5-3. Setting the Auto Surround Mode
The surround mode used at last for the four types of input signals shown below is stored in the memory, and the signal is automatically played
with that surround mode the next time it is input.
Note that the surround mode setting is also stored separately for the different input sources.
q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals (STEREO)
w 2-channel signals of Dolby Digital, DTS or other multi-channel format (DOLBY PLIIx cinema)
e Multi-channel signals of Dolby Digital, DTS or other multi-channel format (DOLBY/DTS SURROUND)
r PCM and DSD multi-channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS (MULTI CH IN)
Default settings are indicated in ( ).
During playback in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed.
1
Select “Auto Surround Mode” at the Advanced
Playback menu.
*Advanced Play
Auto Surround
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Auto Surround Mode screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Auto Surround
ON/OFF:
ON
Select “ON” if you want to use the auto surround mode, “OFF” if you do not want to use it.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Enter the setting.
The Advanced Playback menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Contents stored in the auto surround mode can be checked with the on
screen display.
(Remote control unit)
80
5-4. Setting the Manual EQ Setup
• Allows you to adjust the tonal quality of the various speakers (except the subwoofer) while listening to a music source.
1
Select “Manual EQ Setup” at the Advanced Playback
menu.
*Advanced Play
Manual EQ Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Manual EQ screen.
(Main unit)
*Manual EQ
Adjust CH L/R
(Remote control unit)
3
Select the adjustment mode, then press the ENTER button.
All CH : All channels can be adjusted simultaneously.
L/R CH : The left and right channels of the pair of speakers can be adjusted simultaneously.
Each CH : The channels can be adjusted separately.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Select the speaker to be set.
The display changes as follows.
q Select “L/R CH”
FL/FR
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
C
SBL/SBR
SLA/SRA
SLB/SRB
w Select “Each CH”
Example: When “L/R CH” is selected.
FL
FR
C
SLA
SBR
SBL
SRB
SLB
SRA
SB
*Manual EQ:L/R
Front L/R
1spkr
When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” at “Speaker Configuration”, this
is set to “SB”.
e Select “All CH”
In this case, speaker selection is not performed.
If a value is already set for the FL channel, the data stored for the FL channel is displayed.
81
Select the frequency.
5
*Manual EQ:L/R
63Hz :
0.0dB
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
6
Use the cursor left and right buttons to adjust the Gain level.
• Each frequency can be adjusted the range from –20 dB to +6 dB in 0.5 dB step.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
7
Enter the setting.
The Manual EQ screen reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
8
Select “Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
The Advanced Playback menu reappears.
*Manual EQ
Exit
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
9
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the
Advanced Playback menu screen.
The System Setup Menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
*Advanced Play
Exit
(Remote control unit)
To restore the settings to their defaults, select “Default Yes 0” then press the cursor left button.
82
2 Procedure for copying the “Flat” correction curve set at “Auto Setup”, then using the graphic equalizer to adjust
manually
NOTE: If the “Auto Setup” procedure has not been performed, this item is not displayed.
1
Select “Base Curve Copy”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
*Manual EQ
BaseCurve Copy
The Base Curve Select screen appears when the
cursor left button is pressed.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Base Curve
Copy?:
No
Select “Base Curve Copy?”, then press the cursor
left button to select “Yes”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
*Base Curve
Copy?:
Yes
(Remote control unit)
4
Enter the setting.
The Manual EQ screen reappears.
The type of the copied correction curve is displayed
in the upper right of this screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
83
6
Setting the Zone Setup (ZONE2 = 5.1/7.1ch)
• Make the settings related to surround playback and video for ZONE2.
• Adjust the sound played in ZONE3 and ZONE4.
1
Select “Zone Setup” at the System Setup Menu.
*System Setup
Zone Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Display the Zone Setup menu screen.
2
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Zone Setup
Z2 Sp Config.
NOTE:
• When “STEREO” or “MONO” is selected for the ZONE2 channel output setting at “7-1. Channel Setup” (see pages 96 ~ 99), the menu
screen displayed differs. In this case, see the instructions starting at page 95.
84
6-1. Setting the type of speakers for ZONE2
• The composition of the signals output to each channels and the frequency response are adjusted automatically according to the combination of
speakers actually being used in ZONE2.
1
Select “Speaker Config.” at the Zone Setup menu.
*Zone Setup
Z2 Sp Config.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Speaker Config. screen as below.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Set whether speakers are connected or not in ZONE2 and their size parameters.
Select the speakers connected in ZONE2 and the size parameters.
q Select the speaker.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Z2 Sp Config.
Front
: Small
w Select the parameter.
ZONE2 Center Sp.
ZONE2 Front Sp.
ZONE2 Subwoofer
For a description of the different parameters,
see page 50.
(Main unit)
ZONE2 Surround Sp.
*
(ZONE2 Surround back Sp.)
(Remote control unit)
* This
is only displayed when “7.1ch” is
selected for the ZONE2 channel output
setting at “7-1. Channel Setup”. (See
pages 96 ~ 99)
4
Enter the setting.
The Zone Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
85
6-2. Setting the low frequency distribution for ZONE2
• Set the subwoofer mode according to the speaker systems used in ZONE2.
1
Select “Subwoofer Mode” at the Zone Setup menu.
*Zone Setup
Z2 SW Mode
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Subwoofer Mode screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
*Z2 SW Mode
LFE
Select the setting.
LFE :
For any channel(s) that are set to LARGE, low frequencies in that channel’s corresponding
source are directed to that loudspeaker only. Low frequencies that are directed to the
subwoofer(s) are from the program source LFE channel, and from other channels where the
speakers are set to SMALL.
LFE + Main :
Low frequencies from speaker channels that have been set to LARGE are reproduced from
those speakers as well as from the subwoofer(s). Depending upon the characteristics of the
LARGE main speakers, this mode may provide a more even low frequency response
throughout the listening room.
Enter the setting.
The Zone Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTE:
• The subwoofer mode setting is only valid when “Large” is set for the ZONE2 front speakers and “Yes” is set for the subwoofer in the
“6-1. Speaker Configuration” settings. (See page 85)
86
6-3. Setting the Delay Time for ZONE2
• Input the distance between the listening position and each speakers in ZONE2 to set the surround delay time for ZONE2.
1
Select “Delay Time” at the Zone Setup menu.
*Zone Setup
Z2 Delay Time
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Delay Time screen.
(Main unit)
*Z2 Delay Time
Meters
:
Feet
(Remote control unit)
3
Select the desired unit, meters or feet.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Example: When “Meters” is selected
4
Once “Meters” or “Feet” is selected in step 3, the
Delay Time screen appears automatically.
*Z2 Delay Time
FL
:
3.60m
5
Select the speaker to be set.
The picture of the speaker selected blinks.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
87
6
Set the distance between the center speaker and listening position.
The distance changes in units of 0.1 meters (1 foot) or 0.01 meters (0.1 foot) each time the
button is pressed. Select the value closest to the measured distance.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Example: When the distance is set to 3.0 m
for the center speaker
When “Step” is selected, you can select the unit of “0.1 m (1 ft)” or “0.01 m (0.1 ft)”.
When “Yes” is selected for “Default”, then press the cursor left button to reset to the
default values.
Please note that the difference of distance for every speaker should be 6.0 m (20 ft) or less. If
you set an invalid distance, a CAUTION notice, such as screen right will appear. In this case,
please relocate the blinking speaker(s) so that its distance is no larger than the value shown in
highlighted line.
7
Enter the setting.
The Zone Setup menu reappears.
The AVC-A1XVA automatically sets the optimum surround delay time for the ZONE2 listening
room.
(Main unit)
88
(Remote control unit)
6-4. Setting the Channel Level for ZONE2
• Use this setting to adjust so that the playback level between the different channels of ZONE2 is equal.
• From the ZONE2 listening position, listen to the test tones produced from the speakers used in ZONE2 to adjust the level.
• The level can also be adjusted directly from the Remote control unit. (For details, see pages 173, 174.)
1
Select “Channel Level” at the Zone Setup menu.
*Zone Setup
Z2 Channel Lev.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Channel Level screen.
(Main unit)
*Z2 Channel Lev
T.Tone: Auto
(Remote control unit)
3
Select the mode.
Select “Auto” or “Manual”.
(Main unit)
*Z2 Channel Lev
T.Tone: Auto
(Remote control unit)
Auto :
Adjust the level while listening to the test tones
produced automatically from each speaker.
Manual :
Select the speaker from which you want to
produce the test tone to adjust the level.
4
Example: When the “Auto” mode is selected
Select “Test Tone Start”.
*Z2 Channel Lev
Tone Start:Yes
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
Select “Yes”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
89
6
(Main unit)
a. When “Auto” mode is selected:
Test tones are automatically emitted from each speaker used in
ZONE2.
The test tones are emitted from each speaker in the following order,
at 4-second intervals the first time and second time around, 2second intervals the third time around and on:
Flashing
FL
(Remote control unit)
C
FR
SR
SL
SW
Use the cursor left and right buttons to adjust all the speakers to the
same volume.
The volume can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in units of 0.5
dB.
Example: When the volume is set to –11.5 dB
while the test tone is being
produced from the Front Lch
speaker
Z2 Test Tone A
FL
:
-11.5dB
b. When “Manual” mode is selected:
q Select the speaker used in ZONE2.
w Adjust all the speakers to the same
volume.
Flashing
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Example: “Manual” mode is selected.
Z2 Test Tone M
FL
:
-11.5dB
7
Enter the setting.
The Channel Level screen reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
To cancel the settings, press the cursor down button to select “Level Clear” and “Yes” on the
“Channel Level” screen, then make the settings again.
NOTES:
• When adjusting the level of an active subwoofer system, you may also need to adjust the subwoofer’s own volume control.
• When you adjust the channel levels while in the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL mode, the channel level adjustments made will affect
all surround modes for ZONE2.
• After you have completed the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL adjustments, you can then activate the individual surround modes and
adjust channel levels that will be remembered for each of those modes. Then, whenever you activate a particular surround sound mode,
your preferred channel level adjustments for just that mode will be recalled. Check the instructions for adjusting channel levels within
each surround mode. (See pages 173, 174)
• You can adjust the channel levels for each of the following surround modes for ZONE2: STEREO, DOLBY/DTS SURROUND, 5/7 CH
STEREO, WIDE SCREEN, SUPER STADIUM, ROCK ARENA, JAZZ CLUB, CLASSIC CONCERT, MONO MOVIE, VIDEO GAME, MATRIX
and VIRTUAL.
90
6-5. Setting the Crossover Frequency for ZONE2
• Set the frequency (in Hz) below which deep bass appearing in the main channels will be routed to the ZONE2 subwoofer.
1
Select the “Crossover Frequency” at the Zone Setup
menu.
*Zone Setup
Z2 Crossover
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Crossover Frequency screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Z2 Crossover
80Hz
Select the frequency.
Variable 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 150, 200, 250 Hz :
Set as desired according to your speakers’ bass playback ability.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Enter the setting.
The Zone Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTES:
• For the majority of home theater speaker systems, we recommend that the crossover frequency be set to 80 Hz. When using very
compact speakers, however, it may be advantageous to select a higher crossover frequency. Check the specified low frequency limit of
each speaker (usually published in the specifications tables in speaker owner’s manuals).
• The crossover frequency mode is valid only when subwoofer is set to ON, and when one or more speakers are set to SMALL, as
described in section “6-1. Speaker Configuration” settings. (See page 85)
91
6-6. Setting the Video Setup for ZONE2
[1] Video Convert Mode (ZONE2)
• Set whether or not to use the video conversion function for the signal output to the ZONE2 monitor output terminal.
1
Select “Video Setup” at the Zone Setup menu.
*Zone Setup
Z2 Video Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Video Setup screen.
(Main unit)
3
Select “Video Convert Mode”, then press the
ENTER button.
Display the Video Convert Mode.
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
*Z2 Video Setup
Z2 Video Conv.
(Remote control unit)
*Z2 Video Conv.
DVD
:
ON
(Remote control unit)
q Select the ZONE2 input source.
w Select the mode as below.
ON
OFF
The details in each mode are as follows.
(Main unit)
ON
OFF
92
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
: When there are multiple input signals for the input sources selected at ZONE2, the input signal is detected and the input
signal output to the ZONE2’s monitor output terminal is selected automatically, in the following order of priority:
Component, S-Video, Composite.
: The convert function does not operate.
The video signal of the input source selected at ZONE2 is only output to the ZONE2 video monitor output terminal.
The S-Video signal selected at ZONE2 is only output to the ZONE2 S-Video monitor output terminal.
Press the ENTER button to return to the Video Setup screen.
5
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
[2] Audio Delay (ZONE2)
• Set this if it seems there is a delay in the picture on the monitor screen with respect to the sound when watching a DVD or other video
source in the ZONE2 listening room. Adjust the audio delay to delay the sound and synchronize the sound and picture.
• The audio delay setting is stored in the memory individually for the different input sources selected at ZONE2.
1
Select “Audio Delay” at the Video Setup screen.
*Z2 Video Setup
Z2 Audio Delay
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Audio Delay screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Z2 Audio Delay
0ms
Set the delay time. (0 ms ~ 200 ms)
With a movie source, for example, adjust so that the movement of the actors’ lips is
synchronized with the sound.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Press the ENTER button to return to the Video Setup screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
Select “Exit”, then press the ENTER button to return
the Zone Setup menu screen.
*Z2 Video Setup
Exit
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
93
6-7. ZONE3 and ZONE4 tone control and channel level setting
• Adjust the sound output from ZONE3 and ZONE4.
1
Select “Zone3/4 Tone/Ch Lev.” at the Zone Setup
menu.
(Main unit)
*Zone Setup
Zone3/4
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Zone3/4 Tone/Ch Lev. screen.
(Main unit)
*Zone3/4
Z3 Tone/Ch Lev.
(Remote control unit)
3
Select the Zone whose sound you want to adjust.
(ZONE3, ZONE4)
Switch to the setting screen.
(Main unit)
*Z3 Tone/Ch Lev
Bass
:
0dB
(Main unit)
Example: When “Zone3” is selected
(Remote control unit)
4
(Remote control unit)
q Select the item to be set.
(Main unit)
w Adjust the parameter.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Bass
Treble
: Adjust the tone for the bass.
: Adjust the tone for the treble.
(The bass or treble sound can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in steps of 2.0 dB.)
HPF
: Set this to “ON” if your speakers do not have a very strong capacity for producing low bass. Using the high pass filter
makes it possible to reduce distortion of the bass sound.
Channel Level : Set so that the playback level is the same for the left and right channels.
(The volume can adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in steps of 1.0 dB.)
Press the ENTER button to return to the Zone3/4 Tone/Ch Lev. screen.
5
Use the same procedure to make the settings for ZONE4.
(Main unit)
94
(Remote control unit)
6
Select “Exit” then press the ENTER button.
The Zone Setup menu reappears.
*Zone3/4
Exit
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
7
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at Zone
Setup menu screen.
The System Setup Menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
*Zone Setup
Exit
(Remote control unit)
2 “Zone Setup” setting when ZONE2 is set to “STEREO” or “MONO”
The “Zone Setup” screen shown below is displayed when “STEREO” or “MONO” is selected for the ZONE2 channel setting at “71. Channel Setup”.
*Zone Setup
Z2 Tone/Ch Lev.
• For instructions on making the ZONE2, 3 and 4 “Tone/Ch Level” settings (items 1 to 3).
• For instructions on the “Video Setup” (item 4), see pages 92, 93.
95
7
Setting the Option Setup
• Make other expert settings.
1
Select “Option Setup” at the System Setup Menu.
*System Setup
Option Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Option Setup menu screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Option Setup
Channel Setup
7-1. Setting the Channel setup
• With this setting it is possible to change the number of channels played in the different zones according to the purpose.
The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with pre-out connectors for a total of 22 channels.
16 channel of these pre-out connectors can be assigned between the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 (Theater). In addition, up to three channels of
subwoofers can be added to the MAIN ZONE, so subwoofers can be set in the front and back or at the sides. The number of channels output
from the pre-out connectors exclusively for ZONE2, 3 and 4 can be set to “MONO” or “STEREO” according to the method of playback in the
various multi-zones.
2 Channel setup flow
Set the number of channels for the MAIN ZONE’s main channel.
Set the number of subwoofer channels for the MAIN ZONE.
The number of channels that can be set for ZONE2 depends of the
number of channels in the MAIN ZONE. See the table on page 98.
Set the number of channels for the ZONE2.
Set the number of channels for the ZONE3.
Set the number of channels for the ZONE4.
96
Select “Channel Setup” at the Option Setup menu.
1
*Option Setup
Channel Setup
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Channel Setup screen.
(Main unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
q Select the Zone.
(Main unit)
*Channel Setup
Main
:
9.1CH
w Select the channel setting.
Also select the number of subwoofers
and the output composition to be used in
the MAIN ZONE.
Refer to the table on page 98.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Enter the setting.
The Option Setup menu reappears.
4
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
97
2 The number of channels that can be selected for the different zones is as shown below.
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE4
5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
2 SP
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
3 SP
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
1 SP
7.1 CH / 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
2 SP
5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
3 SP
5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
1 SP
7.1 CH / 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
2 SP
7.1 CH / 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
3 SP
7.1 CH / 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
STEREO / MONO
Main
Subwoofer
9.1 CH
1 SP
7.1 CH
5.1 CH
NOTE:
• The channel settings that can be selected for ZONE2 depend on the channel settings for the MAIN ZONE.
2 The subwoofer output composition is as shown below.
Subwoofer
–
2 SP
L/R
Select this when subwoofers are installed on the left and right.
F/B
Select this when subwoofers are installed at the front and rear.
3 SP
98
Output Composition
1 SP
Select this when only one subwoofer is connected.
LFE/M
Select this to use the subwoofer for both the main channel’s low frequencies and for LFE
low frequencies.
L/R/LFE
Select this when subwoofers are installed on the left and right and you are using a
subwoofer specifically for the LFE.
F/B/LFE
Select this when subwoofers are installed at the front and rear and you are using a
subwoofer specifically for the LFE.
2 Connecting the preouts
The pre-out connector used to connect the subwoofer depends on the MAIN ZONE’s channel setup. Connect as shown on the diagram below.
Channel Setup
Connection
Main
9.1 CH / 7.1 CH /
5.1 CH
Subwoofer
1 SP
Subwoofer
9.1 CH
2 SP
Subwoofer(L/F/M)
Subwoofer(R/B/LFE)
3 SP
Subwoofer(L/F)
LFE
7.1 CH
2 SP
Subwoofer(R/B)
Subwoofer(L/F/M)
Subwoofer(R/B/LFE)
3 SP
Subwoofer(L/F)
LFE
5.1 CH
2 SP
Subwoofer(R/B)
Subwoofer(L/F/M)
Subwoofer(R/B/LFE)
3 SP
LFE
Subwoofer(L/F)
Subwoofer(R/B)
99
7-2. Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment
• With the AVC-A1XVA’s 10-channel power amplifier, it is possible to select 10 channels worth of signals (not including the subwoofer signals
output from the pre-out connectors) to be output from the speakers. This makes it possible to put together various speaker systems. The
channels can be selected freely, so “L1” to “L5” and “R1” to “R5” are indicated on the speaker terminals on the AVC-A1XVA’s rear panel.
• The channels for which the power amplifier can be assigned differ according to the channel settings made at “7-1. Channel Setup”. (See pages
96 ~ 99)
2 Power amplifier assignment flow
Determine what speaker system configuration you want.
(a)
Selecting the speaker outputs freely
Signals are output from the speakers with
priority for the MAIN ZONE channels.
Using front B
(b)
Assign the power amplifier to the MAIN ZONE
channels set at “7-1. Channel Setup”.
Select “Advanced”.
Select “Adv + Front B”.
(c)
The number of free power amplifiers depends
on the setting at (b).
Set what channels to assign the power amplifier to.
From (a) to (c) will be done
automatically.
If you do not want to output anything
Decide what to output to the free power
amplifiers at (c).
Select “Normal ”.
Bi-Amp output of
MAIN ZONE front
channel only
Bi-Amp output of
MAIN ZONE
channels
Output ZONE2
Output ZONE3
Output ZONE4
Select
“Bi-Amp Front”.
Select “Bi-Amp”.
Select “+Zone2”.
Select “+Zone3”.
Select “+Zone4”.
100
Output ZONE2/3/4
Select
“+Zone2/3/4”.
Select “Power Amp Assign” at the Option Setup
menu.
1
*Option Setup
P.Amp Assign
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Power Amp Assign screen.
(Main unit)
3
Select the Amp Assign mode according to the speaker system you want to achieve.
One of the following modes can be selected: “Normal”, “+Zone2”, “+Zone3”, “+Zone4”,
“+Zone2/3”, “+Zone3/4”, “+Zone2/4”, “+Zone2/3/4”, “Bi-Amp Front”, “Bi-Amp”,
“Advanced” and “Adv+Front B”.
For details of the “Amp Assign Mode”, see page 102.
(Main unit)
4
*P.Amp Assign
Normal
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTE:
• Selectable mode will vary, depending on the numbers of free amplifiers.
If “Advanced” or “Adv+Front B” is selected at step 3, the power amplifiers can be assigned freely to the desired channels.
q Select the power amplifier to be assigned.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
w Select which channel to assign the power
amplifier to.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*P.Amp Assign
L1:
FL
5
Enter the setting.
The Option Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
101
2 Amp Assign mode
Normal
: This is the recommended amplifier assignment mode. Normally select this when not conducting the power amplifier
assignment.
By default, this is set to “Normal”.
Advanced
: With this mode, the power amplifiers can be assigned freely to the desired channels according to the speaker system you are
using.
Adv+Front B : With this mode, the power amplifiers can be assigned freely to the desired channels and front B.
• The following modes can be selected when there are power amplifiers that are free with respect to the recommended amplifier assignment
(“Normal”).
+Zone2
: This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 output channel.
+Zone3
: This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE3 output channel.
+Zone4
: This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE4 output channel.
+Zone2/3
: This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned simultaneously to the ZONE2 and 3 output
channels.
+Zone3/4
: This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned simultaneously to the ZONE3 and 4 output
channels.
+Zone2/4
: This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned simultaneously to the ZONE2 and 4 output
channels.
+Zone2/3/4
: This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned simultaneously to the ZONE2, 3 and 4 output
channels.
Bi-Amp+Front : This mode is the setting for playing the front channel with Bi–amp connections.
Bi-Amp
: This mode is the setting for playing the front, center and surround channels with Bi–amp connections.
NOTES:
• The amplifier assignment modes that can be selected differ according to the channel settings made at “7-1. Channel Setup” (See pages
96 ~ 99).
• The status in which power amplifiers are assigned to output channels in the different amplifier assignment modes differs according to
the channel settings for the different zones. (See pages 102 ~ 104)
• If the “Advanced” or “Adv+Front B” amplifier assignment mode is selected, the channels to which power amplifiers can be assigned
differ according to the channel settings for the different zones. (See page 104)
Bi-Amp connections
Certain loudspeakers are equipped with two sets of input terminals, for bi-amplification. The AVC-A1XVA Amp Assign mode
allows you to power bi-amp-capable speakers with two amplifier channels, up to a total of 5 bi-amplified speakers in a system
using all 10 of the AVC-A1XVA amplifier channels. Be sure to consult the owner’s manual of your bi-amp-capable speakers for
further information before proceeding.
NOTE:
• When making bi-amp connections,
be sure to remove the short-circuiting
bar included with the speaker.
AVC-A1XVA
SPEAKER
2 Table of power amplifier assignment modes with respect to the channel settings for the different zones and
assignment modes
• Amp Assign mode: Normal
Channel Setup / MAIN ZONE
Power Amp Assign
7.1 CH
9.1 CH
5.1 CH
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
FR
L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2
–
L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A
L4
–
R4
–
L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5
–
R5
–
L4 SL B R4 SR B L4
102
–
R4
–
• Amp Assign mode: +Zone2
Channel Setup /
MAIN ZONE
9.1 CH
ZONE2
Power Amp Assign
5.1 CH
7.1 CH
MONO
STEREO
MONO
5.1 CH
STEREO
MONO
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
L2
C
R2 Z2 M L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2 Z2 M L2
C
R2 Z2 C L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2 Z2 M
FR
FR
FR
FR
L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A
L4 SL B R4 SR B L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4
–
R4
–
L4 Z2 FL R4 Z2 FR L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4
L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 Z2 SL R5 Z2 SR L5
–
R5
–
L5
–
R4
–
–
R5
–
• Amp Assign mode: +Zone3
Channel Setup /
MAIN ZONE
9.1 CH
ZONE3
MONO
Power Amp Assign
7.1 CH
STEREO
FR
5.1 CH
MONO
STEREO
FR
MONO
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
L2
C
R2 Z3 M L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2 Z3 M L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2 Z3 M
FR
L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A
L4 SL B R4 SR B L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4
–
R4
–
L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4
L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5
–
R5
–
L5
–
R4
–
–
R5
–
• Amp Assign mode: +Zone4
Channel Setup /
MAIN ZONE
9.1 CH
ZONE4
MONO
Power Amp Assign
7.1 CH
STEREO
5.1 CH
MONO
STEREO
MONO
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
L2
C
R2 Z4 M L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2 Z4 M L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2 Z4 M
FR
FR
FR
L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A
L4 SL B R4 SR B L4 Z4 L R4 Z4 R L4
–
R4
–
L4 Z4 L R4 Z4 R L4
L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5
–
R5
–
L5
–
R4
–
–
R5
–
• Amp Assign mode: +Zone2/3
MAIN ZONE
Channel Setup /
5.1 CH
7.1 CH
ZONE2
STEREO
MONO
MONO
STEREO
STEREO
MONO
MONO
ZONE3
MONO
STEREO
MONO
STEREO
MONO
STEREO
MONO
Power Amp Assign
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L2
C
R2 Z3 M L2
C
R2 Z2 M L2
C
R2 Z3 M L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2 Z3 M L2
C
R2 Z2 M L2
C
R2 Z3 M
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A
L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4 Z2 M R4
–
L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4 Z2 M R4
L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 Z3 L R5 Z3 R L5
–
R5
–
L5
–
R5
–
L5
–
R5
–
–
• Amp Assign mode: +Zone3/4
7.1 CH
MAIN ZONE
Channel Setup /
5.1 CH
ZONE3
STEREO
MONO
MONO
STEREO
STEREO
MONO
MONO
ZONE4
MONO
STEREO
MONO
STEREO
MONO
STEREO
MONO
Power Amp Assign
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L2
C
R2 Z4 M L2
C
R2 Z3 M L2
C
R2 Z4 M L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2 Z4 M L2
C
R2 Z3 M L2
C
R2 Z4 M
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A
L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4 Z4 L R4 Z4 R L4 Z3 M R4
–
L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4 Z4 L R4 Z4 R L4 Z3 M R4
L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 Z4 L R5 Z4 R L5
–
R5
–
L5
–
R5
–
L5
–
R5
–
–
• Amp Assign mode: +Zone2/4
MAIN ZONE
Channel Setup /
Power Amp Assign
7.1 CH
5.1 CH
ZONE2
STEREO
MONO
MONO
STEREO
STEREO
MONO
MONO
ZONE4
MONO
STEREO
MONO
STEREO
MONO
STEREO
MONO
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L2
C
R2 Z4 M L2
C
R2 Z2 M L2
C
R2 Z4 M L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2 Z4 M L2
C
R2 Z2 M L2
C
R2 Z4 M
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A
L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z4 L R4 Z4 R L4 Z2 M R4
–
L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z4 L R4 Z4 R L4 Z2 M R4
L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 Z4 L R5 Z4 R L5
–
R5
–
L5
–
R5
–
L5
–
R5
–
–
103
• Amp Assign mode: +Zone2/3/4
MAIN ZONE
Channel Setup /
5.1 CH
7.1 CH
MONO
ZONE2
MONO
STEREO
STEREO
MONO
STEREO
MONO
MONO
ZONE3
MONO
STEREO
MONO
STEREO
MONO
STEREO
MONO
MONO
ZONE4
MONO
MONO
STEREO
STEREO
MONO
MONO
STEREO
MONO
Power Amp Assign
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L1
FL
R1
L2
C
R2 Z2 M L2
C
R2 Z4 M L2
C
R2 Z3 M L2
C
R2 Z2 M L2
C
R2 Z3 M L2
C
R2 Z2 M L2
C
R2 Z2 M L2
C
R2 Z2 M
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A
L4 Z3 M R4 Z4 M L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4 Z4 L R4 Z4 R L4 Z3 M R4 Z4 M
L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 Z3 L R5 Z3 R L5 Z4 L R5 Z4 R L5 Z4 L R5 Z4 R L5 Z4 M R5
• Amp Assign mode: Bi-Amp Front
Channel Setup / MAIN ZONE
Power Amp Assign
–
L5 Z4 M R5
7.1 CH
Channel Setup / MAIN ZONE
5.1 CH
FL
R1
FR
L1
FL
R1
FR
L2
C
R2
–
L2
C
R2
–
Power Amp Assign
–
L5
–
5.1 CH
L1
FL
R1
FR
L2
C
R2
C
L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A
L3 SL A R3 SR A
L4
R4
L5 Z3 M R5
• Amp Assign mode: Bi-Amp
L1
FL
–
FR
L4
FL
R4
FR
L4
L5 SBL R5 SBR L5
–
R5
–
L5 SL A R5 SR A
FL
R4
FR
2 Table of channels to which power amplifiers can be assigned with respect to the channel settings for the different
zones and the amplifier assignment modes
• Amp Assign mode: Advanced
Channel Setup ↓
MAIN ZONE
9.1 CH
7.1 CH
5.1 CH
ASSIGNABLE CHANNEL
ZONE2
5.1CH
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, SL B, SR B, SBL, SBR, Z2 FL, Z2 FR, Z2 C, Z2 SL, Z2 SR, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
STEREO
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, SL B, SR B, SBL, SBR, Z2 L, Z2 R, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
MONO
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, SL B, SR B, SBL, SBR, Z2 M, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
7.1CH
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, SBL, SBR, Z2 FL, Z2 FR, Z2 C, Z2 SL, Z2 SR, Z2 SBL, Z2 SBR, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
5.1CH
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, SBL, SBR, Z2 FL, Z2 FR, Z2 C, Z2 SL, Z2 SR, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
STEREO
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, SBL, SBR, Z2 L, Z2 R, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
MONO
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, SBL, SBR, Z2 M, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
7.1CH
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, Z2 FL, Z2 FR, Z2 C, Z2 SL, Z2 SR, Z2 SBL, Z2 SBR, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
5.1CH
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, Z2 FL, Z2 FR, Z2 C, Z2 SL, Z2 SR, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
STEREO
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, Z2 L, Z2 R, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
MONO
FL, FR, C, SL A, SR A, Z2 M, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
• Amp Assign mode: Adv+Front B
Channel Setup ↓
MAIN ZONE
9.1 CH
7.1 CH
5.1 CH
ZONE2
ASSIGNABLE CHANNEL
5.1CH
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, SL B, SR B, SBL, SBR, Z2 FL, Z2 FR, Z2 C, Z2 SL, Z2 SR, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
STEREO
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, SL B, SR B, SBL, SBR, Z2 L, Z2 R, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
MONO
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, SL B, SR B, SBL, SBR, Z2 M, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
7.1CH
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, SBL, SBR, Z2 FL, Z2 FR, Z2 C, Z2 SL, Z2 SR, Z2 SBL, Z2 SBR, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
5.1CH
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, SBL, SBR, Z2 FL, Z2 FR, Z2 C, Z2 SL, Z2 SR, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
STEREO
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, SBL, SBR, Z2 L, Z2 R, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
MONO
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, SBL, SBR, Z2 M, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
7.1CH
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, Z2 FL, Z2 FR, Z2 C, Z2 SL, Z2 SR, Z2 SBL, Z2 SBR, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
5.1CH
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, Z2 FL, Z2 FR, Z2 C, Z2 SL, Z2 SR, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
STEREO
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, Z2 L, Z2 R, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
MONO
FL A, FR A, FL B, FR B, C, SL A, SR A, Z2 M, Z3 L, Z3 R, Z4 L, Z4 R
The above is an example of the selectable channels when “STEREO” is set for the ZONE3 and 4 channel setting.
If “MONO” is selected, “Z3 M” and “Z4 M” are displayed.
104
R5
–
7-3. Setting the Volume Control
• Set the upper limit for the volume, the volume level when the power is turned on, and the volume level when the mute mode is set for the
different zones.
1
Select “Volume Control” at the Option Setup menu.
*Option Setup
Volume Control
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Volume Control screen.
(Main unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
*Volume
:Main
Limit
:
OFF
Make the volume restriction settings for the different zones.
q Select the desired setting.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
w Select the parameter.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Volume Limit: Set the upper limit for the volume for the different zones.
–20 dB, –10 dB, 0 dB : The volume cannot be increased above the selected levels.
OFF
: If you do not want to set a volume limit, select “OFF”.
In this case, the volume can be set to the AVC-A1XVA’s maximum volume (output) level of +18 dB, which is
extremely loud.
Power On Level: Set the volume that is set when the power is turned on for the different zones.
You can adjust the volume level within the range of –80 to +18 dB in steps of 1.0 dB.
– – – (Mute)
: The volume is always muted when the power is turned on.
LAST
: The volume set when the AVC-A1XVA was last used is stored in the memory and set when the power is turned
on.
Mute Level: Set the volume attenuation level when the mute mode is set for the different zones.
FULL
: The volume is fully muted.
–40 dB
: The volume is lowered 40 dB from the current level.
–20 dB
: The volume is lowered 20 dB from the current level.
Volume Level: Set whether to fix the output level for the different zones or make it variable.
Variable
: The level can be adjusted freely using buttons on the Remote control unit.
–40 dB, 0 dB
: The output level is fixed at the set level and the volume can no longer be adjusted.
NOTES:
• For ZONE2, ZONE3 and ZONE4, the “Volume Limit”, “Power On Level” and “Mute Level” can be set when “Variable” is
selected for “Volume Level”.
• When the power amplifier is assigned to either of the ZONE2, ZONE3 and ZONE4 channels at “7-2. Power Amp Assign”, “-VAR” (only variable) is displayed and the fixed level cannot be set.
105
Enter the setting.
The Option Setup menu reappears.
4
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
7-4. Setting the Trigger Out
• Four 12 V DC Trigger Outputs on the rear panel can be used to control other devices with compatible trigger inputs, such as motorized screens,
motorized screen masking, motorized drapes, and other trigger-controlled devices.
• Set the DC output supplied from the trigger out jacks for the various input sources to ON or OFF.
1
Select “Trigger Out” at the Option Setup menu.
*Option Setup
Trigger Out
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Trigger Out screen.
(Main unit)
*Trigger Out
Trigger Out 1
(Remote control unit)
3
Select the trigger out jack you want to set.
Switch to the setting screen.
*Trigger Out 1
ZONE : MAIN
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
Example: When “Trigger Out 1” is selected
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Select the Zone. (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3 and ZONE4)
The power supplied from the trigger out jack turns on and off when the power for the set zone
is turned on and off.
(Main unit)
5
(Remote control unit)
q Select the input source.
(Main unit)
w Select “ON” or “OFF”.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
ON : When that input source is selected, the power supplied from the trigger out jack turns on.
OFF : When that input source is selected, the power supplied from the trigger out jack turns off.
106
(Remote control unit)
6
If “MAIN” was selected at step 4, the trigger out
jack’s output setting can also be made for the
various surround modes.
q Select the surround mode.
(Main unit)
*Trigger Out 1
DRCT/ST
: ON
w Select “ON” or “OFF”.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
ON : If that surround mode is selected when an input source set to “ON” is selected, the power supplied from the trigger out jack turns
on.
OFF : If that surround mode is selected when an input source set to “ON” is selected, the power supplied from the trigger out jack turns
off.
7
Press the ENTER button to return to the Trigger Out screen.
Use the same procedure to make the settings for Trigger Out 2, 3, 4.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
8
Select “Exit” then press the ENTER button at the
Trigger Out screen.
The Option Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
*Trigger Out
Exit
If “Yes” is selected for “Default”, then press the
cursor left button to reset to the default values.
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
107
7-5. Setting the AC Outlet Assignment
• Set the power of the AC outlet on the AVC-A1XVA’s rear panel to ON or OFF with respect to the different input sources.
1
Select “AC Outlet Assign” at the Option Setup
menu.
*Option Setup
AC Outlet
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the AC Outlet Assign screen.
(Main unit)
3
Select the Zone. (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3 and ZONE4)
The power of the AC outlet turns on and off when the power for the set zone is turned on and
off.
(Main unit)
4
*AC Outlet
ZONE : MAIN
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
q Select the input source.
(Main unit)
w Select “ON” or “OFF”.
(Remote control unit)
ON : The power of the AC outlet turns on when that input source is selected.
OFF : The power of the AC outlet turns off when that input source is selected.
5
Enter the setting.
The Option Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
108
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
7-6. Protecting the setting and memory backup
[1] User Memory
• The currently set settings (system setup, surround parameters, etc.) can be stored in the memory. The stored settings can be called out
when needed.
Select “Setup Memory / Lock” at the Option Setup
menu.
1
*Option Setup
Memory/Lock
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Display the Setup Memory / Lock screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
*Memory/Lock
User Memory
Select “User Memory” at the Setup Memory / Lock screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Switch to the User Memory screen.
4
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
*User Memory
Save
: Yes
To store the settings in the memory, select “Yes”.
Once the settings are stored in the memory,
“Load” is displayed and the settings can be
loaded.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
109
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button to return to the Setup Memory / Lock screen.
6
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
[2] Setup Lock
• The system setup settings can be locked so that they cannot be changed easily.
1
Select “Setup Lock” at the Setup Memory / Lock
screen.
*Memory/Lock
Setup Lock
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Switch to the Setup Lock screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Select “ON”, to lock the system setup settings.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Press the ENTER button to return to the Setup Memory / Lock screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the
Setup Memory / Lock screen.
The Option Setup menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
110
*Setup Lock
ON/OFF:
OFF
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Memory/Lock
Exit
6
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button to finalize the setting and exit the Option Setup mode.
When the setup lock function is activated, the settings listed below cannot be changed, and
“SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed when related buttons are operated.
• System setup settings
• Surround parameter settings
• Tone control settings
• Channel level settings (including test tones)
• RoomEQ
To unlock, press the System Setup button again and
display the Setup Lock screen, then select “OFF”
and press the ENTER button.
(Remote control unit)
*Option Setup
Exit
System setup is complete. Once these settings are made, there is no need to change them unless different AV components are
connected or the speakers are repositioned.
7-7. Setteing the Network Setup
• If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need to make the settings at “IP Address” and “Proxy”, since the DHCP
function is set to “ON” in the AVC-A1XVA’s default settings.
• If the AVC-A1XVA is being used connected to a network without the DHCP function, the network settings must be made. In this case, some
knowledge of networks is required.
[1] Setting the IP Address
• Set this when “OFF” is set for “DHCP”.
1
Select “Network Setup” at the Option Setup menu.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Press the ENTER button.
• The “Network Setup” screen appears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Select “IP Address”.
3
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
111
Press the ENTER button.
• The “IP Address” screen appears.
4
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
Select “OFF”.
• The DHCP function is disabled.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
6
Select the desired setting item.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
7
Input the address.
IP Address
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
8
: Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. The Network Audio function
cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.
CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 ~ 10.255.255.255
CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 ~ 172.31.255.255
CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 ~ 192.168.255.255
Subnet Mask : When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly to the AVCA1XVA, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your
provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.
Gateway
: When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.
Primary DNS / Secondary DNS:
If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by
your provider, input it at “primary DNS”. If there are two or more DNS
addresses, input the first one at “Second DNS”.
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “IP Address” menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTES:
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol):
These are systems by which the IP address and other network settings are automatically set for the AVC-A1XVA, computer, broadband
router and network devices.
• DNS (Domain Name System):
This is a system for converting the domain names used when browsing Internet sites (for example, “www.denon.jp”) into the IP
addresses actually used for communications (for example, “202.221.192.106”).
112
[2] Setting the Proxy
• Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.
1
Select “Proxy” at the “Network Setup” screen.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Press the ENTER button.
• The “Proxy” screen appears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Select “ON”.
• The proxy server is enabled.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Select the desired setting item.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
5
Input the character or number.
Proxy : Input the proxy server domain name or address.
Port : Input the proxy server port number.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
6
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Network Setup” menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
113
[3] Setting the Network Option
• When not using the AVC-A1XVA connected in a network, set “ON” to reduce the power consumption when in the standby mode.
Set “OFF” when using the AVC-A1XVA connected in a network.
2 Setting the Power Saving
Select “Network Option” at the “Network Setup”
screen.
1
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Press the ENTER button.
• The “Network Option” screen appears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Select “OFF”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
4
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Network Setup” menu reappears.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2 Setting the PC Language
• Select according to the language of the computer being used.
The languages are indicated with three letters conforming to ISO639-2.
1
Select the PC Language.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
2
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Network Setup” menu reappears.
(Main unit)
114
(Remote control unit)
2 Checking the MAC Address
• The AVC-A1XVA’s MAC address is displayed.
• The MAC address differs for each set.
After completing system setup
This button can be pressed at any time during the system setup process to complete the process.
1
Press the SYSTEM SETUP button at the System Setup Menu, or select “Exit” and press the
ENTER button.
The changed settings are entered and the on screen display turns off.
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
*System Setup
Exit
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
2 On screen display for component video outputs
• When viewing component video signals via the AVC-A1XVA, the on screen display is only displayed on the monitor when the “System
Setup” and “Surround Parameter” operations are performed and when the Remote control unit’s ON SCREEN button is operated.
• When only component video signals are input to the AVC-A1XVA or when “Component” is selected at the “Video Convert Mode settings”,
the characters of the on screen display are not displayed over the picture.
115
8 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
• The included Remote control unit (RC-1036) can be used to operate not only the AVC-A1XVA but other remote control compatible DENON
components as well. In addition, the memory contains the control signals for other Remote control units, so it can be used to operate nonDenon remote control compatible products.
Inserting the Batteries
q Remove the Remote control unit’s rear cover.
w Set two LR6/AA batteries in the battery compartment in the
indicated direction.
Notes on Batteries
• Use LR6/AA alkaline batteries in the Remote control unit.
• Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate
even when the Remote control unit is operated nearby the set. (The
included battery is only for verifying operation.)
• When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper
direction, following the “<” and “>” marks in the battery
compartment.
• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
• Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
• Do not use two different types of batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in
flames.
• Remove the batteries from the Remote control unit when you do
not plan to use it for an extended period of time.
• If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside
of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
• When replacing the batteries, have the new batteries ready and
insert them as quickly as possible.
e Put the rear cover back on.
Using the Remote Control Unit
• Point the Remote control unit at the remote sensor on the Main
unit as shown on the diagram.
• The Remote control unit can be used from a straight distance of
approximately 7 meters from the Main unit, but this distance will be
shorter if there are obstacles in the way or if the Remote control
unit is not pointed directly at the remote sensor.
• The Remote control unit can be operated at a horizontal angle of up
to 30 degrees with respect to the remote sensor.
30°
30°
Approx. 7 m
116
NOTES:
• It may be difficult to operate the Remote control unit if the remote
sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light.
• Do not press buttons on the Main unit and Remote control unit
simultaneously. Doing so may result in malfunction.
• Neon signs or other devices emitting pulse-type noise nearby may
result in malfunction, so keep the set as far away from such
devices as possible.
Operating DENON audio components
1
Press the mode selector buttons to select the component
you want to operate.
• The icon for the selected mode flashes.
:
:
AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 or
SYSTEM CALL
TUNER
:
DIGITAL TUNER (This mode is for future use.)
:
SATELLITE or CABLE
:
CD or CDR
:
DVD or DVDR
:
VCR or TAPE
:
TV
1
This function switches as shown below each time one of
the AMP button is pressed.
Example:
Select “AMP” mode.
HOME
Select “ZONE4” mode.
Select “ZONE2” mode.
Select “SYSTEM CALL” mode.
Select “ZONE3” mode.
2
Operate the audio component.
For details, refer to the component’s operating
instructions.
It may not be possible to operate some models.
NOTES:
• When a remote control code is sent, the icon for the mode of the
device to which that code belongs flashes.
• The HOME button is used to return to the “AMP” mode when in
any mode other than “AMP” (“AMP”, “ZONE2”, “ZONE3”,
“ZONE4” or “SYSTEM CALL”).
117
1. CD player (CD), CD recorder (CDR) system buttons)
6, 7
2
1
8, 9
3
0 ~ 9, +10
: Manual search (forward and
reverse)
: Stop
: Play
: Auto search (to beginning of
track)
: Pause
: Number
Default setting = CD
The preset codes of a CDR can be recorded in the CD mode so
that the CD recorder can be operated.
It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the CD or
CDR.
To operate a DENON CDR player, preset “30626” or “31868”. To
return to operation of a DENON CD player, preset “31867”.
3. Tuner system buttons
•, ª
BAND
MODE
MEMO
SFT
CH +, –
1~8
118
: Tuning up/down
: Switch between AM and FM
bands
: Switch between AUTO and
MANUAL
: Preset memory
: Switching the memory block
: Preset channel up/down
: Preset channel
2. Tape deck (TAPE) system buttons
6, 7
2
1
8, 9
3
0 ~ 9, +10
: Manual search (forward and
reverse)
: Stop
: Play
: Auto search (to beginning of
track)
: Pause
: Number
Default setting = VCR (See page 121)
The preset codes of a TAPE can be recorded in the VCR mode so
that the tape deck can be operated.
It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the VCR or
TAPE.
To operate a DENON TAPE, preset “21471”.
Preset memory
The included remote control unit (RC-1036) can be used to operate devices of different brands by registering the preset number corresponding to
the brand of your device.
For some models the remote control unit or the device may not operate properly. In this case, use the learning function (See page 122) to store
your device’s remote control signals in the included remote control unit.
1
Press the mode selector button
for the component you want to
preset.
IR segment
Presetting is not possible for
the AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3,
ZONE4, SYSTEM CALL and
TUNER modes.
2
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at
least three seconds.
• The top IR segment blinks twice.
3
Referring to the included List of Preset Codes (See page 198 ~
233), press the NUMBER button to input the preset code (a 5digit number) for the manufacturer of the component whose
signals you want to store in the memory.
• The top IR segment blinks once after each button press.
• If the remote recognizes the manufacturer’s code, the IR
segment blinks twice.
1
You have 10 seconds to press each digit. If it takes longer
than that, the remote “times out” and you must begin
again.
3
2
The preset codes are as follows upon shipment from the factory and
after resetting:
• TV, VCR .........................................................................HITACHI
• CD, DVD........................................................................DENON
• SAT ................................................................................RCA
DVD preset codes
41470 (default)
DENON Model No.
NOTES:
• Depending on the model and year of manufacture, this function
cannot be used for some models, even if the your device is listed
on the included list of preset codes.
• Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote control
code. Refer to the included list of preset codes to change the
number and check it out.
DVD-550
DVD-700
DVD-900
DVD-1000
DVD-1400
DVD-1500
DVD-1710
DVD-1910
DVD-2200
DVD-2800
DVD-2800II
DVD-2900
DVD-2910
DVD-3800
DVD-3910
DVD-A11
DVD-A1
DVD-A1XV
40490
DVD-800
DVD-1600
DVD-2000
DVD-2500
DVD-3000
DVD-3300
119
Operating a component stored in the preset memory
1
Press the mode selector button for the component you want
to operate.
IR segment
1
2
Operate the component.
For details, refer to the component’s operating
instructions.
Some models cannot be operated with this remote control
unit.
1. DVD player (DVD), DVD recorder (DVDR) system buttons
SRC ON
SRC OFF
6, 7
2
1
8, 9
3
SETUP
MENU
•, ª, 0, 1
ENTER
DISP
CH +, –
0 ~ 9, +10
: Power on
: Power off
: Manual search
(forward and reverse)
: Stop
: Play
: Auto search
(to beginning of track)
: Pause
: Setup
: Menu
: Cursor up, down, left and right
: Enter
: Display
: Switch channels +, –
: Number
Default setting = DVD
The preset codes of a DVDR can be recorded in the DVD mode so
that the DVD recorder can be operated. (See page 119)
It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the DVD or
DVDR.
NOTE:
• For the DVD player remote control buttons, function names may
differ according to manufacturer. Compare with the remote
control operation of the various components.
2. Satellite (SAT) tuner, cable (CABLE) system buttons
SRC ON
SRC OFF
SETUP
DISP
MENU
•, ª, 0, 1
ENTER
CH +, –
0 ~ 9, +10
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Power on
Power off
Setup
Guide
Menu
Cursor up, down, left and right
Enter
Switch channels +, –
Number
When there are codes usable for the preset device, those codes
are sent when the buttons below are pressed. If not, by default the
DVD codes are punched through. If the punch through setting is
made after the preset memory is set, the codes are sent with
priority.
6, 7
2
1
8, 9
3
:
:
:
:
:
Manual search (forward and reverse)
Stop
Play
Auto search (cue)
Pause
Default setting = SAT
The preset codes of a CABLE can be recorded in the SAT/CBL mode
so that the cable device can be operated. (See page 119)
It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the SAT or
CBL.
120
3. Video deck (VCR) system buttons
SRC ON
SRC OFF
6, 7
:
:
:
2
:
1
:
8, 9 :
3
:
SETUP
:
MENU
:
•, ª, 0, 1 :
ENTER
:
DISP
:
CH +, –
:
0 ~ 9, +10 :
Power on
Power off
Manual search (forward and reverse)
Stop
Play
Auto search (to beginning of track)
Pause
Setup
Menu
Cursor up, down, left and right
Enter
Guide
Switch channels +, –
Number
4. Monitor TV (TV), system buttons
SRC ON
SRC OFF
SETUP
MENU
•, ª, 0, 1
ENTER
DISP
CH +, –
0 ~ 9, +10
TV/VCR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Power on
Power off
Setup
Menu
Cursor up, down, left and right
Enter
Guide
Switch channels +, –
Number
Switch between TV and video player
When there are codes usable for the preset device, those codes
are sent when the buttons below are pressed. If not, by default the
DVD codes are punched through. If the punch through setting is
made after the preset memory is set, the codes are sent with
priority.
6, 7
2
1
8, 9
3
:
:
:
:
:
Manual search (forward and reverse)
Stop
Play
Auto search (cue)
Pause
121
Learning function
If an AV component is not a DENON product, or if it cannot be operated via codes provided in the AVC-A1XVA remote control's internal preset
memory, or if its codes cannot be successfully learned by the AVC-A1XVA remote control, then you should use the remote control that was
supplied with that AV component to operate the component.
1
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at
least three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the “9, 7, 5” button (9
→ 7 → 5) to select Learning
setup.
• The IR segment blinks
twice, indicating the remote
is in Learning set up mode.
3
Press the mode selector button
for the component you want to
learned.
IR segment
3
Learning is not possible for the
AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3 ZONE4
and SYSTEM CALL modes.
4
Press the button that you wish to be learned.
• The display will go off and the unit will enter the learning
standby mode.
If a button that cannot be “learned” is pressed, the IR
segment lights and the learning setup mode is cancelled.
The HOME button cannot be “learned”.
5
2
1, 6
Point the remote control units directly at each other and press
and hold in the button on the other remote control unit which
you want to “learn”.
• The display turns on again and the IR segment blinks twice
to indicate that the code is successfully captured.
Other remote
control unit
6
Other buttons can be “learned” by repeating steps 4 and
5.
The mode can be switched by pressing a mode selector
button.
If the IR segment displays one long flash, a leaning error
has occurred. Try repeating this step again until a
successful capture occurs.
122
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at
least three seconds to exit programming.
NOTES:
• To cancel the learning setup mode, press the RC SETUP button
for at least three seconds.
• Do not try to learn anything to the RC SETUP button.
System call
The accessories remote control unit is equipped with “system call” function allowing a series of remote control signals to be transmitted by
pressing a single button.
This function can be used for example to turn on the amplifier’s power, select the input source, turn on the monitor or TV’s power, turn on the
source component’s power and set the source to the play mode, all at the touch of a single button.
(1) System call buttons
Up to 32 signals each can be stored at
the SYSTEM CALL 1 ~ 3 buttons.
The System Call function can be used
in the SYSTEM CALL mode.
IR segment
4
3
(2) Storing system call signals
1
Press and hole the RC SETUP button for at
least three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the “9, 7, 8” button (9
→ 7 → 8) to select system
call setting.
• The IR segment blinks
twice.
3
Press the SYSTEM CALL button
(1 to 3) you want to register the
system call.
4
Press the button you want to register.
• The IR segment blinks once after each button press.
The mode can be switched by pressing a mode selector
button.
5
2
1, 6
NOTE:
• The remote control signals of the buttons pressed while
registering the system call signals are emitted, so be careful not
to operate the components accidentally (cover the remote
sensors, for example).
Repeat steps 4 to register the desired buttons.
Up to 32 signals each can be stored at the SYSTEM CALL
1 ~ 3.
6
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at
least three seconds to register the system
call.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
123
(3) Using the system call function
1
Press the AMP button to select SYSTEM
CALL mode.
2
Press the SYSTEM CALL button
(1 to 3) at which the system call
signals have been stored.
• The
stored
signals
are
transmitted successively.
1
2
Punch Through
Buttons used in the CD, DVD, and VCR modes can be assigned to the
buttons which are not normally used in the TV and SAT/CBL modes.
For example, when the DVD mode is set to the punch through mode
in the TV mode, the DVD mode’s PLAY (1), STOP (2), MANUAL
SEARCH (6, 7), AUTO SEARCH (8, 9) and PAUSE (3)
button’s signals are sent in the TV mode. — ( )
1
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at
least three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the “9, 8, 4” button (9
→ 8 → 4) to select punch
through setting.
• The IR segment blinks
twice.
3
Select the mode selector button
(CD, DVD or VCR) you want to
punch through.
IR segment
3, 6
2
4
5
124
Press the button you want to punch
through (1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9 or
3).
1, 7
6
Press the mode selector button
(TV or SAT/CBL) for which you
want to set the punch through.
7
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at
least three seconds to register the system
call.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
Repeat step 4.
Setting the back light’s lighting time
1
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at
least three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the “9, 7, 3” button (9
→ 7 → 3) to select punch
through setting.
• The IR segment blinks
twice.
3
Press the NUMBER button (1
to 5) you want to adjust the
lighting time (5 sec ~ 25 sec).
• Lighting time
1: 5 sec
2: 10 sec (factory default)
3: 15 sec
4: 20 sec
5: 25 sec
2, 3
1
Setting the brightness
• The brightness of the display can be adjusted in 5 levels.
• The default brightness setting is level 3 (level 5 = brightest).
1
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at
least three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2-1
For 1 brightness step increase:
Press the CHANNEL + button.
2-1, 2-2
2-2
For 1 brightness step decrease:
Press the CHANNEL – button.
1, 3
3
Press and hold the RC SETUP button to exit
programing.
• The IR segment twice as confirmation.
125
Resetting
(1) Resetting the single learned button
1
IR segment
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at
least three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
3
2
Press the “9, 7, 6” button (9
→ 7 → 6).
• The IR segment blinks
twice.
3
Press the mode selector button.
4
Press the learned button you want to reset twice.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
Other key can be deleted by repeating steps 1 to 4.
2
1
(2) Resetting all learned buttons
1
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three
seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
3
Press the 9, 7, 6 button (9 → 7 → 6).
• The IR segment blinks twice.
Press the mode selector button you want to reset twice.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
(3) Resetting the system call buttons
1
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three
seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
3
4
Press the 9, 7, 8 button (9 → 7 → 8).
• The IR segment blinks twice.
(4) Resetting the punch through setting
1
2
Press the mode selector button (TV or SAT / CBL) you want to
reset.
3
4
Press the 9, 8, 4 button (9 → 8 → 4).
• The IR segment blinks twice.
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three
seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three
seconds to reset the punch through setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
Press the SYSTEM CALL button (1 to 3) you want to reset.
(5) All reset function
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three
seconds to clear the system call.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
1
Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three
seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 8, 1 button (9 → 8 → 1).
• The IR segment blinks four times.
• Clear the entire system memory, which will restore the
remote control unit to the factory default settings.
Only use this if you wish to clear all customized settings
and memories and restore the unit to its out-of-the-box
factory default settings.
126
9 OPERATION
Operating the Remote control unit
The RC-1036 remote control has a backlit EL display whose contents
change according to the mode or function selected, with the
appropriate remote commands for that mode or function.
2 ZONE3 mode
To operate the ZONE3 function.
2 Operate the this unit
The AMP button is the main mode for controlling the AVC-A1XVA in
the main room (MAIN ZONE).
The function switches as shown below each time one of the AMP
button is pressed.
AMP
ZONE 2
SYSTEM CALL
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
2 ZONE4 mode
To operate the ZONE4 function.
The EL display switches as shown below with respect to the
selected mode.
2 AMP mode
To operate the MAIN ZONE function.
2 SYSTEM CALL mode
To operate the “System call” function.
2 ZONE2 mode
To operate the ZONE2 function.
NOTE:
• This function provides the ability to program a series of individual
remote control codes into a macro stored under one of the
number pad’s numeric choices (See pages 123, 124).
127
Before operating
1
2
Refer to “CONNECTIONS” (See pages 10 ~ 23) and check
that all connections are correct.
Press the POWER switch.
(Main unit)
• ¢ ON
The power turns on and the power indicator lights.
Set the power switch to this position to turn the power on
and off from the included Remote control unit.
• £ OFF
The power turns off and indicator is off.
In this position, the power cannot be turned on and off
from the Remote control unit.
3
4
Turn on the power
Press the POWER ON/STANDBY button.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
• When pressed, the power turns on and the display lights.
The sound is muted for several seconds, after which the
unit operates normally.
• When pressed again, the power turns off, the standby
mode is set and the display turns off.
• Whenever the ON/STANDBY button is in the STANDBY
state, the apparatus is still connected to the AC line
voltage. Please be sure to turn off the power switch or
unplug the cord when you leave home for, say, a vacation.
4
Select “AMP” using the AMP button.
(only when operating with the Remote
control unit)
(Remote control unit)
128
3 2
3
Playing the input source
1 1
5
2
3
2
3
1
Select the input source to be played.
Example: CD
5
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
When the input source is selected the
input indicator lights.
CD
Light
1
To select the input source when ZONE2
SELECT or ZONE3/4/REC SELECT is
selected, press the SOURCE button
then operate the input function selector.
(Main unit)
2
Select the input mode.
• Selecting the AUTO, PCM and DTS modes
The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT
MODE button is pressed.
When operating the main unit:
The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT
MODE button on the main unit is pressed:
AUTO
PCM
DTS
When operating the remote control unit:
The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT
MODE button on the remote control unit is pressed:
AUTO
EXT.IN -2
(Main unit)
PCM
EXT.IN -1
DTS
ANALOG
(Remote control unit)
• Selecting the analog mode
Press the ANALOG button on the main unit or INPUT
MODE button on the remote control unit to switch to the
analog input.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Input mode selection function
Different input modes can be selected for the different input sources.
The selected input modes for the separate input sources are stored in
the memory.
q AUTO (All auto mode)
In this mode, the types of signals being input to the digital and
analog input jacks for the selected input source are detected and
the program in the AVC-A1XVA’s surround decoder is selected
automatically upon playback. This mode can be selected for all
input sources other than PHONO.
The presence or absence of digital signals is detected, the signals
input to the digital input jacks are identified and decoding and
playback are performed automatically in DTS, Dolby Digital or PCM
(2 channel stereo) format. If no digital signal is being input, the
analog input jacks are selected.
Use this mode to play Dolby Digital signals.
w PCM (exclusive PCM signal playback mode)
Decoding and playback are only performed when PCM signals are
being input.
Note that noise may be generated when using this mode to play
signals other than PCM signals.
e DTS (exclusive DTS signal playback mode)
Decoding and playback are only performed when DTS signals are
being input.
r ANALOG (exclusive analog audio signal playback mode)
The signals input to the analog input jacks are decoded and played.
t EXT. IN (external decoder input jack selection mode)
The signals being input to the external decoder input jacks are
played. (See page 131)
129
• Selecting the external input (EXT. IN) mode
Press the EXT. IN on the main unit or INPUT MODE button
on the remote control unit button to switch the external
input.
Input mode display
Depending on the input signal.
• In the AUTO mode
• In the DIGITAL PCM mode
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
• In the DIGITAL DTS mode
Note on playing a source encoded with DTS
• Noise may be generated at the beginning of playback and
while searching during DTS playback in the AUTO mode. If
so, play in the DTS mode.
3
Select the play mode.
• In the ANALOG mode
• In the EXT.IN mode
Example: Stereo
Input signal display
• DOLBY DIGITAL
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
The mode switches as shown below each time the
DIRECT/STEREO button on the Main unit is pressed.
DIRECT
4
STEREO
• DTS
Start playback on the selected component.
• For operating instructions, refer to the component’s
manual.
• PCM
5
Adjust the volume.
Depending on the input signal.
• The DSD indicator lights when the DENON LINK
have been connected and the DSD signals have
been inputted. (See page 20)
Depending on the input signal.
• The HDCD indicator lights when digital signals are
being input with a player that supports HDCD
playback.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
M.VOL. -80.0dB
The volume level is displayed on the master volume level display.
The volume can be adjusted within the range of –80 to +18 dB, in
steps of 0.5 dB. However, when the channel level is set as
described on pages 53, 54 or 137, 138, if the volume for any
channel is set at +0.5 dB or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted
up to 18 dB. (In this case the maximum volume adjustment range
is “18 dB — (Maximum value of channel level)”.)
Input mode when playing DTS sources
• Noise will be output if DTS-compatible CDs or LDs are played in the
“ANALOG” or “PCM” mode.
When playing DTS-compatible sources, be sure to connect the
source component to the digital input jacks (OPTICAL/COAXIAL)
and set the input mode to “DTS”.
130
The DIG. indicator lights when digital signals are being input
properly. If the DIG. indicator does not light, check whether the
digital input component setup (See pages 60, 61) and connections
are correct and whether the component’s power is turned on.
AL24 processing is activated when PCM signals are played while
the surround mode is set to PURE DIRECT, DIRECT, STEREO,
MULTI CH PURE DIRECT, MULTI CH DIRECT or MULTI CH IN.
Advanced AL24 processing is activated when PCM (2-channel)
signals are played while the surround mode is set to PURE DIRECT
or DIRECT.
NOTE:
• The DIG. indicator will light when playing CD-ROMs
containing data other than audio signals, but no sound will be
heard.
Playback using the external input (EXT. IN) jacks
1
Set the external input (EXT. IN) mode.
Press the EXT. IN button on the main unit or INPUT
MODE button on the remote control unit to switch
the external input.
The playback switches as shown below
each time the button is pressed.
EXT. IN-1
2
1
(Main unit)
EXT. IN-2
• EXT. IN-1
Once this is selected, the input signals connected to the FRONT-L,
FRONT-R, CENTER, SURR.-L A/B (surround left A/B), SURR.-R A/B
(surround right A/B) SB-L (surround back left) and SB-R (surround back
right) channels of the EXT. IN jacks are output directly to the front (left
and right), center, surround A/B (left and right A/B) and surround back (left
1,
and right) speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks.
In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer) jack is output to the
PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack.
• EXT. IN-2
Once this is selected, the input signals connected to the FRONT-L, FRONT-R, CENTER,
SURR.-L (surround left) and SURR.-R (surround right) channels of the EXT. IN jacks are
output directly to the front (left and right), center and surround (left and right) speaker
systems as well as the pre-out jacks.
In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer) jack is output to the PRE OUT SW
(subwoofer) jack.
2
Playback using the external input jacks (EXT.IN-1 and EXT.IN-2)
q When the “ANALOG” mode is selected at “3-2. EXT.IN Setup” at the System Setup:
The surround playback mode button does not function.
w When the “DSP” mode is selected at “3-2. EXT.IN Setup” at the System Setup: The
surround playback mode button functions.
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button to display the surround parameters screen.
Select the parameter (Cursor up/down) and select the setting value (Cursor left/right).
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete.
• Input CH parameter
2 CH:
Select when the input source being played is a 2-channel source.
MULTI CH: Select when the input source being played is a multi-channel source.
2
Cancelling the external input mode
To cancel the external input (EXT. IN) setting, press the INPUT MODE or ANALOG button on the
main unit or INPUT MODE button on the remote control unit to switch to the desired input
mode.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
• When the input mode is set to EXT. IN (1 or 2), playback in the DIRECT, STEREO, DOLBY/DTS SURROUND, HOME THX CINEMA, WIDE
SCREEN, 9CH STEREO and DSP SIMULATION modes is only possible when DSP MODE is selected for EXT.IN Setup at System Setup.
• When the DIRECT button is pressed while the input channel parameter is set to “MULTI CH”, the MULTI CH DIRECT mode is set. When the
STANDARD button is pressed, the MULTI CH IN mode is set. (See page 193)
• To lower the subwoofer channel level in the EXT. IN mode, press SURROUND PARAMETER and select “SW. ATT”.
For some players the playback level of the SW channel may seen strong. If so, set to “ON”.
NOTES:
• In play modes other than the external input mode, the signals connected to these jacks cannot be played. In addition, signals cannot be
output from channels not connected to the input jacks.
• The external input mode can be set for any input source. To watch video while listening to sound, select the input source to which the
video signal is connected, then set this mode.
131
2 Playback using the DENON LINK connector
Digital transfer and multi-channel playback of DVD-Audio discs and other multi-channel sources is possible by connecting the AVC-A1XVA to a
Denon DVD player equipped with a DENON Link connector using the connection cable included with the DVD player.
With discs on which special copyright protection measures have been taken, however, the digital signals may not be output from the DVD
player. In this case, connect the DVD player’s analog multi-channel output to the AVC-A1XVA’s EXT. IN-1 or EXT. IN-2 terminals for playback.
Also refer to your DVD player’s operating instructions.
Playing audio sources (CDs and DVDs)
The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with three 2-channel playback modes exclusively for music.
Select the mode to suit your tastes.
1
PURE DIRECT mode
In this mode, the music is played with an extremely high level
of sound quality.
When this mode is set, all the video-related circuits are turned
off so that music signals can be reproduced with high quality.
When an analog mode is selected, the digital processing
circuitry is also turned off to achieve analog sound with even
higher purity. (See NOTES page 132)
1
2,3
4
(Main unit)
2
(Remote control unit)
DIRECT mode
Use this mode to achieve good quality 2-channel sound while
watching images. In this mode, the audio signals bypass such
circuits as the tone circuit and are transmitted directly,
resulting in good quality sound.
2, 3
1
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
• The mode switches as shown below each time the
DIRECT/STEREO button on the Main unit is pressed.
DIRECT
STEREO
When press SURROUND PARAMETER:
The subwoofer output can be controlled directly.
3
STEREO mode
Use this mode to adjust the tone and achieve the desired
sound while watching images.
(Main unit)
4
(Remote control unit)
VIDEO ON/OFF button
When no video signals of a DVD, etc., are connected to the
AVC-A1XVA and the DVD, etc., are connected directly to a TV,
etc., the unneeded video circuitry can be turned off by
selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting.
(Main unit)
132
NOTES:
• The system setup function cannot be used when the PURE
DIRECT mode is set. To use the system setup function, cancel
the PURE DIRECT mode.
• If the HDMI input terminal is selected, video outputs are
outputted in the PURE DIRECT mode.
• The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT
mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode.
After starting playback
[1] Setting the Room EQ
1
1
The Room EQ switches as follows each time the ROOM EQ button is
pressed.
(Main unit)
OFF
(Remote control unit)
Audyssey
Front
Flat
Manual
1
See page 43 for descriptions of the correction curves for the “Room
EQ” function.
When “Audyssey” is selected, the MultEQ XT indicator lights green. If
“Front” or “Flat” is selected, the MultEQ XT indicator lights red.
The MultEQ XT indicator also lights red if the “Speaker Configuration”,
“Delay Time”, “Channel Level” or “Crossover Frequency” is set
manually after conducting the Auto Setup procedure.
[2] Listening over headphone
1
Plug the headphone’ plug into the jack.
PHONES
Connect the headphone to the PHONES jack.
The pre-out output (including the speaker output)
is automatically turned off when headphones are
connected.
1
1
NOTE:
• To prevent hearing loss, be careful not to raise the volume level
excessively when using headphones.
[3] Turning the sound off temporarily (MUTING)
1
Use this to mute the audio output temporarily.
Press the MUTE button.
Muting level is the same level as set with “7-3.
Volume Control” (See page 105).
(Remote control unit)
Cancelling MUTING mode.
Press the MUTING button again, or press the volume up or down
buttons on the Remote control, or adjust the volume up or down via the
front panel volume control knob.
1
[4] Combining the currently playing sound with the desired image (VIDEO SELECT)
1
Press the Remote control unit or Main unit’s VIDEO SELECT button until
the desired image appears.
The video source selected with the video select function is stored in the
memory for the different input sources.
1
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
1
DVD
VIDEO
SOURCE
Cancelling simulcast playback.
• Select “SOURCE” using the VIDEO SELECT button.
133
[5] Checking the currently playing program source, etc.
1
q On screen display
Each time an operation is performed,
a description of that operation
appears on the display connected to
AVC-A1XVA’s VIDEO MONITOR OUT
(Remote control unit)
jack. Also, the unit’s operating status
can be checked during playback by
pressing the Remote control unit’s
ON SCREEN button.
Such information as the position of the input selector and
the surround parameter settings is output in sequence.
w Front panel display
Descriptions of the unit’s operations
are also displayed on the front panel
display. In addition, the display can
be switched to check the unit’s
operating status while playing a
source by pressing the STATUS
button.
e Using the dimmer function
Use this to change the brightness of
the display.
The display brightness changes in
four steps (bright, medium, dim and
off) by pressing the Main unit’s
DIMMER button repeatedly.
1-w
1-e
(Main unit)
1-q
(Main unit)
[6] Switching the surround speakers
1
1
The surround speakers switch as shown below each time the
SPEAKER button is pressed.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
SURROUND A
SURROUND B
1
SURROUND A+B
This operation is possible when the setting for using both
surround speakers A and B is made at “2-1. Speaker
Configuration” (See pages 49, 50).
[7] Switching between HDMI and DVI monitor output
1
The monitor out terminal switch as shown below each time
the MONITOR SELECT button is pressed.
HDMI
DVI
1
(Main unit)
This operation is possible when the HDMI or DVI input
terminal is assigned to be input source at “4-1. HDMI / DVI
In Assignment” (See pages 69, 70).
134
[8] Selection of resolution setting (SCALE)
1
The resolution switches as follows each time the SCALE
button is pressed.
1
(Main unit)
When “HDMI” is selected for the “Scaler” setting:
480p/576p
1080i
Through
720p
1080p
When “Component” is selected for the “Scaler” setting:
480p/576p
1080i
720p
Through
When the SCALE button is pressed, the current setting is
shown on the display. If the SCALE button is pressed
while the current setting is displayed, the “Resolution”
setting can be changed.
See pages 73, 74 for descriptions of the different
resolution settings.
Multi-source recording/playback
[1] Playing one source while recording another (REC OUT mode)
1
Press the ZONE3/4/REC SELECT button
until “ZONE3 SOURCE” appears on the
display.
2,4 1
(Main unit)
2
3
4
With “ZONE3 SOURCE”displayed, turn
the FUNCTION knob until “RECOUT
SOURCE” appears on the display.
With “RECOUT SOURCE” displayed,
turn the FUNCTION knob to select the
source you wish to record.
• The “REC” indicator lights.
(Main unit)
Set the recording mode.
• For operating instructions, refer to the manual of the
component on which you want to record.
DVD
RECOUT
SOURCE
To cancel, turn the function knob and
select “SOURCE”.
(Main unit)
NOTES:
• Recording sources other than digital inputs selected in the REC
OUT mode are also output to the ZONE3 audio output jacks.
• When the REC OUT mode is selected, the ZONE3 button on the
Remote control unit cannot be operated.
135
[2] Recording Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel sources
• With this set it is possible to record Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel signals converted into 2-channel analog signals.
• The recording signals are output to the TAPE and VCR output terminals.
• Down-mixed analog signals converted into digital signals are output from the OPTICAL 3, 4 and 5 digital output terminals at this time.
1
Press the ZONE3/4/REC SELECT button until “RECOUT
✽✽✽✽” (ZONE3 ✽✽✽✽) appears on the display. Then select
“RECOUT SOURCE”.
(Main unit)
2
1
1
(Main unit)
Set the input mode according to the source to be played.
3
(Main unit)
3
2
(Remote control unit)
Set the surround mode by pressing the DIRECT/STEREO
button.
• The multichannel digital signals are down-mixed and output
to the TAPE and VCR output terminals.
2
(Main unit)
4
(Remote control unit)
Set the recording mode.
3
This function does not work when “5.2 ch / 5.3 ch” is set for the
MAIN ZONE’s channel setup.
[3] Dolby Headphone recording
• When RECOUT mode is set to “source”, with the AVC-A1XVA it is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode from
the recording output terminal and record them on a separate recorder.
1
The Dolby Headphone play mode is set when headphones are
connected to the PHONES jack during playback in the
DOLBY/DTS surround mode.
2
When this is done, signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone
mode are automatically output from the recording output
terminals (analog and digital) and can be recorded.
3
Select the parameters and set the desired mode, then record.
(Refer to the ⁄0 SURROUND “Dolby Headphone” pages 149,
150.)
136
1
NOTE:
Do not disconnect the headphones during recording.
10 SURROUND
Adjustment steps that need to be performed prior to surround sound playback
If the Auto Setup procedure has not been performed or the channel level has not been adjusted at the System Setup Menu, the settings below
cannot be made.
[1] Test Tone
• Before playing with the surround function, be sure to use the test tones to adjust the playback level from the different speakers. This
adjustment can be performed with the system setup (See pages 53, 54) or from the Remote control unit, as described below.
• Adjusting with the Remote control unit using the test tones is only possible in the “Auto” mode and only effective in the STANDARD
(DOLBY/DTS SURROUND) and HOME THX CINEMA modes. The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the
memory.
1
Press the TEST TONE button.
(Remote control unit)
1, 3
2
Test tones are output from the different speakers.
Use the cursor left and right button to adjust the
channel level so that the volume of the test tones is
the same for all the speakers.
2
(Remote control unit)
3
After completing the adjustment, press the TEST
TONE button again.
(Remote control unit)
[2] Channel Level
• After adjusting using the test tones, adjust the channel levels either according to the playback sources or to suit your tastes, as described
below.
1
Press the ENTER button on the Main unit or Remote
control unit. The screen below appears.
2,3
1,2
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Channels which is not used are not displayed.
2
Select the speaker level you want to adjust.
• When pressing the ENTER button, the channel switches as shown below
each time the ENTER button is pressed.
FL
C
FADER
or
(Main unit)
SW
FR
SLA
SLB
SRA
SBL
SRB
SBR
1, 2
2, 3
or
(Remote control unit)
137
3
Ajust the level of the selected speaker.
• The adjustment range for the different channels is +12 dB to –12 dB in step of 0.5 dB.
• The sound from the subwoofer can be completely cut by lowering the SW (subwoofer) setting
one additional from –12 dB (setting it to “OFF”).
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” for “2-1. Speaker Configuration” (See pages 49, 50), this is set to “SB”.
Fader function
• This function makes it possible to lower the volume of the front channels (FL, C and FR) or the rear channels (SL, SR, SBL and SBR) together.
Use it for example to adjust the balance of the sound from each position when multi-channel music sources are played.
1
Press the ENTER button then select “Fader”.
• When pressing the ENTER button, the channel switches in the order
shown below each time the ENTER button is pressed.
FL
FADER
C
SW
FR
SLA
SLB
SRA
SBL
1
SRB
SBR
1,2
or
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
or
(Remote control unit) (Remote control unit) (Remote control unit)
When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” for “2-1.
Speaker Configuration” (See pages 49, 50), this is set to “SB”.
2
Press the cursor left button to reduce the volume of the front channels, the
cursor right button to reduce the volume of the rear channels.
The fader function does not affect the subwoofer channel.
(Main unit)
Example: When “FRONT” is selected
(Remote control unit)
The channel whose channel level is adjusted lowest can be faded to –12 dB
using the fader function.
If the channel levels are adjusted separately after adjusting the fader, the fader
adjustment values are cleared, so adjust the fader again.
138
1
1, 2
Playing modes for different sources
The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with many surround modes. We recommend using the surround modes as described below in order to achieve the
maximum effect for the specific signal source.
is a 6.1-channel/7.1-channel surround mode.
Sources recorded in
THX SURROUND EX
• Maximum performance for playing movies on the AVC-A1XVA.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
DOLBY DIGITAL EX, +PLIIx*2
• This mode is optimized for playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital Surround EX.
Sources recorded in DTS-ES
DTS-ES DSCRT 6.1, MTRX 6.1, +PLIIx*2
• This is the optimum mode for playing sources recorded in DTS-ES.
ES DSCRT 6.1+THX, ES MTRX 6.1 +THX
• When playing movies, setting this mode sometimes results in a more
natural sound. Select the mode as desired.
NOTE:
• Surround modes indicated with an
asterisk (*1) require the use of two
surround back speakers.
Dolby Digital
or
DTS Surround
5.1 ch sources
2 ch sources recorded in
Dolby Surround
THX Ultra2 CINEMA*1, THX MUSIC MODE*1, THX Games Mode*1
• These modes are suited for playing 5.1-channel sources in 7.1 channels.
Select the desired surround mode for the movie and music sources.
WIDE SCREEN
• Effective for 2-channel sources recorded in Dolby Surround or for 7.1-channel
playback with 5.1-channel sources.
HOME THX CINEMA (THX 5.1)
• This mode is optimized for playing 5.1-channel movies.
• For sources recorded in Dolby Surround as well, this mode provides the
same power as with 5.1-channel sources.
DOLBY DIGITAL / DOLBY DIGITAL+PLIIx*2 / DTS SURROUND / DTS 96/24 / DTS+PLIIx*2 / DTS+NEO:6
• This mode is optimized for playing 5.1-channel or 7.1-channel music.
• For Dolby Surround recording sources, Dolby Pro LogicII playback is conducted.
Sources recorded in stereo
Sources recorded in monaural
PURE DIRECT
• By suspending all the video circuits, analog input music playback can be
played with optimum quality. (The video outputs do not operate.)
DIRECT / STEREO
• Effective for achieving pure playback
• If there is no need for tone control or distribution of the low frequencies in
function of the speaker configuration, select the DIRECT mode to achieve the
best sound quality.
NOTES:
• Surround modes marked with
stars (*2) cannot be used when
the surround back speaker is set
to “NONE”.
• The PLIIx Cinema mode cannot
be selected when only one
surround back speaker is being
used.
DENON Original Surround Modes (see page 151)
• Select these for 7.1-channel playback with sources recorded in stereo or
monaural.
• The effects are different for each of the surround modes.
Select the one most suited for the source being used.
DTS NEO:6
• This is a surround mode for playing 6.1- or 7.1-channel stereo sources
developed by Digital Theater Systems.
• One of two playing modes, MUSIC (for music sources) or CINEMA
(for movie sources), can be selected according to your preferences.
DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx*2
• Developed by Dolby Laboratories, this surround mode provides 7.1 channel
surround sound with conventional stereo (2-channel) sources.
• Select Cinema mode for movie surround soundtracks, Music for music
sources, and Game for 2-channel game box audio sources.
• Though we recommend selecting the surround mode as described above, other surround modes can also be selected.
139
THX Surround EX / Home THX Cinema mode
When the HOME THX CINEMA button is pressed, the surround mode is set as follows according to the signal that is played:
q THX Surround EX (THX Ultra2 Cinema)
w Home THX CINEMA
e THX 5.1
r ES DSCRT 6.1+THX, ES MTRX 6.1 +THX
When the HOME THX CINEMA mode is set when a DVD is played, check the DVD player’s digital output setting and change the setting to one
for which Dolby Digital and DTS bit stream signals can be output (“bit stream”, for example).
[1] Playing sources recorded in Dolby Surround in the Home THX
Cinema surround mode
1
1-q
4
q Select the input source.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
w Set the input mode to “AUTO”.
2 1-w 7
(Main unit)
2
5,7
(Remote control unit)
Select the Home THX Cinema mode.
6
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
Play a program source with the
mark.
• For operating instructions, refer to the manuals of the
respective components.
4
Adjust volume.
2
(Main unit)
5
1-w
(Remote control unit)
7
6
Display the Surround Parameter menu and set the parameters
according to the source.
5, 7
4
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
1-q
140
6
q Select the parameter.
(Main unit)
7
w Select the setting.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
or
or
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button
to complete the setting.
Surround parameters q
DECODER:
Select the decoder to be
PLIIx C ....The signals
PLII C ......The signals
PL ............The signals
NEO:6 C ..The signals
used when playing 2-channel sources in the Home THX Cinema mode.
are decoded in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Cinema mode before undergoing THX processing.
are decoded in the Dolby Pro Logic II Cinema mode before undergoing THX processing.
are decoded in the Dolby Pro Logic mode before undergoing THX processing.
are decoded in the NEO:6 Cinema mode before undergoing THX processing.
MODE/SB CH OUT:
Select the surround back channel playback method or mode.
ON...........This is the recommended play mode for using the surround back channel when DTS NEO:6 is selected.
OFF .........This is the recommended play mode when Dolby Pro Logic II is selected. The surround back channel is not played.
Checking the input signal
The input signal can be checked by pressing the Remote control unit’s ON
SCREEN button. (See page 134)
SIGNAL: Displays the type of signal (DTS, DOLBY DIGITAL, PCM, etc.).
(Remote control unit)
fs:
Displays the input signal’s sampling frequency.
FORMAT: Displays the input signal’s number of channels.
“Number of front channels/Number of surround channels/LFE on/off”
“SURROUND” is displayed for 2-channel signal sources recorded in Dolby Surround.
OFFSET: Displays the dialog normalization offset value. (See page 145)
FLAG:
Displays the special identification signal recorded in the input signal. (See page 142)
“MATRIX” is displayed if the input signal has undergone matrix processing,
“DISCRETE” is displayed if the input signal has undergone discrete processing.
Not displayed when no identification signal is recorded.
In addition, screen information is displayed in the following order when the ON SCREEN button is
pressed repeatedly:
OSD-1
OSD-2
OSD-3
OSD-4
OSD-5
OSD-6
OSD-7
NOTES:
OSD-4:
OSD-2:
Audio input signal
Video information
Input/output
Auto surround mode
USER MODE 1
USER MODE 2
USER MODE 3
This is displayed when the auto surround mode is set to “ON” (see page 80) and the input mode is set to “Auto”.
It is not displayed when the input mode is set to “Analog” or “EXT. IN-1,-2”.
This is not displayed on ZONE2 MONITOR OUT when ZONE2 ON SCREEN button is pressed.
141
[2] To play in the THX Surround EX/Home THX Cinema Surround mode for sources recorded in Dolby Digital or DTS
1
Select the program source.
2
3
Selecting a digital input source
Perform step 1 under “Dolby Digital mode and DTS
Surround” (See page 143).
2
Select the Home THX Cinema mode.
(Main unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
Play a program source with the
,
mark.
For operating instructions, refer to the manuals of the
respective components.
The channel status information during playback of Dolby
Digital and DTS sources can be checked using the STATUS
button on the Main unit.
Light
2
• The Dolby Digital indicator lights
when playing Dolby Digital sources.
Light
• The DTS indicator lights when playing
DTS sources.
Light
• Press the SURROUND BACK button.
Lights when the Surround Back CH is
on.
Light
(Main unit)
Surround parameters w
For instructions on setting the surround parameters, see page 140.
MODE/SB CH OUT:
Select the surround back channel playback method or mode.
(1) (Multi channel source)
THX Surround EX.....Dolby Digital signals are played in the THX Surround EX mode.
Ultra2 Cinema..........The signals are played in the THX Ultra2 Cinema mode.
Music Mode ............The signals are played in the THX Music mode.
Games Mode...........The signals are played in the THX Games mode.
NON MTRX..............The same signals as those of the surround channels are output from the surround back channels.
MTRX ON ................The surround channel signals undergo digital matrix processing and are output from the surround back channels.
SB OFF (OFF) ..........No signal is played from the surround back channels.
ES MTRX .................When playing DTS signals, the surround back signals undergo digital matrix processing for playback.
ES DSCRT................When a signal identifying the source as a discrete 6.1-channel source is included in the DTS signals, the surround
back signals included in the source are played.
PLIIx Cinema ...........Processing is performed with the Cinema mode of the PLIIx decoder and the Surround Back channel is reproduced.
PLIIx Music..............Processing is performed with the Music mode of the PLIIx decoder and the Surround Back channel is reproduced.
(2) (2ch source)
OFF ..........................Playback is conducted without using the surround back speaker.
ON ...........................Playback is conducted using the surround back speaker.
This operation can be performed directly using the SURROUND BACK button on the Main unit or Remote control unit.
AFDM (Auto Flag Detect Mode):
ON ........This function only works with software on which a special identification signal is recorded. This software is scheduled to go on
sale in the future.
This is a function for automatically playing in the 6.1-channel mode using the surround back speakers if the software is recorded
in THX Surround EX or DTS-ES or in the normal 5.1-channel mode without using the surround back speakers when the software
is not recorded in THX Surround EX or DTS-ES.
OFF.......Set the “OFF” mode to perform 6.1-channel playback with conventional 5.1-channel sources or sources on which the
identification signal described below is not recorded.
Some discs recorded in Dolby Digital EX do not include EX flag. If the playing mode does not switch automatically when the AFDM turns
“ON” during playback, manually set “SB CH OUT” to “PLIIx Cinema” or “MTRX ON”.
142
Dolby Digital mode (only with digital input) and DTS Surround (only with digital input)
1-q
2
1-w 6
4,6
3
5
1
Select the input source.
Playback with digital input
q Select an input source set to digital (COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
(see pages 60, 61).
1-w
2
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
w Set the input mode to “AUTO”.
(Main unit)
2
6
5
(Remote control unit)
Select the STANDARD (Dolby/DTS Surround) mode.
4, 6
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
1-q
3
Play a program source with the
Light
,
mark.
• The Dolby Digital indicator lights
when playing Dolby Digital sources.
Light
• The DTS indicator lights when playing
DTS sources.
Light
• Press the SURROUND BACK button.
Lights when the Surround Back CH is
on.
Light
(Main unit)
143
4
Display the Surround Parameter menu.
(Main unit)
5
(Remote control unit)
q Select the parameter.
(Main unit)
6
w Select the setting.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
or
or
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button
to complete the setting.
NOTE:
• When “Default” is selected and the cursor left button is pressed, “CINEMA EQ.” and “D.COMP.” are automatically turned off, “LFE” is
reset, and “Tone” is set to the default value.
Surround parameters e
CINEMA EQ. (Cinema Equalizer):
The Cinema EQ function gently decreases the level of the extreme high frequencies, compensating for overly-bright sounding motion
picture soundtracks. Select this function if the sound from the front speakers is too bright.
This function only works in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, DTS Surround, DTS NEO:6 and WIDE SCREEN modes.
D.COMP. (Dynamic Range Compression):
Motion picture soundtracks have tremendous dynamic range (the contrast between very soft and very loud sounds). For listening late at
night, or whenever the maximum sound level is lower than usual, the Dynamic Range Compression allows you to hear all of the sounds in
the soundtrack (but with reduced dynamic range). (This only works when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital or DTS.) Select
one of the four parameters (“OFF”, “LOW”, “MID” (middle) or “HI” (high)). Set to OFF for normal listening.
This parameter is displayed only when playing compatible sources in DTS mode.
LFE (Low Frequency Effect):
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effect) sounds included in the source when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital,
DTS, DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD.
Program source and adjustment range:
1. Dolby Digital: –10 dB to 0 dB
2. DTS Surround: –10 dB to 0 dB
When DTS encoded movie software is played, it is recommended that the LFE LEVEL be set to 0 dB for correct DTS playback.
When DTS encoded music software is played, it is recommended that the LFE LEVEL be set to -10 dB for correct DTS playback.
TONE:
This adjusts the tone control. (See pages 153, 154)
This can be set individually for the separate surround mode other than PURE DIRECT, DIRECT and Home THX Cinema mode.
144
2 Dialogue Normalization
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital, which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the
user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital programs. When playing back software which has been encoded in
Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a brief message in the front panel display which will read “Dial Norm X dB” (X being a numeric value).
The display is showing how the program level relates with THX calibration level. If you want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels,
you may wish to adjust the volume. For example, if you see the following message: “Dial Norm +4 dB” in the front panel display, to keep the
overall output level at THX calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume control by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where the playback
loudness is preset, you can choose your preferred volume setting for best enjoyment.
Display
Dial.Norm
Offset
-4dB
Night mode
When listening at night or at lower volumes, the night mode improves
listenability.
Press the NIGHT button on the remote control unit.
(Remote control unit)
Canceling Night mode:
Press the NIGHT button again.
NOTES:
• The Night mode only works when playing program sources
recorded in Dolby Digital.
• When the Night mode is set to “ON”, the “D.COMP” surround
parameter can not be selected.
NIGHT
145
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Pro Logic II) mode
To play in the PLIIx mode, set “Sp.Back” at the Speaker Configuration setting to “1spkr” or “2spkrs”.
To play in the PLIIx mode, set “Surround Back” at the Power Amp Assign setting.
1
6
3,6
The Dolby Surround Pro
Logic IIx Cinema or Music
mode can be chosen directly
by pressing the CINEMA or
MUSIC button on the
Remote control unit during
playback in the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx mode.
4,5
1
Select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx mode using the STANDARD
button.
(Main unit)
6
4, 5
(Remote control unit)
• The mode switches as shown below each time the
STANDARD button is pressed.
DOLBY PLIIx
Light
2
3
1
3, 6
DTS NEO:6
• The Dolby Pro Logic indicator lights.
Play a program source with the
mark.
• For operating instructions, refer to the manuals of the respective components.
Display the Surround Parameter menu.
(Main unit)
*Surr
MODE:
(Remote control unit)
4
Parameter
PL x C
Select the play mode.
NOTE:
• The PLIIx mode is set when the “SB CH OUT” surround parameter is set to “ON”, and
the PLII mode is set when this parameter is set to “OFF”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
• When the “SB CH OUT” parameter is set to “ON”.(Set “SP.Back” at the System Setup to “1spkr” or “2spkrs”).
Display
*Surr
MODE:
Parameter
PL x C
(Pro Logic IIx Cinema mode)
*Surr
MODE:
Parameter
PL x M
(Pro Logic IIx Music mode)
*Surr
MODE:
Parameter
PL x G
(Pro Logic IIx Game mode)
• When the “SB CH OUT” parameter is set to “OFF”.(Set “SP.Back” at the System Setup to “None”).
Display
*Surr
MODE:
Parameter
PL
C
(Pro Logic II Cinema mode)
146
*Surr
MODE:
Parameter
PL
M
(Pro Logic II Music mode)
*Surr
MODE:
Parameter
PL
G
(Pro Logic II Game mode)
*Surr
MODE:
Parameter
DOLBY PL
(Dolby Pro Logic mode)
5
q Select the various surround parameters.
(Main unit)
w Adjust the parameters setting.
(Remote control unit)
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
• DEFAULT setting
Select “Default Yes 0“, then parameters set to default setting.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Example: DOLBY PLIIx Music mode screen.
When set with the on screen display using the Remote control
unit while in the MUSIC mode, set the “ ” mark to “OPTION
0” using the cursor up and down buttons, then press the
cursor left button.
Press the ENTER button to return to the previous screen.
6
or
or
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button
to complete the setting.
Surround parameters r
Pro Logic IIx and Pro Logic II Mode:
• Select one of the modes (“Cinema”, “Music”, “Pro Logic”or “Game”).
• The Cinema mode is for use with stereo television shows and all programs encoded in Dolby Surround.
• The Music mode is recommended for stereo music and surround-encoded stereo music sources.
• The Pro Logic mode emulates Dolby Laboratories’ original Dolby Pro Logic surround decoding, and may provide better results with older,
legacy surround-encoded program material.
• The Game mode is optimized for computer and/or dedicated game box consoles, that feature stereo analog or digital outputs. It can only
be used with 2-channel stereo sources.
Panorama Control:
This mode extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting “wraparound” effect with side wall imaging.
Select “OFF” or “ON”.
Dimension Control:
This control gradually adjust the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear.
The control can be set in 7 steps from 0 to 6.
Center Width Control:
This control adjust the center image so it may be heard only from the center speaker; only from the left/right speakers as a phantom image;
or from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
The control can be set in 8 steps from 0 to 7.
147
DTS NEO:6 mode
• Surround playback can be performed for the analog input and digital input 2-channel signals.
1
6
3,6
4,5
1
Select the DTS NEO:6 mode.
(Main unit)
6
4, 5
(Remote control unit)
• The mode switches as shown below each time the
STANDARD button is pressed.
DOLBY PLIIx
Light
2
3
DTS NEO:6
• The DTS NEO:6 indicator lights.
Display the Surround Parameter menu.
(Remote control unit)
4
Select the play mode.
Display
*Surr
MODE:
(Main unit)
Parameter
Cinema
*Surr
MODE:
Parameter
Music
(Remote control unit)
q Select the various surround parameters.
(Main unit)
148
3, 6
Play a program source.
(Main unit)
5
1
The DTS NEO:6 Cinema or
Music mode can be chosen
directly by pressing the
CINEMA or MUSIC button
on the Remote control unit
during playback in the DTS
NEO:6 mode.
(Remote control unit)
w Adjust the parameters setting.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
6
or
or
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button
to complete the setting.
NOTE:
• When “Default” is selected and the cursor left button is pressed, “MODE” and “TONE” are automatically reset to the default values and
“CINEMA EQ” is set to “OFF”.
Surround parameters t
DTS NEO:6 Mode:
• Cinema
This mode is optimum for playing movies. Decoding is performed with emphasis on separation performance to achieve the same
atmosphere with 2-channel sources as with 6.1-channel sources.
This mode is effective for playing sources recorded in conventional surround formats as well, because the in-phase component is
assigned mainly to the center channel (C) and the reversed phase component to the surround (SL, SR and SB channels).
• Music
This mode is suited mainly for playing music. The front channel (FL and FR) signals bypass the decoder and are played directly so there
is no loss of sound quality, and the effect of the surround signals output from the center (C) and surround (SL, SR and SB) channels add
a natural sense of expansion to the sound field.
CENTER IMAGE (0.0 to 1.0: default 0.3):
The center image parameter for adjusting the expansion of the center channel in the DTS NEO:6 MUSIC mode has been added.
The Dolby Headphone
The Dolby Headphone mode is set when headphones are connected
to the PHONES jack while in the DOLBY/DTS SURROUND mode.
1
3
1,3
When the SURROUND PARAMETER button is pressed, the
parameter selection screen appears.
2
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
2
1, 3
2
q Select the parameters.
w Select the settings.
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
or
or
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to
complete the setting.
149
Parameters
MODE:
DH1 ...........Reference room (small room with weak reverberations)
DH2 ...........Live room (room with a bit stronger reverberations than DH1)
DH3 ...........Large room (larger room than DH1, offers a sense of distance and sound diffusion effects)
BYPASS .....Stereo sound.
DECODER:
Select this when playing analog, PCM or other 2-channel sources.
The signals are converted into multichannel signals using the decoders shown below and played in the Dolby Headphone mode.
PLII C.........Dolby Pro Logic II Cinema mode
PLII M........Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode
NEO:6 C.....DTS NEO:6 Cinema mode
NEO:6 M....DTS NEO:6 Music mode
OFF............The signals are played in the Dolby Headphone mode as such (2 channels).
– Recording –
When RECOUT mode is set to “SOURCE”, with this amplifier signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode can be output from the recording
output terminals and recorded on another recorder. (See page 136)
Memory and call-out functions (USER MODE function)
• The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a function for storing the selected input source, the auto surround mode and input mode in the memory and
selecting these settings when you want to use them.
• Three patterns of settings can be stored in the memory using the USER MODE 1, 2 and 3 buttons.
2 Storing the settings in the memory
2 Calling the settings out
2
1
2
1
1
The following are stored in the memory:
q Currently set input source
w Currently set auto surround mode
e Currently set input mode
2
Press and hold the USER MODE button at which you want to
store the settings.
In this case, press the button and hold it in until the LED of
the selected USER MODE button lights.
1
Press the USER MODE button at which the settings you
want to call out are stored.
• The LED for the selected USER MODE button lights.
• This LED turns off if you perform any operations that
change the settings stored at the USER MODE buttons.
Light
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
150
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
11 DENON ORIGINAL SURROUND MODES
• The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a high performance DSP (Digital Signal Processor) which uses digital signal processing to synthetically recreate
the sound field. One of ten preset surround modes can be selected according to the program source and the parameters can be adjusted
according to the conditions in the listening room to achieve a more realistic, powerful sound.
Surround modes and their features
1
WIDE SCREEN
Select this to achieve an atmosphere like that of a movie theater with a large screen. In this mode, all signal sources are played in
the 7.1-channel mode, including Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Digital 5.1-channel sources. Effects simulating the multi surround
speakers of movie theaters are added to the surround channels.
2
SUPER STADIUM
Select this when watching baseball or soccer programs to achieve a sound as if you were actually at the stadium. This mode
provides the longest reverberation signals.
3
ROCK ARENA
Use this mode to achieve the feeling of a live concert in an arena with reflected sounds coming from all directions.
4
JAZZ CLUB
This mode creates the sound field of a live house with a low ceiling and hard walls. This mode gives jazz a very vivid realism.
5
CLASSIC CONCERT
Select this for the sound of a concert hall rich in reverberations.
6
MONO MOVIE
(NOTE 1)
Select this when watching monaural movies for a greater sense of expansion.
7
VIDEO GAME
Use this to enjoy video game sources.
8
MATRIX
Select this to emphasize the sense of expansion for music sources recorded in stereo. Signals consisting of the difference
component of the input signals (the component that provides the sense of expansion) processed for delay are output from the
surround channel.
9
VIRTUAL
Select this mode to enjoy a virtual sound field, produced from the front 2-channel speakers.
This mode can be selected when surround playback is being performed in ZONE2.
10
9CH STEREO
The front left channel signals are output to the surround and surround back signal left channels, the front right channel signals are
output to the surround and surround back signal right channels, and the in-phase component of the left and right channels is output
to the center channel. Use this mode to enjoy stereo sound.
Depending on the program source being played, the effect may not be very noticeable.
In this case, try other surround modes, without worrying about their names, to create a sound field suited to your tastes.
(NOTE 1): When playing sources recorded in monaural, the sound will be one-sided if signals are only input to one channel (left or right), so input
signals to both channels. If you have a source component with only one audio output (monophonic camcorder, etc.) obtain a “Y” adaptor
cable to split the mono output to two outputs, and connect to the L and R inputs.
Personal Memory Plus
This set is equipped with a personal memorize function that automatically memorizes the surround modes and input modes selected for
the input different sources. When the input source is switched, the modes set for that source last time it was used are automatically
recalled.
The surround parameters, tone control settings and playback level balance for the different output channels are memorized for each
surround mode.
151
DSP surround simulation
1
Select the surround mode for each input channel.
1
(Main unit)
4
2,4
(Remote control unit)
The surround mode switches in the following order each time the DSP
SIMULATION button is pressed:
SUPER STADIUM
WIDE SCREEN
MATRIX
VIDEO GAME
ROCK ARENA
MONO MOVIE
3
JAZZ CLUB
CLASSIC CONCERT
The 9CH STEREO mode can be selected directly by pressing the 7CH
STEREO button on the remote control unit.
2
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.
Display the Surround Parameter menu.
The screen for the selected surround mode appears.
1
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
*Surr
ROOM:
3
4
3
Parameter
medium
q Select the various surround parameters.
(Main unit)
2, 4
(Remote control unit)
w Adjust the parameters setting.
(Main unit)
4
(Remote control unit)
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the
setting.
or
or
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit)
The “9CH STEREO” display changes as shown below according to the surround back speaker setting and the surround speaker setting.
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER
ON
OFF
152
SURROUND SPEAKER SETTING
DISPLAY
A+B
9 CH STEREO
A or B
7 CH STEREO
A+B
7 CH STEREO
A or B
5 CH STEREO
NOTES:
• The surround speaker setting can also be changed with the SPEAKER button on the Main unit or Remote control unit.
• When “Default” is selected and the cursor left button is pressed, “CINEMA EQ.” and “D.COMP.” are automatically turned off, “ROOM
SIZE” is set to “medium”, “EFFECT LEVEL” to “10”, “DELAY TIME” to “30ms” and “LFE” to “0dB”.
• The “ROOM SIZE” expresses the expansion effect for the different surround modes in terms of the size of the sound field, not the actual
size of the listening room.
• When playing PCM digital signals or analog signals in the DOLBY PRO LOGIC II, DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx, DTS NEO:6 modes and the
input signal switches to a digital signal encoded in Dolby Digital, the Dolby Surround mode switches automatically. When the input signal
switches to a DTS signal, the mode automatically switches to DTS surround.
Tone control setting
• Use the tone control setting to adjust the bass and treble as desired.
• The tone control function will not work in the PURE DIRECT, DIRECT or Home THX Cinema mode.
[1] Adjusting the tone using the Remote control unit
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.
Display the Surround Parameter menu.
The screen selected surround mode appears.
1
(Remote control unit)
*Surr
ROOM:
6, 7
2~5
Parameter
medium
2
1, 7
Select “TONE”.
*Surr
TONE
Parameter
(Remote control unit)
3
Switch to Tone Control screen.
*Tone Control
Tone Def.: ON
(Remote control unit)
4
Select Tone Defeat OFF.
*Tone Control
Tone Def.: OFF
(Remote control unit)
153
q Select Bass or Treble.
5
w Set the level.
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
6
Enter the setting.
The Surround Parameter menu screen re-appears.
(Remote control unit)
7
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting.
or
(Remote control unit)
[2] Adjusting the tone from the Main unit
2
13
2
1
The tone switches as follows each time the TONE CONTROL button is pressed.
BASS (ALL)
(Main unit)
2
TREBLE (ALL)
F-BASS (front)
F-TREBLE (front)
S B-TREBLE (surround B)
S B-BASS (surround B)
SB-BASS (surround back)
SB-TREBLE (surround back)
C-BASS (center)
SA-TREBLE (surround A)
C-TREBLE (center)
SA-BASS (surround A)
SW-BASS (subwoofer)
Select with the name of the volume to be adjusted and adjust the level.
• To increase the bass or treble:
The bass or treble sound can be increased to up to +6 dB in steps of 1 dB.
• To decrease the bass or treble:
The bass or treble sound can be decreased up to –6 dB in steps of 1 dB.
(Main unit)
If you do not want the bass and treble to be adjusted, turn on the tone defeat mode.
3
The signals do not pass through the bass and treble adjustment circuits, providing higher quality sound.
(Main unit)
154
Surround parameters y
EFFECT:
This parameter turns the effect signals with multi surround mode speaker effects on and off in the WIDE SCREEN mode. When this
parameter is turned off, the SBL and SBR channel signals are equivalent to the SL and SR channels, respectively.
LEVEL:
This parameter sets the strength of the effect signals in the WIDE SCREEN mode. It can be set in 15 steps, from “1” to “15”. Set this to
a low level if the positioning or phase of the surround signals sounds unnatural.
SB CH OUT:
“ON” ..................Playback is conducted using the surround back speaker.
“OFF”.................Playback is conducted without using the surround back speaker.
NOTE: This operation can be performed directly using the SURROUND BACK button on the Main unit’s panel.
ROOM SIZE:
This sets the size of the sound field.
There are five settings: “small”, “med.s” (medium-small), “medium”, “med.l” (medium-large) and “large”. “small” recreates a small sound
field, “large” a large sound field.
EFFECT LEVEL:
This sets the strength of the surround effect.
The level can be set in 15 steps from 1 to 15. Lower the level if the sound seems distorted.
DELAY TIME:
In the matrix mode only, the delay time can be set within the range of 0 to 300 ms.
12 USING THE NETWORK AUDIO FUNCTION
The AVC-A1XVA can be connected to a network by cable to listen to Internet radio or music files stored on computers.
Internet radio function
Internet radio refers to radio programs broadcast over the Internet.
There are many stations throughout the world broadcasting Internet radio programs. These stations are of all sizes and types, some run by
individuals, others by ground wave broadcast stations.
While ground wave radio stations can only be listened to within the range in which the waves reach, Internet radio can be listened to anywhere
in the world.
The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with the following Internet radio functions:
• Stations can be selected by genre and region.
• Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.
• MP3 format Internet radio programs can be listened to.
• Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing the exclusive DENON Internet radio URL using a computer’s browser. (The AV
amplifier automatically downloads the registration settings (approximately once every other day).) (This is managed separately for each unit, so
a MAC address or e-mail address must be registered.) (See page 115)
Exclusive URL : http://www.radiodenon.com (accessible after connection to an Internet radio station.)
2 vTuner
The AVC-A1XVA’s Internet radio station list uses “vTuner”, a radio station database service. This database service is edited and prepared for the
AVC-A1XVA.
Music server function
The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a network audio playback function allowing music files stored on a computer to be played via a LAN (Local Area
Network).
The AVC-A1XVA’s network audio playback function connects to servers using the following technologies:
• Windows Media Connect
• Windows Media DRM 10 (for network devices)
155
System requirements
The preparations described below must be made in order to use the Internet radio and music server functions.
2 Broadband Internet connection
A broadband connection to the Internet is necessary in order to use the AVC-A1XVA’s Internet radio function.
NOTE:
• You must have a contract with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) in order to connect to the Internet. For instructions on connecting
to the Internet, contact your ISP or a computer store.
If you already have a broadband Internet connection there is no need to take out another contract.
2 Modem
A modem is a device for exchanging signals over the Internet using a broadband connection. Some are integrated into routers. For instructions
on connecting to the Internet, contact your ISP or a computer store.
2 Router
A router is a device for connecting multiple pieces of equipment (computers, the AVC-A1XVA, etc.) to the Internet simultaneously.
When using the AVC-A1XVA, we recommend a router equipped with the following functions:
• Built-in DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server.
Function for automatically assigning the device’s IP address on the LAN.
• Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, it is recommended to have a built-in switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
NOTE:
• The type of router that can be used differs for different ISPs. For details, contact your ISP or a computer store.
2 Ethernet cable (CAT-5)
The AVC-A1XVA does not come with an Ethernet cable. Purchase one of the required length.
Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise. We recommend using a normal type cable.
If the sound skips, etc., try using a shielded type Ethernet cable. This could solve the problem.
2 Personal Computer
Install “Windows Media Connect” on your computer.
The required system for forming a music server is as described below.
1) OS (Operating System):
Windows® XP Service pack2
2) Processor:
Intel PentiumII or AMD processor, etc..
We recommend 1 GHz or greater.
3) RAM:
Min. 128 MB, we recommend 256 MB or greater.
4) Software:
.NET Framework 1.1
5) Internet browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later
Format
MP3 / WMA
WAV (LPCM)
Bit rate
Per one
minute
Per one hour
0128 kbps
0.1 MB
060 MB
0192 kbps
1.5 MB
090 MB
0256 kbps
0.2 MB
120 MB
0392 kbps
0.3 MB
180 MB
1400 kbps
.10 MB
600 MB
• LAN port required
• 300 MB or greater free hard disc space required
Extra free space is necessary to store music files.
The following table gives an approximate estimate of the required
free space.
2 Others
• When the contract with your provider is of the type by which the network settings are made manually, you must make the “Network Setup”
(See pages 111 ~ 115).
• The AVC-A1XVA is not compatible with PPPoE. If your contract is of the PPPoE setting type, you need a PPPoE-compatible router.
• For some ISPs (Internet Service Providers), you may have to make proxy server settings in order to use the Internet radio function. If proxy server
settings for connecting to the Internet have been made on the computer, make the same settings on the AVC-A1XVA.
• The AVC-A1XVA is designed to make the network settings automatically using the DHCP and Auto IP functions.
156
2 TU (Tuner) system buttons
2 Connections
The tuner system buttons shown on the diagram below are used for
Network Audio operations.
Connect one side of the Ethernet cable (CAT-5) to the ETHERNET
terminal on the AVC-A1XVA’s rear panel, the other side to the router.
Internet radio
To WAN side
Modem
To LAN side port
To LAN side port
Router
A~G
•, ª
MODE
MEMO
•, ª, 0, 1
ENTER
CH +, –
1~8
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Preset memory blocks
Character search
Configuration mode selection
Preset and favorite registration
Cursor up, down, left and right
Enter settings
Preset channel selection
Preset numbers
LAN port/ETHERNET port
Computer
2 Network settings
When using a broadband router (DHCP function), the network
settings are made automatically, so there is no need to make the
settings from the setup menu.
If the broadband router’s DHCP function is turned off, make the
“Network Setup” (See pages 111, 112).
157
Listening to Internet radio
The required system connections and settings must be made in order to listen to Internet radio.
“Update?” appears on the display when connecting to an Internet radio station for the first time.
1
Select the input source to “AUX”.
• The “Network Audio” menu screen appears.
(Main unit)
2
1
(Remote control unit
in the AMP mode)
Press the cursor up or down button to select “Internet Radio”, then press the
ENTER or cursor right button.
• The initial screen when not connected to the Internet is displayed.
2~6
or
2~6
(Remote control unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
Connecting to an Internet radio station for the first time:
Press the ENTER or cursor right button.
• The update screen appears.
or
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
2~6
2~6
4
Press the ENTER or cursor right button once again.
• The latest list of radio stations is downloaded from the vTuner site. (Several
minutes are required for this download.)
or
1
(Remote control unit)
158
(Remote control unit)
Press the cursor up or down button to select the desired setting item, then press the ENTER
or cursor right button.
5
or
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
or
(Remote control unit)
∗
(Remote control unit)
6
or
(Main unit)
Finally, the list of Internet radio stations is
displayed and those that can be played are
indicated by the “ ” mark in front of them.
(Main unit)
Cursor up or down button to select the desired radio station, then press the ENTER or cursor
right button.
• Connection starts, and the station starts playing once the buffer reaches “100%”.
During playback, press the ENTER button once to pause playback, then press ENTER
button again to resume playback.
If the ENTER button is pressed and held in for more than two seconds when in the play
or pause mode, playback stops and the previous menu window reappears.
or
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
NOTES:
• There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet. The programs they broadcast and their bit rates vary widely.
Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but streamed music or sound may be broken if the communication lines or
servers are busy. Inversely, programs with low bit rates have lower sound quality but tend to be more stable.
• “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is congested or if it is not broadcasting.
• If you do not want the OSD to be displayed while playing Network Audio (internet radio, music server), set “Function/Mode Status” at
“Setting the On Screen Display” to “OFF” (See page 76).
159
Presetting (registering) Internet radio stations
There are two ways to register stations: by presetting them or by storing them in your favorites.
Stations that are preset can be tuned in directly from the remote control unit.
1
Press the MEMORY button on the remote control unit while playing the
Internet radio station you want to register.
• The registration menu screen appears.
(Remote control unit)
3
2
Press the cursor up or down button to select “Preset”, then press the ENTER
or cursor righ button.
• The preset registration screen appears.
1
2, 3
2, 3
or
(Remote control unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
Press a memory block (A ~ G) button on the remote control unit, then press a
number (1 ~ 8) button on the remote control unit to register the station at the
desired preset channel.
• This completes registration.
(Remote control unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
If no button is operated for approximately ten seconds, the regular display
reappears.
Registered presettings can be checked on the on screen display.
The presettings can only be displayed with the on screen display when the
“AUX” function is selected.
NOTE:
• Registered presettings are deleted when they are overwritten.
2 Listening to preset Internet radio stations
When the “AUX” function is selected, press a memory block (A ~ G) button on the remote control unit, then press a number (1 ~ 8) button on
the remote control unit.
• The connection is made automatically and playback starts.
160
Registering Internet radio stations in your favorites
Your favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so registered stations can be tuned in easily.
1
Press the MEMORY button on the remote control unit while playing the
Internet radio station you want to register.
• The registration menu screen appears.
(Remote control unit)
3
2
Press the cursor up or down button to select “Favorites”, then press the
ENTER or cursor right button.
• The favorites registration screen appears.
1
2, 3
2, 3
or
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
3
3
Press the cursor left button to register the station.
To cancel without registering, press the cursor right button.
2 Listening to Internet radio stations registered in your favorites
1
When the “AUX” function is selected, press the cursor up or down button to
select “Favorites”, then press the ENTER or cursor right button.
• The Internet radio stations registered in your favorites are displayed.
or
(Remote control unit)
2
(Remote control unit)
1, 2
1, 2
Press the cursor up or down button to select the desired radio station, then
press the ENTER or cursor right button.
• Playback starts.
or
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
161
2 Deleting radio stations from your favorites
1
At the screen on which the Internet radio stations registered in your favorites
are displayed, press the cursor up or down button to choose the radio station
you want to delete, then press the MEMORY button on the remote control
unit.
• The delete screen appears .
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
1
2
Press the cursor left button to delete the station.
1, 2
To cancel without deleting, press the cursor right button.
(Remote control unit)
Character search function (searching by first letter)
The character search function (searching by first letter) can be used to select the desired item from the menu screen displaying the list of Internet
radio stations or music files stored on the computer.
1
While the menu screen is displayed, press the tuning up or down button on the
remote control unit.
• The character search screen appears.
(Remote control unit)
1, 2
2
(Remote control unit)
Press the tuning up or down button on the remote
control unit to select the first letter of the item you
want to search for.
• After several seconds, the menu screen is
displayed with the cursor set to the item starting
with the letter selected in step 2.
If there is more than one item starting with the letter selected in step 2, the
items are displayed in alphabetical order.
162
Updating the list of radio stations
1
Press the MODE button on the remote control unit to select the configuration
mode, then press the ENTER or cursor right button.
• The settings screen appears.
or
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
1
1~3-2
1~3-2
2
or
(Remote control unit)
Press the cursor up or down button to select “Automatic Update” or “Manual
Update”, then press the ENTER or cursor right button.
• The update screen appears.
(Remote control unit)
Select “Radio List Version” to display the current version.
3-1
or
When “Automatic Update” is selected:
Press the ENTER or cursor right button to select “Yes”.
• The list of radio stations is updated approximately once every other day.
(Remote control unit)
3-2
or
When “Manual Update” is selected:
Press the ENTER or cursor right button.
• The list of radio stations is updated this one time.
(Remote control unit)
4
Enter the setting.
(Remote control unit)
NOTE:
• When “Yes” is set for “Automatic Update”, set “Power Saving” in the “Network Setup” to “OFF”(See page 114).
When used with “Power Saving” set to “ON”, we recommend performing the “Manual Update” procedure periodically (about once a
week).
163
Playing music files stored on the computer (music server)
The necessary system connections and settings must be made in order to play music files.
This procedure is used to play music files (in WMA, MP3 and WAV format) stored on computers (music servers) connected to the AVC-A1XVA via
the network.
The computer’s server program must be launched before using this function. For details, refer to the server program’s operating instructions.
1
Select the input source to “AUX”.
• The “Network Audio” menu screen appears.
(Main unit)
1
(Remote control unit
in the AMP mode)
The host names of the computer(s) (music server(s)) on the network are
displayed.
2
Press the cursor up or down button to select the host name of the computer
(music server) on which the music file you want to play is located, then press
the ENTER or cursor right button.
2~4
2~4
or
(Remote control unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
Press the cursor up or down button to select the search item or the desired
folder, then press the ENTER or cursor right button.
1
or
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
∗
Playable music files are indicated by the “ ” mark in front of them.
4
or
(Remote control unit)
Press the cursor up or down button to select the music file, then press the ENTER
or cursor right button.
• Connection starts, and playback starts once the buffer reaches “100%”.
(Remote control unit)
Press the cursor down button to select the next file, the cursor up button to select the previous file.
During playback, press the ENTER button once to pause playback, then press the ENTER button again to resume playback.
If the ENTER button is pressed and held in for more than 2 seconds when in the play or pause mode, playback stops and the previous
menu screen reappears.
164
2 Playing music files that have been preset or registered in your favorites
The same operations as for Internet radio stations can be used to preset music files or register them in your favorites and play them.
NOTES:
• Registered presettings are deleted when they are overwritten.
• When the operations describe below are performed, the music server database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play the
music files that have been preset or registered in your favorites:
• When the music server is stopped and restarted.
• When music files are deleted from or added to the music server.
Operating the AVC-A1XVA using a browser
Internet Explorer can be used on the computer connected to the AVC-A1XVA over the network to operate the AVC-A1XVA.
Check the AVC-A1XVA’s IP address (See page 111) beforehand and input this IP address in Internet Explorer to display the AVC-A1XVA’s control
panel.
Operate in the same way as with normal Internet browsing to control the AVC-A1XVA.
2 Examples of web control operation screens
The settings of the setup items are the same as with normal operations. Refer to “System Setup” (See pages 28 ~ 115).
Below are some examples of operation screens.
Function selection screen
Surround mode selection screen
Volume control screen
NOTES:
• To use this function, set “Power Saving” at “Network Option” under “Network Setup” to “OFF” (See page 114).
165
13 MULTI ZONE
Multi-zone playback with multi-source
MULTI ZONE MUSIC ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
• When the outputs of the “ZONE2 (ZONE3, ZONE4)” OUT terminals are wired and connected to power amplifiers installed in other rooms,
different sources can be played in rooms other than the MAIN ZONE in which this unit and the playback devices are installed. (Refer to ZONE2
(ZONE3, ZONE4) on the diagram below.)
• Settings can be made at “7-2. Power Amp Assign” in the System Setup Menu so that the same source as the ZONE2 (ZONE3, ZONE4) preout terminals can be played from the speakers connected to the ZONE2 (ZONE3, ZONE4) speaker terminals. (See pages 100 ~ 104)
To control playback devices other than the ones above, either use that device’s Remote control unit or preset a separately sold programmable
Remote control unit.
NOTES:
• For the AUDIO output, use high quality pin-plug cords and wire in such a way that there is no humming or noise.
• For instructions on installation and operation of separately sold devices, refer to the devices’ operating instructions.
• Video signals are output from the ZONE3 video output terminals even when the power of ZONE3 is turned off.
MULTI ZONE MUSIC ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
[1] ZONE2 playback
The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with pre-out terminals for which the volume is adjustable and video output terminals (composite, S-Video and
component) as the ZONE2 output terminals.
A separately sold power amplifier or premain amplifier can be connected to enjoy ZONE2 playback.
2 ZONE2 5.1-channel system
• 5.1 channel playback is possible in ZONE2 if “5.1CH” is selected for the ZONE2 playback channel setting at “7-1. Channel Setup” (See
pages 96 ~ 99) in the System Setup Menu. (Default setting of ZONE2 channel is “5.1CH”.)
MAIN ZONE 9.1-channel system
ZONE2 5.1-channel system
Monitor
Monitor
FL
FR
FL
FR
C
DVD player
C
SW
AVC-A1XVA
SW
ZONE2
VIDEO OUT
Power amplifier
B
Input
SR
A
SL
A
SL
B
SB
L
SB
R
SL
ZONE2
AUDIO OUT
(VARIABLE OUT)
SR
SR
B
ZONE2 VIDEO signal cable
MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable
VIDEO
IN
S-VIDEO
IN
Monitor
Power amplifier
PR
L
R
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Subwoofer
R
Center
L
Surround
Front
166
2 ZONE2 7.1-channel system
• 7.1 channel playback is possible in ZONE2 if “7.1CH” is selected for the ZONE2 channel setting at “7-1. Channel Setup” in the System
Setup Menu.
MAIN ZONE 7.1-channel system
ZONE2 7.1-channel system
Monitor
Monitor
FL
FR
FL
C
DVD player
SW
AVC-A1XVA
FR
C
ZONE2
VIDEO OUT
SW
Power amplifier
ZONE2
AUDIO OUT
(VARIABLE OUT)
Input
SL
SR
SB
L
B
SL
SR
SB
R
SB
L
SB
R
ZONE2 VIDEO signal cable
MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable
VIDEO
IN
S-VIDEO
IN
Monitor
R
L
Power amplifier
PR
L
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
R
Front
R
Subwoofer
L
Center
Surround
Surround back
167
2 ZONE2 STEREO/MONO system
• When two speakers are being used in ZONE2, select “STEREO” for the ZONE2 channel setting at “7-1. Channel Setup” in the System
Setup Menu. Stereo sound can be enjoyed in ZONE2.
• When only one speaker is being used in ZONE2, select “MONO” for the ZONE2 channel setting at “7-1. Channel Setup” in the System
Setup Menu. In this case, monaural sound can be enjoyed in ZONE2.
MAIN ZONE 9.1-channel system
ZONE2 STEREO/MONO system
Monitor
Monitor
FL
FR
FL
FR
C
DVD player
AVC-A1XVA
SW
ZONE2
VIDEO OUT
Power amplifier
B
Input
ZONE2 AUDIO OUT
(VARIABLE OUT)
SL
A
SL
B
SR
A
SB
L
SB
R
SR
B
ZONE2 VIDEO signal cable
MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable
VIDEO
IN
PR
L
PB
Y
S-VIDEO
IN
Monitor
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
R
Power amplifier
168
[2] ZONE3 playback
The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with pre-out terminals for which the volume is adjustable and video output terminals (composite and S-Video) as
the ZONE3 output terminals.
2 ZONE3 STEREO/MONO system
• Stereo and monaural sound can be enjoyed in ZONE3. (By default, “STEREO” is selected.)
• When only one speaker is being used in ZONE3, select “MONO” for the ZONE3 channel setting at “7-1. Channel Setup” in the System
Setup Menu.
MAIN ZONE 9.1-channel system
ZONE3 STEREO/MONO system
Monitor
Monitor
FL
FR
FL
FR
C
DVD player
AVC-A1XVA
SW
ZONE3
VIDEO OUT
Power amplifier
B
Input
ZONE3 AUDIO OUT
(VARIABLE OUT)
SR
A
SL
A
SL
B
SB
L
SB
R
SR
B
ZONE3 VIDEO signal cable
MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable
VIDEO
IN
S-VIDEO
IN
Monitor
L
R
Power amplifier
169
[3] ZONE4 playback
The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with pre-out terminals for which the volume is adjustable as the ZONE4 output terminals.
2 ZONE4 STEREO/MONO system
• Stereo and monaural sound can be enjoyed in ZONE4. (By default, “STEREO” is selected.)
• When only one speaker is being used in ZONE4, select “MONO” for the ZONE4 channel setting at “7-1. Channel Setup” in the System
Setup Menu.
MAIN ZONE 9.1-channel system
ZONE4 STEREO/MONO system
Monitor
FL
FR
FL
FR
C
DVD player
AVC-A1XVA
SW
Power amplifier
B
Input
ZONE4 AUDIO OUT
(VARIABLE OUT)
SR
A
SL
A
SL
B
SB
L
SB
R
SR
B
MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable
Power amplifier
L
R
170
[4] Outputting a program source to an amplifier, etc., in a ZONE2 room (ZONE2 SELECT mode)
1
Press the ZONE2 SELECT button.
2
1
(Main unit)
2
Select the source you want to output
appears on the set’s display.
(Main unit)
3
Start playing the source to be output.
• For operating instructions, refer to the manuals of the
respective components.
DVD
ZONE2
SOURCE
[5] Outputting a program source to an amplifier, etc., in a ZONE3 or ZONE4 room (ZONE3, ZONE4 SELECT mode)
1
Press the ZONE3/4/REC SELECT button.
The display switches as follows each
time the button is pressed.
ZONE3
(REC OUT)
2
3
ZONE4
With “ZONE3 SOURCE” displayed, turn
the FUNCTION knob and select the
source you wish to output.
• The MULTI indicator light.
• The display switches the selected
source.
2
1
(Main unit)
(Main unit)
Start playing the source to be output.
• For operating instructions, refer to the manuals of the
respective components.
DVD
ZONE3
SOURCE
The ZONE4 SELECT can also be set with a method similar to the
above.
NOTES:
• The signals of the source selected in the ZONE3 mode are also
output from the VCR-1, VCR-2, VCR-3, VCR-4 and CDR/TAPE
recording output jacks.
• Digital signals are not output from the ZONE3 and ZONE4 audio
output jacks.
• Refer to pages 166 ~ 170 about the MULTI ZONE connections.
171
Remote control unit operations during multi-source playback
1
Select the Zone which you want to operate using the mode selector
buttons.
Example: ZONE2
1
(Remote control unit)
2
4
Select the input source you wish to output.
3
(Remote control unit)
3
(Remote control unit)
4
Select the input mode. (only ZONE2 mode)
Press the INPUT MODE button to switch to the
input.
(Remote control unit)
5
(Remote control unit)
6
(Remote control unit)
7
(Remote control unit)
8
(Remote control unit)
172
Press the ZONE2 ON button to turn on the Zone
power.
• The multi zone power indicator on Main unit is
light.
Press the OFF button to turn off the Zone power.
The multi zone power indicator on Main unit is off.
AUTO
ANALOG
8
7
5
6
The volume of the outputs of the different zones can
2
be adjusted with the VOLUME + and – buttons on
the Remote control unit.
The output level can be controlled only if the zone
volume level is set “variable” at “7-3. Volume
Control” in the System Setup Menu. (See page 105)
DEFAULT VOLUME SETTING
ZONE2 : –40 dB
ZONE3 : –40 dB
ZONE4 : –40 dB
The Zone volume can be adjusted within the range of –80 to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.
However, when using with ZONE2 set to multi-channel (5.1- or 7.1-channel), the ZONE2 volume can be adjusted
in steps of 0.5 dB. (See pages 96 ~ 99)
Use this to mute the audio temporarily.
Press the MUTE button.
The Muting level is same as set with “7-3. Volume Level”.
Cancelling MUTING mode.
Press the MUTE button again, or press the volume up or down buttons on the remote control.
To combine the sound being played in ZONE2 with the desired image:
Press the Remote control unit’s ZONE2 VIDEO SELECT button until the desired image appears on the ZONE2
monitor out.
The video source selected with the video select function is stored in the memory for the different ZONE2 input
sources.
Canceling simulcast playback.
Select “SOURCE” using the ZONE2 VIDEO SELECT button.
On screen display
Each time an operation is performed, a description of that operation appears on the display
connected to AVC-A1XVA’s ZONE2 MONITOR OUT jack. Also, the unit’s operating status can
be checked during playback by pressing the Remote control unit’s ON SCREEN button.
Such information as the position of the input selector and the surround parameter settings is output in sequence.
For details, see page 141.
System setup for multi-zone
• This makes it possible to make the optimum setting for the speaker systems used in ZONE2.
1
Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button.
1
(Remote control unit)
2
Press the SYSTEM SETUP button and display the
ZONE2 System Setup Menu.
The screen displayed depends on the settings
made at “7-1. Channel Setup” (See pages 96 ~ 99).
(Remote control unit)
2
Example: 5.1 or 7.1-channel system
Example: STEREO or MONO system
For instructions on making the settings, see pages 84 ~ 95.
Adjustment steps that need to be performed prior to surround sound playback in ZONE2
[1] Test Tone
• Before playing with the surround function, be sure to use the test tones to adjust the playback level from the different speakers. This
adjustment can be performed with the system setup (see pages 89, 90) or from the Remote control unit, as described below.
• Adjusting with the Remote control unit using the test tones is only possible in the “Auto” mode and only effective in the STANDARD
(DOLBY/DTS SURROUND) modes. The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the memory.
1
Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button.
1
(Remote control unit)
2
Press the TEST TONE button.
The Test Tone screen is displayed on the ZONE2
monitor out.
(Remote control unit)
2, 4
3
Test tones are output from the different speakers
used in ZONE2. Use the channel volume adjust
buttons to adjust so that the volume of the test tones
is the same for all the speakers.
3
(Remote control unit)
4
After completing the adjustment, press the TEST
TONE button again.
(Remote control unit)
173
[2] Channel Level
• After adjusting using the test tones, adjust the channel levels either according to the playback sources or to suit your tastes, as described
below.
1
Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button.
1
(Remote control unit)
2
The channel Volume is displayed at ZONE2 monitor
out.
(Remote control unit)
3
Select the speaker level you want to adjust.
• When pressing the ENTER button, the channel
switches as shown below each time the ENTER
button is pressed.
FL
C
SW
FR
SR
or
FADER
SL
SBL
SBR
(Remote control unit)
4
(Remote control unit)
Adjust the level of the selected speaker.
• The adjustment range for the different channels is
+12 dB to –12 dB.
• The sound from the subwoofer can be completely
cut by lowering the SW (subwoofer) setting one
additional step from –12 dB (setting it to “OFF”).
ZONE2 surround back speakers are only displayed when “7.1ch” is selected for
the ZONE2 channel output setting at “7-1. Channel Setup”.
When the ZONE2 surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” for “6-1.
Speaker Configuration”, this is set to “SB”.
174
2, 3
3, 4
Fader function
• This function makes it possible to lower the volume of the front channels (FL, C and FR) or the rear channels (SL, SR, SBL and SBR) of ZONE2
together. Use it for example to adjust the balance of the sound from each position when multi-channel music sources are played.
1
Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button.
1
(Remote control unit)
2
The Channel Volume screen is displayed at ZONE2
monitor out.
(Remote control unit)
3
Select “Fader”.
• When pressing the ENTER button, the channel
switches in oder shown below each time the
ENTER button is pressed.
FL
C
SW
FR
2, 3
3, 4
SR
or
FADER
SL
SBL
SBR
(Remote control unit)
ZONE2 surround back speakers are only displayed when “7.1ch” is selected for the ZONE2 channel output
setting at “7-1. Channel Setup”.
When the ZONE2 surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” for “6-1. Speaker Configuration”, this is set
to “SB”.
4
Press the cursor left button to reduce the volume of the front channels, the cursor right button to reduce the volume
of the rear channels.
(Remote control unit)
The fader function does not affect the SW channel.
• The channel whose channel level is adjusted lowest can be faded to –12 dB using the fader function.
• If the channel levels are adjusted separately after adjusting the fader, the fader adjustment values are cleared, so
adjust the fader again.
175
ZONE2 Surround
• When ZONE2 is used with a 5.1- or 7.1-channel system, various surround modes can be selected according to the program source being played.
• The desired sound field can be achieved by adjusting the parameters for the various surround modes.
1
Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button.
1
(Remote control unit)
2
Select the surround mode.
q Dolby Digital and DTS surround
mode.
w DSP surround simulation mode.
2-q
2-w
2-r
2-e
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
The surround mode switches in the following order each time the DSP
SIMULATION button is pressed:
WIDE SCREEN
VIRTUAL
SUPER STADIUM
MATRIX
VIDEO GAME
e STEREO mode.
ROCK ARENA
MONO MOVIE
5
4
JAZZ CLUB
CLASSIC CONCERT
3, 5
r 5CH/7CH STEREO mode.
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
See pages 132, 143 ~ 149, 151 for a description of the features of the
various surround modes.
NOTE:
• The following surround modes can be selected in ZONE2: STEREO,
DOLBY/DTS SURROUND, 5/7CH STEREO, WIDE SCREEN, SUPER
STADIUM, ROCK ARENA, JAZZ CLUB, CLASSIC CONCERT, MONO
MOVIE, VIDEO GAME, MATRIX and VIRTUAL.
3
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.
Display the Surround Parameter menu.
(Remote control unit)
q Select the various parameters.
4
(Remote control unit)
5
(Remote control unit)
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting.
or
(Remote control unit)
176
w Adjust the parameter settings.
Memory and call-out functions of ZONE2 (USER MODE function)
• The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a function for storing the input source, auto surround mode and input mode settings selected for the MAIN
ZONE and ZONE2 in the memory so they can be used whenever desired.
• For ZONE2, three patterns of settings can be stored in the memory using the USER MODE 1, 2 and 3 buttons on the Remote control unit.
• See page 150 for a description of the MAIN ZONE’s “USER MODE” function.
2 Storing the settings in the memory
1
2 Calling the settings out
2
2
3
3
Set the following to the desired status:
q ZONE2 input source
w ZONE2 auto surround mode
e ZONE2 input mode
2
Select the ZONE2 mode using the
AMP button.
(Remote control unit)
3
1
Select the ZONE2 mode using the
AMP button.
(Remote control unit)
2
Select the USER MODE button at
which the settings you want to call out
have been stored.
(Remote control unit)
Press and hold the USER MODE
button at which you want to store the
settings.
(Remote control unit)
177
ZONE2 tone control setting
• This function allows you to adjust the bass and treble of the ZONE2 audio output
during surround playback in ZONE2 to suit your tastes.
1
Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button.
1
(Remote control unit)
2
(Remote control unit)
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.
Display the Surround Parameter menu on the ZONE2
monitor out.
The screen for the selected surround mode
appears.
7, 8
3~6
2, 8
3
Select “TONE”.
(Remote control unit)
4
Display the Tone Control screen.
(Remote control unit)
5
Display the Tone Control screen.
Select Tone Defeat OFF.
If you do not want to the tone to be adjusted, set “Tone Defeat” to
“ON”.
(Remote control unit)
q Select Bass or Treble.
6
(Remote control unit)
7
178
(Remote control unit)
Enter the setting.
The Surround Parameter menu screen reappears.
(Remote control unit)
w Select the level.
8
If the setting ends, press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button again.
or
(Remote control unit)
14 LAST FUNCTION MEMORY
• This unit is equipped with a last function memory which stores the input and output setting conditions as they were immediately before the
power is switched off.
This function eliminates the need to perform complicated resetting when the power is switched on.
• The unit is also equipped with a back-up memory. This function provides approximately one week of memory storage from when the Main unit’s
power switch is off and with the power supply cord disconnected.
15 INITIALIZATION OF THE MICROPROCESSOR
In very rare instances, the AVC-A1XVA internal microprocessor might lock up, or otherwise cause mis-operation. This might be caused due to an
AC line surge or line spike noise, or by static electric discharge on or nearby the unit, or to connected components. If the condition cannot be
corrected by powering off the unit, including disconnection of the power supply cord for a period of ten minutes and subsequent re-connection,
then the unit may have to be re-initialized. Doing so will restore the microprocessor to its original out-of-the-box state, with all custom memories
and settings erased, and the original factory default settings restored. Only use this procedure if you are sure that the microprocessor requires reinitialization.
1
2
Switch off the unit using the Main unit’s power operation
switch.
3
Check that the entire display is flashing with an interval of
about 1 second, and release your fingers from the 2 buttons
and the microprocessor will be initialized.
Hold the following STANDARD button and HOME THX
CINEMA button, and turn the Main unit’s power operation
switch on.
NOTES:
• If step 3 does not work, start over from step 1.
• If the microprocessor has been reset, all the settings are reset
to the default values (the values set upon shipment from the
factory).
1,2
2
2
179
16 TROUBLESHOOTING
If a problem should arise,first check the following.
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Have you operated the receiver according to the Operating Instructions?
3. Are the speakers, and other connected components operating properly?
If this unit is not operating properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist, there may be a malfunction.
Disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
Symptom
DISPLAY not lit and sound not produced
when power switch set to on.
DISPLAY lit but sound not produced.
Measures
Page
• Power supply cord not plugged in securely.
Cause
• Check the insertion of the power supply cord plug.
11
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Speaker cords not securely connected.
FUNCTION knob position is not appropriate.
Volume control set to minimum.
MUTING is on.
No digital signal is being input.
• AVC-A1XVA’s video output jacks and monitor’s
input jacks are not properly connected.
• Monitor’s input setting is wrong.
Nothing is displayed on monitor.
• The VIDEO OFF mode is set.
• The PURE DIRECT mode is set.
• The resolution of the monitor device connected
to the component monitor output connector
does not match the AVC-A1XVA’s resolution.
No DTS sound is produced.
Ultra2 Cinema / THX Music Mode / THX
Games Mode cannnot be set.
Copying from DVD to VCR is not
possible.
No sound is produced from subwoofer.
No test tones are produced.
No sound is produced from surround
speakers.
This unit does not operate properly when
Remote control unit is used.
An image is not projected with an
HDMI/DVI-D connection.
The HDMI audio is not output.
180
Connect securely.
Switch to the proper position.
Turn volume up to suitable level.
Switch off MUTING.
Properly select a digital signal input source.
• Check that the connections are correct.
• Set the TV’s input selector to the jacks to which
video signals are connected.
• Set the VIDEO ON mode.
• Set a surround mode other than the PURE DIRECT
mode.
• Use the SCALE button on the main unit or the
remote control unit to check the resolution setting.
22, 23
129
130
133
60, 61
11 ~ 16
—
132
132
135
• DVD player’s audio output setting is not set to bit
stream.
• DVD player is not DTS-compatible.
• AVC-A1XVA’s input setting is set to analog.
• Make the DVD player’s initial settings.
• Surround back speaker set to 1.
• Connect two surround back speakers.
• Copying between a source such as DVD and a
VCR is not usually possible, as DVDs are often
encoded with copy-protection signals that
prevent VCR recording.
• Copying is not possible.
• Subwoofer’s power is not on.
• Subwoofer’s initial setting is set to “NO”.
• Subwoofer’s output is not connected.
• Turn on the power.
• Set the setting to “YES”.
• Connect properly.
• Surround mode is set to a mode other than
Dolby Surround.
• Set to Dolby Surround.
—
• Surround mode is set to “STEREO”.
• Set to a mode other than “STEREO”.
—
• Batteries dead.
• Remote control unit too far from this unit.
• Obstacle between this unit and Remote control
unit.
• Different button is being pressed.
• < and > ends of battery inserted in reverse.
• Replace with new batteries.
• Move closer.
• Remove obstacle.
116
116
116
• Press the proper button.
• Insert batteries properly.
—
116
• AVC-A1XVA’s HDMI/DVI-D output jacks and
monitor’s input jacks are not properly connected.
• No HDMI/DVI-D signal is being input.
• The connected monitor equipment or other
equipments do not spport HDCP.
• The settings of “MONITOR SELECT” is not
appropriate.
• The output format of the connected player
(HDMI/DVI-D FORMAT) does not matche the
supported input format of connected monitor
equipments.
• Check the HDMI/DVI-D connection.
15, 16
• Properly select HDMI or DVI-D signal input source.
• The AVC-A1XVA will not output video signal unless
the other equipment supports HDCP.
• Check the settings of “MONITOR SELECT”.
70, 71
15, 16
• The AVC-A1XVA does not play HDMI audio
signals.
• The HDMI audio signals are not output from the
connected monitor device.
• Set the HDMI audio playback
“HDMI/DVI In Assign” settings to
• Set the HDMI audio playback
“HDMI/DVI In Assign” settings to
• Use a DTS-compatible player.
• Set to AUTO or DTS.
—
—
129
32, 49,
50, 60
—
—
49, 50
23, 98,
99
• Check whether the output format of the
connected player (HDMI/DVI-D FORMAT)
matches the supported input format of connected
monitor equipments.
setting at the
“AMP”.
setting at the
“TV”.
69, 70,
134
69, 70
69, 70
69, 70
17 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Optimum surround sound for different sources
There are currently various types of multi-channel signals (signals or formats with more than two channels).
2 Types of multi-channel signals
Dolby Digital (including Surround EX), DTS (including Surround ES), DVD-Audio, and Super Audio CD.
Note on the above: MUSE 3.1 and MPEG multi-channel audio are not available to North American consumers – same is true for Dolby’s AAC.
“Source” here does not refer to the type of signal (format) but the recorded content. Sources can be divided into two major categories.
2 Types of sources
• Movie audio
Signals created to be played in movie theaters. In general sound is recorded to be played in movie theaters equipped
with multiple surround speakers, regardless of the format (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.).
Movie theater sound field
FL
SW
C
FR
SL
Listening room sound field
SR
FL
SW
C
SL
FR
SR
SB
In this case it is important to achieve the same sense of
expansion as in a movie theater with the surround channels.
To do so, in some cases the number of surround speakers is
increased (to four or eight) or speakers with bipolar or dipolar
properties are used.
SL: Surround L channel
SR: Surround R channel
SB: Surround B (back) channel
SB
Multiple surround speakers
• Other types of audio These signals are designed to recreate a 360° sound field using three to five speakers.
FL
SW
C
FR
In this case the speakers should surround the listener from all sides to create a uniform sound field
from 360°. Ideally the surround speakers should function as “point” sound sources in the same way
as the front speakers.
SL
SR
These two types of sources thus have different properties, and different speaker settings, particularly for the surround speakers, are required
in order to achieve the ideal sound.
The AVC-A1XVA’s surround speaker selection function makes it possible to change the settings according to the combination of surround
speakers being used and the surrounding environment in order to achieve the ideal surround sound for all sources. This means that you can
connect a pair of bipolar or dipolar surround speakers (mounted on either side of the prime listening position), as well as a separate pair of
direct radiating (monopolar) speakers placed at the rear corners of the listening room.
181
Surround back speakers
The THX Surround EX format adds new “Surround Back” (SB) channels to the conventional 5.1-channel system. This makes it easy to achieve
sound positioned directly behind the listener, something that was previously difficult with sources designed for conventional multi surround
speakers. In addition, the acoustic image extending between the sides and the rear is narrowed, thus greatly improving the expression of the
surround signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the listening position.
Change of positioning and acoustic image
with 5.1-channel systems
FL
SW
C
Change of positioning and acoustic image
with THX Surround EX system
FR
FL
SW
C
SL ch
SL ch
SR ch
Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL
FR
SR ch
SB ch
Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL
Speaker(s) for one or two channels are required in order to achieve a THX Surround EX system with the AVC-A1XVA. Adding these, however,
allows you to achieve stronger surround effects not only with sources recorded in THX Surround EX, but also with conventional 2- to 5.1-channel
sources. The WIDE SCREEN mode is a mode for achieving surround sound with up to 7.1 channels using surround back speakers, for sources
recorded in conventional Dolby Surround as well as Dolby Digital 5.1-channel and DTS Surround 5.1-channel sources. Furthermore, all the Denon
original surround modes (see page 151) are compatible with 7.1-channel playback, so you can enjoy 7.1-channel sound with any signal source.
2 Number of surround back speakers
With THX Surround EX, the surround back channel consists of one channel of playback signals, but we recommend using two speakers. The
modes that use the new ASA technology from THX (See page 189) are most effective when using two monopole type surround back speakers
placed close together.
Using two speakers results in a smoother blend with the sound of the surround channels and better sound positioning of the surround back
channel when listening from a position other than the center.
2 Placement of the surround left and right channels when using surround back speakers
Using surround back speakers greatly improves the positioning of the sound at the rear. Because of this, the surround left and right channels
play an important role in achieving a smooth transition of the acoustic image from the front to the back. As shown on the diagram above, in a
movie theater the surround signals are also produced from diagonally in front of the listeners, creating an acoustic image as if the sound were
floating in space.
To achieve these effects, we recommend placing the speakers for the surround left and right channels slightly more towards the front than
with conventional surround systems. Doing so sometimes increases the surround effect when playing conventional 5.1-channel sources in the
THX Surround EX mode. Check the surround effects of the various modes before selecting the surround mode.
182
Speaker setting examples
Here we describe a number of speaker settings for different purposes. Use these examples as guides to set up your system according to the type
of speakers used and the main usage purpose.
[1] For THX Surround EX systems (using surround back speakers)
q Basic setting for primarily watching movies
This is recommended when mainly playing movies and using regular single way or 2-way speakers for the surround speakers.
Front speakers
Center speaker
Monitor
Subwoofer
45°
Surround
speakers
Surround back speakers
As seen from above
• Set the front speakers with their front surfaces as flush with
Surround speaker
Surround back
the TV or monitor screen as possible. Set the center speaker
speaker
Point slightly
between the front left and right speakers and no further
downwards
Front speaker
from the listening position than the front speakers.
• Consult the owner’s manual for your subwoofer for advice
on placing the subwoofer within the listening room.
60 to 90 cm
• If the surround speakers are direct-radiating (monopolar)
then place them slightly behind and at an angle to the
listening position and parallel to the walls at a position 60 to
As seen from the side
90 cm (2 to 3 feet) above ear level at the prime listening
position.
• When using two surround back speakers, set them at the back facing front and with both speakers at the
same distance from the listening point. When using one surround back speaker, place it at the rear center
facing the front at a slightly higher position (0 to 20 cm) than the surround speakers.
• We recommend installing the surround back speaker(s) at a slightly downward facing angle. This
effectively prevents the surround back channel signals from reflecting off the monitor or screen at the
front center, resulting in interference and making the sense of movement from the front to the back less
sharp.
• Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A jacks on the AVC-A1XVA and set settings on
the setup menu to “A”. (This is the factory default setting. For details, see page 29.)
w Setting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type speakers for the surround speakers
For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment, diffuse radiation speakers such as bipolar types, or dipolar (THX) types, provide
a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct radiating speaker (monopolar). Place these speakers at either side of the prime
listening position, mounted above ear level.
Path of the surround sound from the
speakers to the listening position
Surround
speakers
Surround back speakers
As seen from above
• Set the front speakers, center speaker and subwoofer in the
Surround back
Surround speaker
same positions as in example (1).
speaker
Point slightly
• It is best to place the surround speakers directly at the side
downwards
Front speaker
or slightly to the front of the viewing position, and 60 to 90
cm above the ears.
• Same as surround back speaker installation method (1).
60 to 90 cm
• Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A
jacks on the AVC-A1XVA and set settings on the setup menu
to “A”. (This is the factory default setting. For details, see
As seen from the side
page 29.)
• The signals from the surround channels reflect off the walls as shown on the diagram at the left, creating
an enveloping and realistic surround sound presentation.
For multi-channel music sources however, the use of bipolar or dipolar
speakers mounted at the sides of the listening position may not be satisfactory in order to create a
coherent 360 degree surround sound field. Connect another pair of direct radiating speakers as described
in example (3) and place them at the rear corners of the room facing towards the prime listening position.
183
e When using different surround speakers for movies and music
To achieve more effective surround sound for both movies and music, use different sets of surround speakers and different surround
modes for the two types of sources.
Front speakers
Center speaker
Monitor
Subwoofer
45° ~ 60°
Surround
speakers A
140°
Surround back
speakers
Surround speakers B
As seen from above
• Set the front speakers slightly wider apart than the setup for watching movies only and point them toward
the listening position in order assure clear positioning of the sound.
• Set the center speaker in the same positions as in example (1).
• Set surround speakers A for watching movies in the positions described in example (1) or (2), depending
on the types of speakers used.
• Set surround speakers B for playing multi-channel music at the same height as the front speakers and
slightly at an angle to the rear of the listening position, and point them toward the listening position.
• Connect the surround speakers for watching movies to the surround speaker A jacks on the AVC-A1XVA,
the surround speakers for playing multi-channel music to the surround speaker B jacks. Set the surround
speaker selection on the setup menu. (For instructions, see page 57.)
• To activate the appropriate speakers for movies and music, we suggest that during setup, choose Dolby
Digital/DTS with THX and Surround Speakers A (the bipolar
Surround speakers
Surround back
or dipolar speakers mounted at the sides of the listening
speaker
A
position).
Point slightly
downwards
Choose Dolby Digital/DTS without THX and Surround
Front speaker
Speakers B (the direct radiating speakers mounted at the
60 to 90 cm
rear corners of the listening room). Then, by simply
activating the THX function (used during movie playback, the
Surround
speakers B
Surround A speakers are automatically activated. For multichannel music listening (Dolby Digital or DTS music
As seen from the side
programs), turn off the THX enhancements by touching the
THX button on the remote control, and the Surround B
speakers will be automatically activated.
Example: Movie sources (Dolby, DTS surround, etc.)
“THX” or “THX 5.1” mode: Speakers A
Music sources (DVD-Video, DTS CD, etc.)
“Dolby/DTS surround”: Speakers B
The speakers can be switched at the touch of a button by turning HOME THX CINEMA on when playing movies and off when playing
multi-channel music.
[2] When not using surround back speakers
Front speakers
Center speaker
Monitor
Subwoofer
45°
• Set the front speakers with their front surfaces as flush with the
TV or monitor screen as possible. Set the center speaker between
the front left and right speakers and no further from the listening
position than the front speakers.
• Consult the owner’s manual for your subwoofer for advice on
placing the subwoofer within the listening room.
• If the surround speakers are direct-radiating (monopolar) then
place them slightly behind and at an angle to the listening position
and parallel to the walls at a position 60 to 90 centimeters (2 to 3
feet) above ear level at the prime listening position.
• Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A jacks
on the AVC-A1XVA and set settings on the setup menu to “A”.
(This is the factory default setting. For details, see page 29.)
Surround speaker
Front speaker
60 to 90 cm
As seen from the side
120°
Surround speakers
As seen from above
The surround speakers can be switched freely during playback with the surround parameter adjustment. (For instructions, see page 134.)
184
Surround
The AVC-A1XVA is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same
sense of presence as in a movie theater.
[1] Dolby Surround
q Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is the multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby Digital consists of up to “5.1” channels - front left, front right, center, surround left, surround right, and an additional channel
exclusively reserved for additional deep bass sound effects (the Low Frequency Effects – LFE – channel, also called the “.1” channel,
containing bass frequencies of up to 120 Hz).
Unlike the analog Dolby Pro Logic format, Dolby Digital’s main channels can all contain full range sound information, from the lowest bass,
up to the highest frequencies – 22 kHz. The signals within each channel are distinct from the others, allowing pinpoint sound imaging, and
Dolby Digital offers tremendous dynamic range from the most powerful sound effects to the quietest, softest sounds, free from noise and
distortion.
2 Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic
Comparison of home surround systems
No. recorded channels (elements)
No. playback channels
Dolby Pro Logic
5.1 ch
2 ch
5.1 ch
4 ch
L, R, C, SL, SR, SW
L, R, C, S (SW - recommended)
Digital discrete processing Dolby Digital (AC-3) encoding/decoding
Analog matrix processing Dolby Surround
20 kHz
7 kHz
Playback channels (max.)
Audio processing
Dolby Digital
High frequency playback limit of surround
channel
2 Dolby Digital compatible media and playback methods
Marks indicating Dolby Digital compatibility:
.
The following are general examples. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.
Media
Dolby Digital output jacks
Playback method (reference page)
DVD
Optical or coaxial digital output
(same as for PCM)
1
Set the input mode to “AUTO”.
(See page 129)
Others
(satellite broadcasts, CATV, etc.)
Optical or coaxial digital output
(same as for PCM)
Set the input mode to “AUTO”.
(See page 129)
1 Some DVD digital outputs have the function of switching the Dolby Digital signal output method between “bit stream” and “(convert to)
PCM”. When playing in Dolby Digital surround on the AVC-A1XVA, switch the DVD player’s output mode to “bit stream”. In some cases
players are equipped with both “bit stream + PCM” and “PCM only” digital outputs. In this case connect the “bit stream + PCM” jacks
to the AVC-A1XVA.
w Dolby Pro Logic IIx
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx furthers the matrix decoding technology of Dolby Pro Logic II to decode audio signals recorded on two channels into
up to 7.1 playback channels, including the surround back channel. Dolby Pro Logic IIx also allows 5.1-channel sources to be played in up
to 7.1 channels.
The mode can be selected according to the source. The Music mode is best suited for playing music, the Cinema mode for playing
movies, and the Game mode for playing games. The Game mode can only be used with 2-channel audio sources.
185
e Dolby Pro Logic II
• Dolby Pro Logic II is a new multi-channel playback format developed by Dolby Laboratories using feedback logic steering technology and
offering improvements over conventional Dolby Pro Logic circuits.
• Dolby Pro Logic II can be used to decode not only sources recorded in Dolby Surround ( ) but also regular stereo sources into five
channels (front left, front right, center, surround left and surround right) to achieve surround sound.
• Whereas with conventional Dolby Pro Logic the surround channel playback frequency band was limited, Dolby Pro Logic II offers a wider
band range (20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater). In addition, the surround channels were monaural (the surround left and right channels were
the same) with previous Dolby Pro Logic, but Dolby Pro Logic II they are played as stereo signals.
• Various parameters can be set according to the type of source and the contents, so it is possible to achieve optimum decoding (see page
147).
Sources recorded in Dolby Surround
These are sources in which three or more channels of surround have been recorded as two channels of signals using Dolby Surround
encoding technology.
Dolby Surround is used for the sound tracks of movies recorded on DVDs, LDs and video cassettes to be played on stereo VCRs, as
well as for the stereo broadcast signals of FM radio, TV, satellite broadcasts and cable TV.
Decoding these signals with Dolby Pro Logic makes it possible to achieve multi-channel surround playback. The signals can also be
played on ordinary stereo equipment, in which case they provide normal stereo sound.
There are two types of DVD Dolby surround recording signals.
q 2-channel PCM stereo signals
w 2-channel Dolby Digital signals
2 Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the logo mark shown below.
Dolby Surround support mark:
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
r Dolby Headphone
• This is a three-dimensional sound technology developed jointly by Dolby Laboratories and Lake Technology Ltd. of Australia for achieving
surround sound using regular headphones.
• Previously, when using headphones all the sounds resonated inside the head and it was uncomfortable to listen with headphones for
long periods of time. Dolby Headphone simulates speaker playback in a room and places the sound at the front or the sides, outside the
head, to achieve a powerful sound like the sound of movie or home theaters. This technology is mainly for multichannel audio/video
equipment with Dolby Digital or Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoding functions and works with a high performance digital signal
processing (DSP) chip.
• Dolby Headphone is effective not only for multichannel sources but also for stereo programs.
• On the AVC-A1XVA, it is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record
them on a separate recorder.
[2] DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround (also called simply DTS) is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems.
DTS offers the same “5.1” playback channels as Dolby Digital (front left, front right and center, surround left and surround right) as well as
the stereo 2-channel mode. The signals for the different channels are fully independent, eliminating the risk of deterioration of sound quality
due to interference between signals, crosstalk, etc.
DTS features a relatively higher bit rate as compared to Dolby Digital (1234 kbps for CDs and LDs, 1536 kbps for DVDs) so it operates with a
relatively low compression rate. Because of this the amount of data is great, and when DTS playback is used in movie theaters, a separate
CD-ROM synchronized with the film is played.
With LDs and DVDs, there is of course no need for an extra disc; the pictures and sound can be recorded simultaneously on the same disc,
so the discs can be handled in the same way as discs with other formats.
There are also music CDs recorded in DTS. These CDs include 5.1-channel surround signals (compared to two channels on current CDs). They
do not include picture data, but they offer surround playback on CD players that are equipped with digital outputs (PCM type digital output
required).
DTS surround track playback offers the same intricate, grand sound as in a movie theater, right in your own listening room.
2 DTS compatible media and playback methods
Marks indicating DTS compatibility:
and
.
The following are general examples. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.
186
Media
DTS Digital output jacks
Playback method (reference page)
CD
Optical or coaxial digital output
(same as for PCM)
2
Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” (See page 129).
Never set the mode to “ANALOG” or “PCM”.
1
DVD
Optical or coaxial digital output
(same as for PCM)
3
Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” (See page 129).
1 DTS signals are recorded in the same way on CDs and LDs as PCM signals. Because of this, the un-decoded DTS signals are output
as random “hissy” noise from the CD or LD player’s analog outputs. If this noise is played with the amplifier set at a very high volume,
it may possibly cause damage to the speakers. To avoid this, be sure to switch the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” before playing
CDs or LDs recorded in DTS. Also, never switch the input mode to “ANALOG” or “PCM” during playback. The same holds true when
playing CDs or LDs on a DVD player or LD/DVD compatible player. For DVDs, the DTS signals are recorded in a special way so this
problem does not occur.
2 The signals provided at the digital outputs of a CD or LD player may undergo some sort of internal signal processing (output level
adjustment, sampling frequency conversion, etc.). In this case the DTS-encoded signals may be processed erroneously, in which case
they cannot be decoded by the AVC-A1XVA, or may only produce noise. Before playing DTS signals for the first time, turn down the
master volume to a low level, start playing the DTS disc, then check whether the DTS indicator on the AVC-A1XVA (see page 143)
lights before turning up the master volume.
3 A DVD player with DTS-compatible digital output is required to play DTS DVDs. A DTS Digital Output logo is featured on the front
panel of compatible DVD players. Recent DENON DVD player models feature DTS-compatible digital output – consult the player’s
owner’s manual for information on configuring the digital output for DTS playback of DTS-encoded DVDs.
MANUFACTURED UNDER LICENSE FROM DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS, INC.
U.S. PAT. NO’S. 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 AND OTHER U.S. AND WORLD–WIDE PATENTS
ISSUED AND PENDING.
“DTS”, “DTS–ES”, “Neo:6”, AND “DTS 96/24” ARE TRADEMARKS OF DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS, INC. © 1996, 2003 DIGITAL
THEATER SYSTEMS, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
[3] DTS-ES™
DTS-ES is a new multi-channel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems Inc. While offering high compatibility with the
conventional DTS Digital Surround format, DTS-ES greatly improves the 360-degree surround impression and space expression thanks to
further expanded surround signals. This format has been used professionally in movie theaters since 1999.
In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C, SL, SR and LFE), DTS-ES also offers the SB (Surround Back, sometimes also referred to
as “surround center”) channel for surround playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES includes two signal formats with different surround
signal recording methods, as described below.
2 DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 is the newest recording format. With it, all 6.1 channels (including the SB channel) are recorded independently using
a digital discrete system. The main feature of this format is that because the SL, SR and SB channels are fully independent, the sound can
be designed with total freedom and it is possible to achieve a sense that the acoustic images are moving about freely among the
background sounds surrounding the listener from 360 degrees.
Though maximum performance is achieved when sound tracks recorded with this system are played using a DTS-ES decoder, when played
with a conventional DTS decoder the SB channel signals are automatically down-mixed to the SL and SR channels, so none of the signal
components are lost.
2 DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
With this format, the additional SB channel signals undergo matrix encoding and are input to the SL and SR channels beforehand. Upon
playback they are decoded to the SL, SR and SB channels. The performance of the encoder used at the time of recording can be fully
matched using a high precision digital matrix decoder developed by DTS, thereby achieving surround sound more faithful to the producer’s
sound design aims than with conventional 5.1- or 6.1-channel systems.
In addition, the bit stream format is 100% compatible with conventional DTS signals, so the effect of the Matrix 6.1 format can be achieved
even with 5.1-channel signal sources. Of course it is also possible to play DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources with a DTS 5.1-channel
decoder.
When DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 or Matrix 6.1 encoded sources are decoded with a DTS-ES decoder, the format is automatically detected upon
decoding and the optimum playing mode is selected. However, some Matrix 6.1 sources may be detected as having a 5.1-channel format,
so the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 mode must be set manually to play these sources.
(For instructions on selecting the surround mode, see page 142.)
The DTS-ES decoder includes another function, the DTS Neo:6 surround mode for 6.1-channel playback of digital PCM and analog signal
sources.
2 DTS Neo:6™ surround
This mode applies conventional 2-channel signals to the high precision digital matrix decoder used for DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 to achieve 6.1channel surround playback. High precision input signal detection and matrix processing enable full band reproduction (frequency response
of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) for all 6.1 channels, and separation between the different channels is improved to the same level as that of
a digital discrete system.
DTS Neo:6 surround includes two modes for selecting the optimum decoding for the signal source.
• DTS Neo:6 Cinema
This mode is optimum for playing movies. Decoding is performed with emphasis on separation performance to achieve the same
atmosphere with 2-channel sources as with 6.1-channel sources.
This mode is effective for playing sources recorded in conventional surround formats as well, because the in-phase component is
assigned mainly to the center channel (C) and the reversed phase component to the surround (SL, SR and SB channels).
• DTS Neo:6 Music
This mode is suited mainly for playing music. The front channel (FL and FR) signals bypass the decoder and are played directly so there
is no loss of sound quality, and the effect of the surround signals output from the center (C) and surround (SL, SR and SB) channels add
a natural sense of expansion to the sound field.
187
[4] DTS 96/24
The sampling frequency, number of bits and number of channels used for recording of music, etc., in studios has been increasing in recent
years, and there are a growing number of high quality signal sources, including 96 kHz/24 bit 5.1-channel sources.
For example, there are high picture/sound quality DVD-Video sources with 96 kHz/24 bit stereo PCM audio tracks.
However, because the data rate for these audio tracks is extremely high, there are limits to recording them on two channels only, and since
the quality of the pictures must be restricted it is common to only include still pictures.
In addition, 96 kHz/24 bit 5.1-channel surround is possible with DVD-Audio sources, but DVD-Audio players are required to play them with this
high quality.
DTS 96/24 is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems Inc, in order to deal with this situation.
Conventional surround formats used sampling frequencies of 48 or 44.1 kHz, so 20 kHz was about the maximum playback signal frequency.
With DTS 96/24, the sampling frequency is increased to 96 or 88.2 kHz to achieve a wide frequency range of over 40 kHz.
In addition, DTS 96/24 has a resolution of 24 bits, resulting in the same frequency band and dynamic range as 96 kHz/24 bit PCM.
As with conventional DTS Surround, DTS 96/24 is compatible with a maximum of 5.1 channels, so sources recorded using DTS 96/24 can be
played in high sampling frequency, multiple channel audio with such normal media as DVD Videos and CDs.
Thus, with DTS 96/24, the same 96 kHz/24 bit multi-channel surround sound as with DVD-Audio can be achieved while viewing DVD-Video
images on a conventional DVD-Video player ( 1). Furthermore, with DTS 96/24 compatible CDs, 88.2 kHz/24 bit multi-channel surround can
be achieved using normal CD/LD players ( 1).
Even with the high quality multi-channel signals, the recording time is the same as with conventional DTS surround sources.
What’s more, DTS 96/24 is fully compatible with the conventional DTS surround format, so DTS 96/24 signal sources can be played with a
sampling frequency of 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz on conventional DTS or DTS-ES surround decoders ( 2).
1: A DVD player with DTS digital output capabilities (for CD/LD players, a player with digital outputs for conventional DTS CDs/LDs) and
a disc recorded in DTS 96/24 are required.
2: The resolution is 24 or 20 bits, depending on the decoder.
[5] Home THX Cinema Surround
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew
from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theaters and in your home theater, as
faithful as possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theaters with
similar equipment and conditions. The soundtrack created for movie theaters is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc.,
and is not changed for playback in a small home theater environment.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theater environment into the home,
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On the AVC-A1XVA, when the Home THX Cinema mode is on, THX post-processing is
automatically added after the Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS decoder:
Re-EQTM
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film
soundtracks are designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the
correct tonal balance for listening to a movie soundtrack in a normal home environment.
Timbre MatchingTM
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theater, there is
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theater, only two speakers located to the side of
your head are used. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the
tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.
Adaptive DecorrelationTM
In a movie theater, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, while in a home theater there
are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The
surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly
changes one surround channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position
and creates—with only two speakers—the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theater.
THX Ultra2TM
Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2 certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products
you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including
power amplifier performance, pre-amplifier performance and operation, as well as hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog
domain.
In addition to improvements to the power amplifier with respect to previous THX Ultra standards, three surround modes have been added:
the THX Ultra2 Cinema mode, THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode
188
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, new
THX processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround
sounds.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2 Cinema mode
if the appropriate flag has been encoded.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that you
are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema mode
will apply processing to provide optimum replay.
THX Music Mode
For the replay of 5.1 multi-channel music the THX Music Mode should be selected. In this mode new THX processing is applied to the
surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS and Dolby Digital to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
THX Games Mode
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied
to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game
audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition
of audio in all points of the surround field.
Advanced Speaker Array™ (ASA)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround
sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround
Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the
room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart,
you will need to go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which will reoptimize the surround sound-field.
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX MusicMode and THX Games Mode.
Boundary Gain Compensation
If your chosen listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic reasons) results in the most of the listeners being close to the rear wall, the
resulting bass level can be sufficiently reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound quality becomes “boomy”. THX Ultra2 receivers and
controllers contain the BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation) feature to provide an improved bass balance. BGC can be selected by choosing
“THX Ultra2 Subwoofer–Yes” from the “Boundary Gain Compensation” section of the THX Audio setup menu.
THX and Re-EQ, THX Timbre Matching, THX Adaptive Decorrelation, and THX Advanced Speaker Array are trademarks of THX Ltd.
THX may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
[6] THX™ Surround EX™
In 1999, a new surround system was launched simultaneously with the release of the movie “Star Wars Episode I”. “Dolby Digital Surround
EX” is a new movie sound track that greatly enhances the sense of spatial expression and the positioning of the surround channel sound. The
result is 360 degrees of movement and moving sound effects that seem to pass right over the listener’s head.
This system was developed jointly by THX and Dolby Laboratories, fusing THX’s idea of improving spatial expression and achieving a uniform
360 degree sound positioning with Dolby Laboratories’ matrix encoding technology. Emphasis was placed on compatibility with the existing
system Dolby Digital 5.1-channel, and the new “surround back (SB) channel” was added to achieve improvements over the conventional 5.1channel system in terms of the positioning of the sound at the rear, the acoustic image of sound moving from the two sides to the back as
well as sound moving from the front to the center rear with the multi surround speaker systems used in movie theaters, thereby enabling
various types of surround sound.
The surround back channel signal is a matrix-encoded signal inserted into both the Dolby Digital SL (surround left) and SR (surround right)
channels. Upon playback, the signals are decoded by a high precision digital matrix decoder within the Dolby Digital decoder into the SL, SR
and SB channels and output as 6.1 channels of signals. With the AVC-A1XVA, the signals further undergo Home THX Cinema processing to
achieve a THX Surround EX system.
Even without the proper environment for playing the SB channel, Dolby Digital Surround EX signals are 100% compatible with existing 5.1channel playback systems, so they can be played as such. In this case, the SB channel signal is produced as a monaural signal from both the
SL and SR channels, so none of the signal components are missing. The effects specific to THX Surround EX (the sense of spatial expression
and the positioning of the sound), however, are the same as with conventional 5.1-channel surround systems.
THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX is a
trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
189
Audyssey MultEQ XT
There are several factors that can degrade the sound from even the best loudspeakers in a listening room. One of the most important is the
interaction of sound from the loudspeakers with large surfaces such as walls, the floor, and the ceiling in the room. Even with careful loudspeaker
placement and acoustical treatments, there are significant problems that are caused by room acoustics. These include reflections from nearby
surfaces and standing waves that are created between large parallel surfaces in the room.
In a home theater the situation is further complicated because there are several listening locations. The effects of room acoustics on the sound
arriving at each person’s ears are very different and the result is a listening experience that is degraded in a different way for every person in the
room. It is not uncommon to have variations in two adjacent seats that are as large as 10 dB, particularly in the frequency range below 250 Hz.
The solution to this problem is to apply room correction after precisely measuring how each loudspeaker interacts with the room. Because the
room causes variations in the frequency response of the loudspeakers that are so large from seat to seat, it is important to measure each
loudspeaker at several locations in the listening room. This should be done even if there is only one listener. Measurement at a single location is
not representative of the acoustical problems in the room and will, in most cases, degrade overall performance.
Audyssey MultEQ XT is the only technology that can achieve room correction for multiple listeners in a large listening area. It does so by
combining the data collected at several points in the room from each loudspeaker and then applying correction that minimizes the acoustical
effects of the room and is matched to the frequency resolution of human perception (known as psychoacoustics). Furthermore, MultEQ XT
correction is applied both in frequency and time domains and so there are no artifacts (such as smearing of sound or modal ringing) that are
sometimes associated with traditional methods of room equalization.
In addition to correcting frequency response problems over a wide listening area, Audyssey MultEQ XT provides a completely automated sound
system set-up process. It identifies how many loudspeakers are connected to the amplifiers and whether they are full-range, satellites, or
subwoofers. If there is a least one subwoofer connected, Audyssey MultEQ XT determines the optimum crossover frequency between each
satellite and the subwoofer(s). It automatically checks the polarity of each loudspeaker and alerts the user if there are any that may be wired outof-phase relative to the others. It measures the distance to each loudspeaker from the main listening position and adjusts the delays so that sound
from each loudspeaker arrives at the same time. Finally, Audyssey MultEQ XT determines the playback level of each loudspeaker and adjusts the
volume trims so that all levels are equal.
The two diagrams below illustrate two examples of microphone placement for two types of seating arrangements. There are six measuring
positions shown in each case. Increasing the number of measuring points will provide a better sampling of the listening area and produce better
results. The dotted line represents the area in which the room correction provided by Audyssey MultEQ XT is optimal. The microphone must be
placed at ear height at each location.
• Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. It is licensed under US and National Patent
Applications 20030235318 and 10/700,220. Additional U.S. and Foreign Patents pending. MultEQ and the
Audyssey MultEQ logo are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.. All rights reserved.
HDCD® (High Definition Compatible Digital®)
HDCD is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining compatibility
with the conventional CD format, thus expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution.
Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified automatically to select the optimum digital processing.
•
190
®, HDCD®, High Definition Compatible Digital® and Microsoft® are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. HDCD system
manufactured under license from Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or more of
the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074, 5,640,161, 5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311,
5,872,531, and in Australia: 669114. Other patents pending.
DENON LINK (DENON Digital Link)
High-grade LPCM 24-bit, 96-kHz, 6-channel or 24-bit, 192-kHz, 2-channel digital input is possible when the AVC-A1XVA is connected via a shielded
twisted pair (STP) cable to a Denon DVD player that supports Denon Digital Link, Since Denon Digital Link uses low-voltage differential signaling
(LVDS), transfer capabilities of greater than 1.2 Gbps at a differential voltage of approximately 0.3Vpp are possible.
About IEEE1394
IEEE1394 is an international standard established by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) of the United States.
The AVC-A1XVA can be connected to an IEEE1394 compatible device using an IEEE1394 cable to enable digital transfer of multi-channel audio
sources (DVD Audio discs, Super Audio CDs, etc.) with a single cable.
• The AVC-A1XVA’s transfer format is compatible with A&M protocol.
In addition to A&M protocol, IEEE1394 transfer formats also include MPEG-TS, DV, etc.
• The AVC-A1XVA is compatible with a data transfer speed of up to S400.
The IEEE1394 maximum data transfer speeds are defined as approximately 100, 200 or 400 Mbps, expressed respectively as S100, S200 and
S400. When S100 or S200 devices are connected, the actually transfer rate may be slower than 400 Mbps, depending on the device’s
specifications. As far as possible, interconnect devices with the same maximum data transfer rate.
• The AVC-A1XVA is compatible with the DTCP (Digital Transmission Content Protection) system.
2 Copyright protection system
In order to play the sound of DVD Audio discs, Super Audio CDs or DVDs (aside from freely copiable discs) using IEEE1394 connections,
both the player and receiver must be compatible with the DTCP (Digital Transmission Content Protection) system.
DTCP is a copy protection technology that involves data encryption and authentication of the other device. Refer to your player’s operating
instructions.
The AVC-A1XVA’s IEEE1394 device interface is designed based on the standards below.
1) IEEE Std. 1394a-2000, Standard for High Performance Serial Bus
2) Audio and Music Data Transmission Protcol 2.0
It is compatible with IEC60958 bit stream, DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD within AM824 sequence adaptation layers within these
About HDMI
“HDMI” is the abbreviation of “High-Definition Multimedia Interface”.
This is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs developed based on the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) used for computer displays, etc.,
and optimized for use in non-professional equipment. With it, non-compressed digital video and multi-channel audio signals can be transferred
with a single connector, eliminating the need to use separate cables for the picture and sound and making it possible to make connectors smaller.
HDMI is also compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents Protection), a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital
video signals in the same was as with DVI.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC.
Advanced AL24 Processing
2 Equipped with “Advanced AL24 Processing” – time base area data quantity extension
In addition to “AL24 Processing Plus”, the conventional bit extension technology, the PCM signal (CD/digital) playback system also includes
the newly developed “Advanced AL24 Processing”, a unique high speed signal detection and processing technology that greatly improves
the amount of data in the time base area. In addition to extension of the original 16-bit data into 24 bits, “Advanced AL24 Processing”
conducts data interpolation on the time axis, in other words up-convert sampling, to achieve natural interpolation processing without harming
the original data. In addition, the digital filter offers expanded flexibility, including pulse response with no ringing. Optimum filtering
processing is performed even for pulsive music data and attack sounds. All this makes it possible to recreate the delicate nuances of the
music and such space information as the positions of the performers, the width, height and depth of the place of the performance (stage),
and so on.
191
Windows Media Connect
This is a media server provided free of charge by Microsoft since October 2004.
It operates with all types of music jukebox programs, but is optimum with Windows Media Player Ver. 10.
Windows Media Connect can be used to play playlists created on jukebox software such as Windows Media Player Ver. 10, as well as WMA,
DRM WMA, MP3 and WAV files.
2 Explanation for installing Windows Media Connect
1. If installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2 is not yet complete, either download free of charge from Microsoft or via the Windows Update
installer.
2. Download the latest version of Windows Media Player Ver. 10 either directly from Microsoft or using the Windows Update installer.
3. Download Windows Media Connect (usable since October 12, 2004) either directly from Microsoft or using the Windows Update installer.
vTuner
This is an Internet radio free online contents server.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.
vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.
Windows Media DRM
A copyright-protected technology developed by Microsoft.
• The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (“WM-DRM”) to protect the
integrity of their content (“Secure Content”) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This
device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (“WM-DRM Software”). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has
been compromised, owners of Secure Content (“Secure Content Owners”) way request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software's right
to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software’s ability to play
unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from
the Internet or from PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure
Content Owners.
192
Surround modes and parameters
Signals and adjustability in the different modes
Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)
Channel output
Surround Mode
FRONT CENTER
L/R
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
DSD DIRECT
DSD MULTI DIRECT
MULTI CH DIRECT
STEREO
EXT.IN
MULTI CH IN
WIDE SCREENHOME
HOME THX CINEMA (2ch)
HOME THX CINEMA (5.1ch)
DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx
DOLBY PRO LOGIC II
DTS NEO:6
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS SURROUND
7CH STEREO
SUPER STADIUM
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
CLASSIC CONCERT
MONO MOVIE
VIDEO GAME
MATRIX
VIRTURL
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
SURROUND SURROUND SUB- D. COMP
L/R
BACK L/R WOOFER
*1
E
E
B
B
E
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
E
E
E
B
B
E
B
B
B
B
B
B
E
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
E
E
E
B
B
E
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
E
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
C (OFF)
E
E
E
C (OFF)
E
E
C (OFF)
E
E
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
LFE
*2
C
C
C
C
C
(0 dB)
(0 dB)
(0 dB)
(0 dB)
(0 dB)
E
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
E
C (0 dB)
E
E
E
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
SB CH
AFDM
OUT
*1 (MODE)
TONE
CONTROL
CINEMA
EQ.
MODE
(DECODER)
E
E
E
C (ON)
E
E
C (ON)
E
E
C (ON)
E
E
E
C (ON)
C (ON)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (0 dB)
E
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
E
E
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (NOTE1)
C (NOTE2)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (OFF)
E
E
C (NOTE3)
C (NOTE4)
C (NOTE3)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (PLIIx C)
E
C (CINEMA)
C (CINEMA)
C (CINEMA)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
Signals and adjustability in the different modes
Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)
Surround Mode
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
DSD DIRECT
DSD MULTI DIRECT
MULTI CH DIRECT
STEREO
EXT.IN
MULTI CH IN
WIDE SCREEN
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
HOME THX CINEMA (2ch)
E
HOME THX CINEMA (5.1ch)
DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx
E
DOLBY PRO LOGIC II
E
DTS NEO:6
E
DOLBY DIGITAL
E
DTS SURROUND
E
7CH STEREO
E
SUPER STADIUM
C (Medium)
ROCK ARENA
C (Medium)
JAZZ CLUB
C (Medium)
CLASSIC CONCERT
C (Medium)
MONO MOVIE
C (Medium)
VIDEO GAME
C (Medium)
MATRIX
E
E
VIRTURL
EFFECT
LEVEL
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (ON, 10)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (10)
C (10)
C (10)
C (10)
C (10)
C (10)
E
E
NIGHT
mode
C (OFF)
E
E
E
C (OFF)
E
E
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
E
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
NEO:6 MUSIC
MODE only
EXT. IN
only
CENTER
WIDTH
CENTER
IMAGE
SW ATT
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (3)
C (3)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (0.3)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
PRO LOGIC II/IIx MUSIC MODE only
Dolby Digital
ROOM
SIZE
SUBWOOFER
DELAY TIME
ON/OFF
PANORAMA DIMENSION
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (30 msec)
E
C : Signal / Adjustable
E : No signal / Not adjustable
B : Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (3)
C (3)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C : Able
E : Unable
NOTE1 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB
NOTE2 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE +4 dB
NOTE3 : This parameter is available when the “MODE” is set to “CINEMA”.
NOTE4 : This parameter is available when the “MODE” is set to “CINEMA”
or “PL”.
*1: When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
*2: When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD.
193
2 Differences in surround mode names depending on the input signals
Input signals
DTS
Surround Mode
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
STEREO
HOME THX CINEMA
DOLBY DIGITAL
ANALOG
LINEAR PCM
DTS (5.1 ch)
DTS 96/24 (5.1 ch)
DTS (6.1 ch)
D. D. (2 ch)
D. D. (5.1 ch)
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
PLIIx C+THX
PLIIx C+THX
✳ES MTRX6.1+THX
✳ES MTRX6.1+THX
B ES DSCRT6.1+THX
PLIIx C+THX
✳THX SURROUND EX
PLII C+THX
PLII C+THX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Ultra2 Cinema
✳ES MTRX6.1+THX
PLII C+THX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
DOLBY PL+THX
DOLBY PL+THX
THX MUSIC MODE
THX MUSIC MODE
THX Ultra2 Cinema
DOLBY PL+THX
THX MUSIC MODE
NEO:6 C+THX
NEO:6 C+THX
THX GAMES MODE
THX GAMES MODE
THX MUSIC MODE
NEO:6 C+THX
THX GAMES MODE
THX GAMES MODE
THX GAMES MODE
PLIIx C+THX
PLIIx C+THX
THX GAMES MODE
THX GAMES MODE
PLIIx C+THX
THX5.1
THX5.1
PLIIx C+THX
THX5.1
THX5.1
DTS SURROUND
E
E
✳DTS+Neo:6
✳DTS 96/24
B DTS ES DSCRT6.1
DTS SURROUND
DTS 96/24+Neo:6
DTS MTRX6.1
DTS+PLIIx
DTS+PLIIx
E
E
✳DTS+Neo:6
DTS SURROUND
DTS+PLIIx
DTS NEO:6
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS NEO:6
DTS NEO:6
E
E
E
DTS NEO:6
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
✳DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL+PLIIx
DOLBY PRO LOGIC II
DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx
✳DOLBY
✳DOLBY
PRO LOGIC IIx
PRO LOGIC IIx
PRO LOGIC II
PRO LOGIC II
C
C
DSP SIMULATION
C:
✳:
B:
E:
194
E
E
E
✳DOLBY
E
PRO LOGIC IIx
PRO LOGIC II
C
C
C
Selectable
The surround mode name differs depending on the “MODE/SB CH OUT” surround parameter setting.
The surround mode name differs depending on the input signal.
Not selectable
C
C
Relationship between the video input signal and monitor output according to the VIDEO
CONVERT MODE settings of MAIN ZONE
Video convert
ON
Input signals
HDMI
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
COMPONENT
E
E
E
E
C (1080p)
C (480p ~ 720p)
C (480i/576i)
C (1080p)
C (480p ~ 720p)
C (480i/576i)
C (1080p)
C (480p ~ 720p)
C (480i/576i)
C (1080p)
C (480p ~ 720p)
C (480i/576i)
E
E
E
E
C (1080p)
C (480p ~ 720p)
C (480i/576i)
C (1080p)
C (480p ~ 720p)
C (480i/576i)
C (1080p)
C (480p ~ 720p)
C (480i/576i)
C (1080p)
C (480p ~ 720p)
C (480i/576i)
S-VIDEO VIDEO
E
E
E
C
C
E
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
C
E
C
C
E
C
E
C
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
C
C
E
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
C
E
C
C
E
C
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C : Signal input
E : No signal
480p ~ 720p : 480p/576p/1080i/720p
NOTES:
• The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with
the following format: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N,
PAL-M and PAL-60.
• When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the
signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video connector.
• When the input signal is set to component video 1080p, the
signals cannot be output to the HDMI monitor output terminal.
HDMI
E
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
E
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳2
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
✳1
HDMI
✳1
HDMI
✳1
HDMI
✳2
HDMI
✳2
HDMI
✳2
HDMI
✳2
HDMI
✳2
HDMI
✳2
MONITOR OUT
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
E
E
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
E
COMPONENT
E
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT ✳1
VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳1
VIDEO ✳3
COMPONENT ✳1 COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
E
E
VIDEO ✳2
VIDEO
S-VIDEO ✳2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO ✳2
S-VIDEO
E
COMPONENT
E
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT ✳1
VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳1
VIDEO ✳3
COMPONENT ✳1 COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
E
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
E
E
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
E
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
E
E
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
E : Not output
1.HDMI MONITOR OUT:
When there is no HDMI input signal and “HDMI” is selected for the “Scaler”
setting, the signal is output as set with the “Resolution” setting.
When “Component” is selected for the “Scaler” setting, the signal is output
with the same resolution as the input signal.
2.COMPONENT MONITOR OUT
When “Component” is selected for the “Scaler” setting, the signal is output
as set with the “Resolution” setting. However, the output resolution is
limited to a maximum of 480p/576p if the input signal is copyright-protected.
✳1
: On screen display superimposed on video signal and output.
✳2
: On screen display superimposed on S-Video signal and output.
✳3
: Video signals are not output when the analog to HDMI convert function
is set to “ON”.
: When “OFF” is selected for the “Analog to HDMI Convert” setting, no
video signals other than the HDMI input signal are output.
: On screen display only displayed for SYSTEM SETUP, SURROUND
PARAMETER and OSD buttons.
195
Video convert
S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
OFF
–
–
–
Used
Not used
–
–
–
Used
Not used
–
–
–
Used
Not used
–
–
–
Used
Not used
HDMI
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Input signals
COMPONENT
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
HDMI
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
S-VIDEO VIDEO
E
E
E
C
C
E
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
C
C
E
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
C
C
E
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
C
C
E
C
C
C
C
✳1
✳2
C : Signal input
E : No signal
✳1
✳1
✳2
✳2
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳2
✳2
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳2
✳2
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳2
✳2
✳1
MONITOR OUT
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
E
E
✳1
E
E
✳1
E
✳2
S-VIDEO
E
✳2
S-VIDEO
E
✳1
S-VIDEO
E
COMPONENT ✳1
E
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳1
S-VIDEO
E
E
✳1
E
E
✳1
E
✳2
S-VIDEO
E
✳2
S-VIDEO
E
S-VIDEO
✳1
E
COMPONENT
E
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳1
✳1
VIDEO
E
VIDEO
E
VIDEO
VIDEO
E
VIDEO
E
VIDEO
VIDEO
E
VIDEO
E
VIDEO
VIDEO
E
VIDEO
E
VIDEO
VIDEO
✳2
✳2
✳2
✳2
✳2
✳2
✳2
✳2
: On screen display superimposed on video signal and output.
: On screen display superimposed on S-Video signal and output.
: When “Off” is selected for the “Analog to HDMI Convert” setting, no
video signals other than the HDMI input signal are output.
: On screen display only displayed for SYSTEM SETUP, SURROUND
PARAMETER and OSD buttons.
Relationship between the video input signal and monitor output according to the VIDEO
CONVERT MODE settings of ZONE2
VIDEO CONVERT Mode
ON
MONITOR OUT
Input signals
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
E
C
C
E
E
C
C
C
E
C
E
C
E
C
COMPONENT
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
✳1
✳2
✳2
Input signals
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
E
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO CONVERT
Mode
S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
E
C
C
C
E
E
C
C
C
C
E
C
C
E
C
E
C
C
E
E
E
E
COMPONENT
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳1
E
S-VIDEO
OFF
–
–
Used
Not used
–
–
–
Used
Not used
C : Signal input
E : No signal
• The ZONE2 video conversion function is compatible with the NTSC and PAL formats.
196
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
E
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
E
✳ VIDEO
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
–
E
E
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
–
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
E
✳ VIDEO
VIDEO
E
VIDEO
E
✳ VIDEO
VIDEO
: Not output
: No OSD
: On screen display only displayed for
SYSTEM SETUP, SURR.PARA and
OSD buttons
COMPONENT ✳1 : On screen display superimposed on
video signal and output
COMPONENT ✳2 : On screen display superimposed on SVideo signal and output
18 SPECIFICATIONS
2 Audio section
• Power amplifier
Rated output:
Dynamic power:
Output terminals:
• Analog
Input sensitivity / input impedance:
Frequency response:
S/N:
Distortion:
Rated output:
• Digital
D/A output:
Front:
170 W + 170 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05% T.H.D.)
220 W + 220 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7% T.H.D.)
Center:
170 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05% T.H.D.)
220 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7% T.H.D.)
Surround (A, B):
170 W + 170 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05% T.H.D.)
220 W + 220 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7% T.H.D.)
Surround Back:
170 W + 170 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05% T.H.D.)
220 W + 220 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7% T.H.D.)
190 W x 2 ch
(8 Ω/ohms)
310 W x 2 ch
(4 Ω/ohms)
All channels:
6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms
200 mV / 47 kΩ/kohms
10 Hz ~ 100 kHz: +0, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)
105 dB (DIRECT mode)
0.005% (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)
1.2 V
Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.003% (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 125 dB
Dynamic range — 117 dB
Format — Digital audio interface
Digital input:
• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)
Input sensitivity:
2.5 mV
RIAA deviation:
±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
S/N:
74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)
Rated output / Maximum output:
150 mV / 8 V
Distortion factor:
0.03% (1 kHz, 3 V)
2 Video section
• Standard video jacks
Input / output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
• S-Video jacks
Input / output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
• Color component video terminal
Input / output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB
Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
C (color) signal — 0.3 (PAL) / 0.286 (NTSC) Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB
Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PB/CB (blue) signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PR/CR (red) signal — 0.7Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 100 MHz — +0, –3 dB
2 General
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Maximum external dimensions:
Mass:
AC 230 V, 50 Hz
850 W
1 W Max (Standby)
434 (W) x 280 (H) x 505 (D) mm
44.0 kg
2 Remote control unit (RC-1036)
Batteries:
External dimensions:
Mass:
LR6/AA Type (two batteries)
63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm
190 g (including batteries)
* For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
197
LIST OF PRESET CODES
DVD
Bush
40516, 40672, 40690, 40695, 40699, 40713,
3D Lab
40539
40717, 40730, 40778, 40831, 40833, 40884,
Acoustic Solutions
40713, 40730, 41242
41051, 41165
Advent
41016
C-Tech
AEG
40770, 40790
Cambridge Soundworks
AFK
41051
Afreey
40698
Cat
Aim
40699, 40778, 40833, 41165
CAVS
41057
Airis
41250
CCE
40730
Aiwa
40533, 40641
Celestial
41020
Akai
40690, 40705, 40770, 40790, 40884, 40899,
Centrex
40672, 41004
41089, 41115
Centrum
40713
40699
CGV
41115
Akura
41051
Changhong
40627, 41061
Alba
40539, 40672, 40695, 40699, 40713, 40717,
Cinea
40831
40730, 40783, 41051
Cineral
40730
Alco
40790
Cinetec
40713
Allegro
40869
cineULTRA
40699
Amitech
40770, 40784, 40850
CineVision
40833, 40869, 40876
Citizen
41277
Akira
Amphion Media Works
40798
40690
40699, 41087
40872
Classic
40730, 41730
Amstrad
40713
Clatronic
40672, 41165
AMW
40872
Clayton
40713
Ansonic
40774, 40831
Coby
40730, 40770, 40778, 40852, 41086, 41107,
Apex
40672, 41061
Apex Digital
40672, 40717, 40755, 40794, 40796, 40797,
Compacks
40826, 41265
40516, 40672, 40798, 40852, 41004
41115, 41165, 41177, 41351
40830, 41004, 41020, 41056, 41061, 41100
Conia
Arianet
40770
Continental Edison
40768, 40831
Aspire Digital
41168, 41407
Craig
40831
Audiosonic
40690, 41265
Crown
40690, 40769, 40770, 41115
Audiovox
40717, 40790, 41041, 41071, 41072, 41121,
Curtis Mathes
41087
41122
Cybercom
40831
Awa
40730, 40872
CyberHome
40816, 40874, 41023, 41024, 41117, 41129
Axion
40730, 41071, 41072
Cydectin
41074
B&K
40655, 40662
Cytron
40651, 40774
Basic Line
40713
D-Vision
41115
Baze
41165
Daenyx
40872
Bellagio
41004
Daewoo
40705, 40770, 40784, 40833, 40869, 40872,
Black Diamond
40698, 40713, 40833, 40884
Blaupunkt
40717
Daewoo International 40872
Blue Parade
40571
Dansai
40770, 40783, 41115
Blue Sky
40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40769, 40778,
Dantax
40539, 40713, 40790, 41089
40804
Daytek
40872
41004
Dayton
40872
Boman
40783
DCE
40831
Brainwave
40770, 41115
DEC
40774, 40778
Brandt
40503, 40651
Decca
40770, 41115
Broksonic
40695, 40868
Denon
40490, 40634, *[41470], 41634
Boghe
198
41169, 41172, 41234, 41242
Denver
40699, 40778, 41107, 41165, 41353, 41359
Desav
40770
Goodmans
40651, 40690, 40713, 40730, 40783, 40790,
Desay
40800, 41407
GPX
40699, 40769
Diamond
40651, 40768, 40790
Gradiente
40651
40833, 41004, 41730
Gran Prix
40831
40833, 41730
Grandin
40672, 40713
Digihome
40713
Greenhill
40717
digiRED
40717
Grundig
40539, 40651, 40670, 40695, 40705, 40713,
Dick Smith Electronics
40790, 41004, 41730
Digitor
40651, 40690
Digitrex
40672, 41056, 41100
Grunkel
40770
DIGIXmedia
40826
GVG
41169
DiK
40774, 40831
H&B
40850
Disney
40675, 41270
H&B
40713, 40850
DiViDo
40705
Hanseatic
40741, 40783
DK Digital
40831
Harman/Kardon
40582, 40702
DMTech
40783
HDT
40705
Dragon
40831
Hen
40713
DSE
40833, 41730
Hher
40651, 40713, 40826, 40831
Dual
40651, 40713, 40730, 40783, 40790, 40831,
Hitachi
40573, 40664, 40695, 40713, 41247
41068, 41085
Hiteker
40672, 40872
40713, 40831, 41003, 41127
Home Electronics
40730
DVD2000
40521
Home Tech
41107
DVX
40768
Humax
40646
ECC
40730
Hyundai
40768, 40783, 40850
Electrohome
40770, 40784
I-Lo
41348
Elfunk
40850
iLo
41348
Elin
40770
Initial
40717, 40839
Ellion
40850
Integra
40571, 40627, 41634
Elta
40672, 40690, 40770, 40850, 41051, 41115
IRT
40783
Emerson
40591, 40675, 40705, 40816, 40821, 41268
ISP
40695
Encore
40698
Jaton
41078
Enterprise
40591
JBL
40702
Enzer
40770, 40784
Jeken
40699
EuroLine
41115
Jensen
41016
Fenner
40651, 40769
Jepssen
41250
Ferguson
40651
JMB
40695
Finlux
40591, 40672, 40741, 40770, 40783, 41165
JNC
40672
Fintec
40784, 41169
JSI
41423
Firstline
40651, 40713, 40869
JVC
40503, 40539, 40558, 40623, 40867, 41164
Fisher
40670
jWin
41049, 41051
Funai
40675, 40695, 41334
Karcher
40783
Gateway
41073, 41077, 41158
Kawasaki
40790
GE
40522, 40717, 40815
Kendo
40699, 40713, 40831
General Electric
40717
Kennex
40713, 40770
Global Solutions
40768
Kenwood
40490, 40534
Durabrand
Go Video
40715, 40741, 40744, 40783, 40833, 40869,
Kiiro
40770
41044, 41075, 41099, 41144, 41158, 41304,
KLH
40717, 40790, 41020, 41149
41730
KLH Digital
40717
Go Vision
41071, 41072
Konka
40711, 40719, 40720, 40721
GoldStar
40591, 40741
Koss
40651, 40896, 41423
199
Landel
40826
Momitsu
41082
Lasonic
40798, 41173
MTlogic
41265
Lawson
40768
Mustek
40730, 41730
Lenco
40651, 40699, 40713, 40770, 40774, 40778,
Mx Onda
40651
41165
NAD
40591, 40692, 40741
40690, 41127
Naiko
40770, 41004
Lexia
40699, 40768
Narita
41115
LG
40591, 40741, 40790, 40801, 40869, 40036
NEC
40591, 40692, 40785, 40869, 41404
Lifetec
40651, 40831
Nesa
40717
Limit
40768
Nevir
40770, 40831
LiteOn
41058, 41158, 41416, 41440
NextBase
40826
Loewe
40511, 40539, 40741
NexxTech
41402
Logix
40705, 40783
Nintaus
41051
Lumatron
40705, 40741, 40833, 41115
Norcent
40872, 41003, 41107, 41265
Lunatron
40741
Nordmende
40774, 40831
Luxman
40573
Noriko
40752
Luxor
40713, 41004, 41730
Nu-Tec
40516
Magnasonic
40651, 40769
Okano
40752
Magnavox
40503, 40539, 40646, 40675, 40713, 40821
Olidata
40672
Magnex
41165
Omni
40690, 40698, 40778, 40833
Malata
40782, 41159
Onix
40672, 40852
Manhattan
40705, 40713
Onkyo
40503, 40627, 40792
Marantz
40539
Oopla
41158
Mark
40713
Optimus
40525
Marquant
40770
OptoMedia Electronics
Matsui
40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40884, 41004,
Lenoxx
40896
41730
Orion
40695
Maxim
40713, 40872
Oritron
40651
MBO
40690, 40730, 41730
Ormond
40713
MDS
40778
Otic
40826
Mecotek
40770
P&B
40770
Medion
40630, 40651, 40770, 40774, 40783, 40820,
Pacific
40695, 40713, 40768, 40774, 40790, 40804,
40831
40831
MEI
40790
Packard Bell
40770
Memorex
40695, 40831, 41270
Palladium
40695
Metronic
40690
Palsonic
40672, 40852
Metz
40525, 40571, 40713
Panasonic
40490, 40503, 40703, 41362, 41462, 41490,
Micromedia
40503, 40539
Micromega
40539
Panda
Microsoft
40522
Philco
40690, 40790
Microstar
40831
Philips
40503, 40539, 40646, 40675, 40854, 41158,
Minato
40752
Minax
40713
Phonotrend
Minerva
40705
Pioneer
40490, 40525, 40571, 40631
Minoka
40770
Plu2
40850
41762
40717
41260, 41267, 41354
40672, 40699, 41165
Minowa
41165
Pointer
40784
Mintek
40717, 40839
Polaroid
41020, 41061, 41086
Mirror
40752
Polk Audio
40539
Mitsubishi
40521, 40713, 41403, 41521
Portland
40770
Mizuda
40770
Powerpoint
40872
200
Powtek
40852
Shinco
40717
Prima
41016
Shinsonic
40533, 40839
Prinz
40831
Silva
40831
Prism
40705
Silva Schneider
40831
Proline
40651, 40672, 40833, 41004
Singer
40690, 40768
Proscan
40522
Skantic
40539, 40713, 41003
Proson
40713
Skymaster
40730, 40768
Prosonic
40752
Slim Art
40784
ProVision
40699, 40778
Slim Devices
40533
Qwestar
40651
SM Electronic
40690, 40730, 40768
Radionette
40741, 40869
Smart
40705, 40713
RCA
40522, 40571, 40717, 40769, 40790, 40822,
Sonai
40755
41022, 41132
Sonashi
40831
REC
40490
Sonic Blue
40783, 40869, 41099
Recco
40698
Sony
40533, 40573, 40864, 41033, 41431, 41533
Red Star
40770, 41003
Soundmaster
40768
Reoc
40752, 40768
Soundmax
40768
Resonance
40651
Soundwave
40783
Revoy
40699
Sova
41122
Rio
40869
Spectra
40872
RJTech
41360
Standard
40651, 40768, 40831
Roadstar
40690, 40699, 40713, 40730, 40833, 41051
Star Cluster
40768
Ronin
40872
Strong
40713
Rotel
40558, 40623
Sungale
41074
Rowa
40516, 40717, 40823, 40872, 41004
Sunkai
40770, 40850
Saba
40651, 40769
Sunstech
40831
Sabaki
40798
Superscan
40821
Saivod
40831
Supervision
40768
Sakyno
40768
SVA
40672, 40717, 40860, 41105
Salora
40741
Sylvania
40630, 40675, 40821, 41268
Sampo
40698, 40752
Symphonic
40675
Samsung
40490, 40573, 40744, 40820, 40899, 41044,
Synn
40768
41075
Tandberg
40713
Sansui
40695, 40768, 40784
Tatung
40770
Sanyo
40670, 40695, 40873
Teac
40516, 40571, 40692, 40695, 40717, 40741,
Scan
40705, 40850
ScanMagic
40730
Technics
40490, 40703
Schaub Lorenz
40770, 41115
Technika
40768, 40770, 40831, 41115, 41165
Schneider
40539, 40651, 40705, 40713, 40774, 40783,
Technisson
41115
40768, 40790, 40809, 40833, 41051
40790, 40804, 40831
Technosonic
40730, 41051, 41115
Schwaiger
40752
Techwood
40692, 40713
Scientific Labs
40768, 40798
Tedelex
40690, 40768, 41004
Scott
40651, 40672, 40797
Telefunken
40770, 40790, 40833
SEG
40713, 40768, 40798, 40872, 40884
Teletech
40713, 40768
Semp
40503
Tensai
40651, 40690, 40770
Sensory Science
41158
Terapin
41031
Shanghai
40672
Tevion
40651, 40768, 40798, 40833
Sharp
40630, 40675, 40713, 40752, 41256
Theta Digital
40571
Sharper Image
41117
Thomson
40522
Sherwood
40633, 40717, 40741, 40770, 41043, 41077
Tokai
40698, 40784, 40790
201
Tokaido
40698
CyberHome
41129
Toshiba
40503, 40695, 41045, 41154
Denon
40490
Trans Continens
40826
Dick Smith Electronics
TRANS-continents
40826, 40831, 40872
Transonic
40672, 40730, 41165
Digitrex
41056
Tredex
40800, 40803, 40804
DSE
41730
Trio
40770, 40784
Funai
40675, 41334
TYT
40705
Gateway
41073, 41158
Umax
40690
Go Video
40741, 41158, 41304, 41730
United
40672, 40695, 40768, 40826, 40852, 41115,
iLo
41348
41165
41730
JVC
41164
Universal Multimedia 40768
LG
40741
Universum
40591, 40713, 40741, 40869
LiteOn
41158, 41416, 41440
Urban Concepts
40503
Loewe
40741
US Logic
40839
Magnavox
40646
V
41064
Mitsubishi
41403
Venturer
40790
Mustek
41730
Vestel
40713
NEC
41404
Vieta
40705
Panasonic
40490
VInc
41064, 41226
Philips
40646, 41158
Vizio
41064, 41226
Pioneer
40631
Vocopro
41027
Polaroid
41086
Voxson
40690, 40730, 40774, 40831
RCA
40522
Walkvision
40717
Samsung
40490
Welkin
40831
Sensory Science
41158
Wellington
40713
Sharp
40675
Wesder
40699
Sony
41033, 41431
Wharfedale
40698, 40752, 40768, 40790
Sylvania
40675
Wilson
40831
Zenith
40741
Windsor
40713
Windy Sam
40573
VCR
WIZE
41115
ABS
Xbox
40522
Accent
20072
Xenius
40651, 40790
Admiral
20048, 20209, 20479
XLogic
40768, 40798
Adventura
20000
XMS
40770
Adyson
20072
Xoro
41173, 41250
Aiko
20278
Yakumo
41004, 41056
Aim
20209, 20278, 20642
Yamada
40872, 41004, 41056, 41158
Aiwa
20000, 20032, 20037, 20124, 20209, 20315,
Yamaha
40490, 40539, 40545, 40646
Yamakawa
40872
Akai
20037, 20041, 20081, 20175, 20240, 20315,
21972
20348, 20479
20348, 20642
Yukai
40730, 41730
Zenith
40503, 40591, 40741, 40869
Akashi
20072
Zeus
40784
Akiba
20072
Zoece
41265
Akura
20072
Alba
20000, 20072, 20081, 20209, 20278, 20315,
DVDR
20348
Apex Digital
41056
Alienware
21972
Aspire Digital
41168
Allstar
20081
Coby
41086
America Action
20278
202
American High
20035
Craig
20037, 20047, 20072, 20240
Amoisonic
20479
Crown
20037, 20072, 20278
Amstrad
20000, 20072, 20278
Curtis Mathes
20035, 20041, 20060, 20162, 21035
Anam
20037, 20162, 20226, 20240, 20278
Cybernex
20240
Anam National
20162, 20226, 21562
CyberPower
21972
Anitech
20072
Cyrus
20081
Ansonic
20000
Daewoo
20045, 20046, 20104, 20209, 20278, 20642,
Apelsound
20209
21278
Aristona
20081
Dansai
20072, 20278
ASA
20037, 20081
Daytron
20278
Asha
20240
De Graaf
20042, 20046, 20048, 20081, 20104
Asuka
20037, 20038
Decca
20000, 20067, 20081, 20209, 20348
Audiosonic
20072, 20278
Deitron
20278
Audiovox
20037, 20278
Dell
21972
Awa
20037, 20043, 20278, 20642
Denko
20072
Baird
20000, 20041, 20104
Denon
20042
Basic Line
20046, 20072, 20104, 20278
Diamant
20037
Beaumark
20240
Diamond
20209, 20348
Beko
20104
Dick Smith Electronics
Bell & Howell
20104
Bestar
20278
Digitor
Black Diamond
20081, 20642
DirecTV
20739
Black Panther
20278
Domland
20209
Blaupunkt
20081, 20162, 20226
DSE
20642
Blue Sky
20037, 20072, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20642
Dual
20000, 20041, 20081, 20278, 20348
Bondstec
20072
Dumont
20000, 20081, 20104
Brandt
20041, 20320
Durabrand
20038, 20039
Brandt Electronic
20041
Dynatech
20000
Brandt Electronique
20041
Elbe
20038, 20278
Brinkmann
20209, 20348
Elcatech
20072
Broksonic
20002, 20121, 20184, 20209, 20348, 20479,
Electrohome
20037
21479
Electrophonic
20037
20000, 20072, 20081, 20209, 20278, 20315,
Elin
20240
20348, 20642
Elsay
20072
Calix
20037
Elta
20072, 20278
Canon
20035
Emerex
20032
Carena
20209
Emerson
20000, 20002, 20035, 20037, 20043, 20045,
Carrefour
20045
20072, 20121, 20184, 20209, 20240, 20278,
Carver
20081
20294, 20479, 21278, 21479
Bush
20642
20642
Casio
20000
ESC
20240, 20278
Cathay
20278
Ferguson
20000, 20041, 20278, 20320
CCE
20072, 20278
Fidelity
20000, 20072, 20240, 20278, 20432
CGE
20000
Finlandia
20000, 20037, 20042, 20043, 20046, 20048,
Changhong
20048, 20081
Cimline
20072
Finlux
Cineral
20278
Firstline
Citizen
20037, 20278, 21278
Clatronic
20000, 20072
Fisher
20046, 20047, 20104
Colt
20072
Flint
20209, 20348
Condor
20278
Frontech
20072
20081, 20104, 20226
20000, 20042, 20081, 20104, 20315
20037, 20043, 20045, 20072, 20209, 20278,
20348
203
Fuji
20033, 20035
Hypson
20000, 20037, 20072, 20209, 20278
Fujitsu
20000, 20045
iBUYPOWER
21972
Fujitsu General
20037
Imperial
20000
Funai
20000, 21333
Ingersoll
20209, 20240
Galaxis
20278
Inno Hit
20072, 20432
Garrard
20000
inotech
20278
Gateway
21972
Interbuy
20072
GE
20035, 20048, 20060, 20209, 20226, 20240,
Interfunk
20081, 20104
20320, 20807, 21035, 21060
Internal
20278
20081
International
20037, 20278, 20642
General
20045
Intervision
20000, 20209, 20278
General Technic
20348
IR
Genexxa
20104
Gessen
20278
Irradio
20072, 20081
Go Video
20432
ITT
20041, 20046, 20104, 20240
GoldHand
20072
ITV
20037, 20278
GoldStar
20037, 20038, 20209, 20225, 20226, 20348,
JBL
20278
21237
Jensen
20041
20000, 20037, 20072, 20081, 20209, 20278,
JMB
20209, 20348
20348, 20642
Joyce
20000
20037
JVC
20041, 20045, 20067, 20081, 21008, 21283
Gradiente
20000
Kaisui
20072
Graetz
20041, 20104, 20240
Kambrook
20037
Granada
20000, 20037, 20042, 20046, 20048, 20081,
Karcher
20081, 20278
20104, 20226, 20240
KEC
20037, 20278
20000, 20037, 20072, 20209, 20278
Kendo
20072, 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348, 20642
Gronic
20104
Kenwood
20038, 20041, 20067
Grundig
20072, 20081, 20226, 20320, 20347, 20348
KIC
20000
Haaz
20348
Kimari
20047
Hanseatic
20037, 20038, 20081, 20209
Kioto
20348
Haojie
20240
KLH
20072
Harley Davidson
20000
Kneissel
20037, 20209, 20278, 20348
Harman/Kardon
20038, 20081
Kodak
20035, 20037
Harwood
20072
Kolin
20041, 20043
HCM
20072
Kolster
20209
Headquarter
20046
Korpel
20072
Hewlett Packard
21972
Kuba Electronic
20047
Hher
20278, 20642
Kyoto
20072
HI-Q
20047
Lenco
20278
Hinari
20041, 20072, 20240, 20278
Leyco
20072
Hischito
20045
LG
20037, 20038, 20042, 20045, 20209, 21237
GEC
Goodmans
GPX
Grandin
20041, 20042, 20045, 20047, 20072, 20081,
20104, 20209, 20226, 20240, 20348
*[20000], 20037, 20041, 20042, 20046,
Lifetec
20209, 20348
20081, 20089, 20240, 20040
Linksys
21972
Hornyphon
20081
Lloyd's
20000
Howard Computers
21972
Loewe
20037, 20081, 20162, 21562
HP
21972
Logik
20072, 20209, 20240
Lux May
20072
20042, 20739
Luxor
20043, 20046, 20047, 20048, 20104, 20315
Humax
20739
LXI
20037
Hush
21972
M Electronic
20000, 20038
Hitachi
Hughes Network Systems
204
Magnasonic
20278, 21278
Niveus Media
21972
Magnavox
20000, 20035, 20039, 20081, 20149, 20642,
Noblex
20240
21781
Nokia
20041, 20042, 20046, 20048, 20081, 20104,
Magnin
20240
Magnum
20642
Nordmende
20041, 20067, 20320
Manesth
20045, 20072, 20081, 20209
Northgate
21972
Marantz
20035, 20038, 20081, 20209
Novatronic
20209
Mark
20000, 20278
Nu-Tec
20209
Marta
20037
Oceanic
20000, 20041, 20046, 20048, 20081, 20104
Mastec
20642
Okano
20072, 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348
Master's
20278
Olympus
20035, 20226
Matsui
20209, 20240, 20278, 20348
Onida
20162
Matsushita
20035, 20162, 20226
Onimax
20642
Media Center PC
21972
Onkyo
20222
Medion
20209, 20348, 20642
Optimus
20037, 20048, 20104, 20162, 20432, 21062
MEI
20035
Orbit
20072
Melectronic
20000, 20037, 20038
Orion
20002, 20121, 20184, 20209, 20348, 20479,
Memorex
20240, 20278, 20315
20000, 20035, 20037, 20039, 20046, 20047,
21479
20048, 20104, 20162, 20209, 20240, 20348,
Osaki
20000, 20037, 20072
20479, 21237
Osume
20072
20072
Otake
20209
Metronic
20081
Otto Versand
20081
Metz
20037, 20081, 20162, 20226, 20347, 21562
Pacific
20000, 20348, 20642
MGA
20043, 20240
Packard Bell
21972
MGN Technology
20240
Palladium
20037, 20041, 20072, 20209, 20315, 20348
Micormay
20348
Palsonic
20000, 20037, 20072, 20642
Micromaxx
20209, 20348
Panasonic
Microsoft
21972
Memphis
20035, 20162, 20225, 20226, 20614, 20616,
21035, 21062, 21308, 21562
Mind
21972
Pathe Cinema
20043
Minolta
20042
Pathe Marconi
20041
20000, 20041, 20043, 20048, 20067, 20081,
Penney
Mitsubishi
20035, 20037, 20038, 20042, 20240, 21035,
21237
20642, 20807
Motorola
20035, 20048
Pentax
20042
MTC
20000, 20240
Perdio
20000, 20209
Multitec
20037
Philco
20000, 20035, 20038, 20072, 20209, 20226,
Multitech
20000, 20072, 20278
Murphy
20000
20479
Philips
20000, 20035, 20081, 20226, 20616, 20618,
20739
Myryad
20081
NAD
20104
Phoenix
Naiko
20642
Phonola
20081
National
20162, 20226, 20240
Pilot
20037
Nebula Electronics
20033
Pioneer
20042, 20067, 20081, 20162, 21562
NEC
20035, 20037, 20038, 20041, 20048, 20067,
Polk Audio
20081
20278
20104, 20209, 20278
Portland
20278
Neckermann
20081
Prinz
20000
Nesco
20072
Profitronic
20081, 20240
Neufunk
20209
Proline
20000, 20278, 20320, 20642
Newave
20037
Proscan
20060, 21060
Nikkai
20072, 20278
Prosonic
20278
Nikko
20037
Protec
20072
205
Protech
20081, 20278
SEI
20081
ProVision
20278
Seleco
20037, 20041
Pulsar
20039
Semp
20045
Pye
20000, 20081
Sentra
20072
Qisheng
20060
Serie Dorada
20037
Quarter
20046
Sharp
20037, 20048, 20209, 20807
Quartz
20046
Shinco
20000
Quasar
20035, 20162, 20278, 21035
Shintom
20072, 20104
Quelle
20081
Shivaki
20037
Radialva
20037, 20048
Shogun
20240
Radiola
20081
Siemens
20037, 20046, 20081, 20104, 20320, 20347
Radionette
20037
Siera
20081
RadioShack
20000, 20037
Silva
20037
Radix
20037
Silver
20278
Randex
20037
Singer
20045, 20072, 20348
Rank
20041
Sinudyne
20081, 20209
Rank Arena
20041
Smaragd
20348
RCA
Realistic
20000, 20035, 20042, 20048, 20060, 20149,
Sonic Blue
20614, 20616
20226, 20240, 20320, 20432, 20807, 20880,
Soniko
20072
21035, 21060
Sonitron
20104
20000, 20035, 20037, 20046, 20047, 20048,
Sonneclair
20072
20104
Sonolor
20046
Reoc
20348
Sontec
20037
ReplayTV
20614, 20616
Sonwa
20642
Rex
20041
Sony
RFT
20072
Ricavision
21972
Soundwave
20037, 20209, 20348
Roadstar
20037, 20072, 20081, 20240, 20278
Ssangyong
20072
Royal
20072
Stack 9
21972
Runco
20039
Starlite
20037
Saba
20041, 20067, 20278, 20320
Stern
20278
Saisho
20209, 20348
STS
20042
Salora
20043, 20046, 20104
Sunkai
20209, 20278, 20348
Sampo
20037, 20048
Sunstar
20000
Samsung
20045, 20240, 20432, 20739, 21014
Suntronic
20000
Sanky
20039, 20048
Sunwood
20072
Sansui
20000, 20041, 20067, 20072, 20209, 20348,
Supra
20037, 20240, 20278, 20348
20479, 21479
Sylvania
20000, 20035, 20043, 20081, 21781
20046, 20047, 20048, 20067, 20104, 20159,
Symphonic
20000
20209, 20240, 20348, 21330
Systemax
21972
20240, 20278
T+A
20162
SBR
20081
Tagar Systems
21972
Schaub Lorenz
20000, 20041, 20104, 20315, 20348
Taisho
20209
Sanyo
Saville
Schneider
20000, 20032, 20033, 20035, 20636, 21232,
21295, 21972
20000, 20037, 20042, 20072, 20081, 20240,
Tandberg
20278
20278, 20348, 20642
Tandy
20000, 20104
Scott
20043, 20045, 20121, 20184
Tashiko
20000, 20037, 20048, 20081, 20240
Sears
20000, 20035, 20037, 20042, 20046, 20047,
Tatung
20000, 20041, 20043, 20045, 20048, 20067,
20104, 21237
20081, 20209, 20348
Seaway
20278
Tchibo
20348
SEG
20072, 20081, 20240, 20278, 20642
TCM
20348
206
Teac
20000, 20037, 20041, 20072, 20278, 20642
Tec
20072
Wards
20000, 20033, 20035, 20038, 20039, 20042,
20045, 20046, 20047, 20048, 20060, 20072,
Tech Line
20072
Technics
20035, 20081, 20162, 20226
Watson
20081, 20149, 20240
20081, 20642
TechniSat
20209
Wharfedale
20642
Teco
20035, 20037, 20038, 20041, 20048
White Westinghouse 20072, 20209, 20278
Tedelex
20037, 20209, 20348, 20642
World
20348
Teknika
20000, 20035, 20037
XR-1000
20000, 20035, 20072
Teleavia
20041
Yamaha
20038, 20041
Telefunken
20041, 20067, 20209, 20240, 20278, 20320,
Yamishi
20072, 20278
20642
Yokan
20072
Telestar
20037
Yoko
20037, 20240
Teletech
20000, 20072, 20278
Yoshita
20072
Tenosal
20072
Zenith
20000, 20033, 20039, 20209, 20479, 21479
Tensai
20000, 20072, 20278
ZT Group
21972
Tevion
20209, 20348, 20642
ZX
20209, 20348
Texet
20278
Thomas
20000
TV
Thomson
20041, 20060, 20067, 20278, 20320
888
Thorn
20037, 20041, 20104
A-Mark
10003
Tivo
20618, 20636, 20739, 21503
A.R. Systems
10374, 10455
TMK
20240
Abex
10032
Tokai
20037, 20072
Accent
10009
Topline
20348
Acura
10009
Toshiba
10264, 10412
20041, 20042, 20043, 20045, 20067, 20081,
Addison
10092, 10108, 10653
20209, 20432, 20845, 21008, 21145, 21289,
Admiral
10087, 10093, 10163, 10264, 10363, 10463
21323, 21503, 21972
Advent
10761, 10783, 10815, 10817, 10842
20037, 20240
Adventura
10046
Touch
21972
Adyson
10032, 10216, 10217
Towada
20072
AEA
10037
Tradex
20081
AEG
10606
Triad
20278
Agashi
10216, 10217
Uher
20240
AGB
10516
Ultravox
20278
Agef
10087
Unitech
20240
Aiko
10009, 10037, 10092, 10216, 10217, 10264
United
20348
Aim
Universal
20209
Totevision
Universum
10045, 10208, 10264, 10339, 10374, 10412,
10455, 10606, 10706, 10753, 10805
20000, 20037, 20081, 20104, 20209, 20240,
Aiwa
10163, 10701, 10705, 10848
20315, 20348
Akai
10009, 10030, 10035, 10037, 10060, 10072,
Vector
20045
10163, 10178, 10191, 10208, 10216, 10217,
Vector Research
20038
10218, 10264, 10361, 10363, 10371, 10377,
Victor
20041, 20067, 21283
10412, 10433, 10473, 10480, 10516, 10548,
Video Concepts
20045
10556, 10581, 10602, 10606, 10631, 10648,
Video Technic
20000
10672, 10696, 10698, 10702, 10706, 10714,
Videomagic
20037
10715, 10729, 10745, 10753, 10812, 11537
Videosonic
20240
Akashi
10009
Viewsonic
21972
Akiba
10037, 10218, 10282, 10455
Villain
20000
Akira
10037, 10418, 10556
Voodoo
21972
207
Akito
10037
Akura
10009, 10037, 10218, 10264, 10282, 10359,
Audiosonic
10412, 10668, 10714, 11037
Alaron
Alba
10009, 10037, 10109, 10217, 10218, 10264,
10337, 10370, 10374, 10428, 10486, 10714,
10715
10179, 10216
Audioton
10009, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10216, 10218,
Audiovox
10235, 10247, 10355, 10371, 10418, 10443,
10217, 10264, 10428, 10486
10003, 10092, 10180, 10451, 10623, 10802,
10875
10487, 10581, 10668, 10714, 11037
Autovox
10087, 10206, 10217, 10247, 10544
Albatron
10700, 10843
Aventura
10171
Albiral
10102
Awa
Alfide
10672
Alkos
10035
Allorgan
10206, 10217
Axxent
10009
Allstar
10037
Axxon
10714
Ambassador
10177
Baihe
10009, 10264, 10412
America Action
10180
Baile
10001, 10009, 10374, 10661
Amplivision
10217, 10370
Baird
10072, 10073, 10193, 10208, 10217
Ampro
10751
Bang & Olufsen
10087, 10565
Amstrad
Anam
10009, 10011, 10036, 10037, 10108, 10157,
10216, 10217, 10264, 10374, 10412, 10512,
10606, 10698, 10785
10009, 10037, 10171, 10177, 10218, 10264,
Baohuashi
10264, 10412
10362, 10371, 10412, 10433, 10516, 10581,
Baosheng
10009, 10817
10648, 11037
Barco
10380
10003, 10009, 10180, 10250, 10628, 10700,
Basic Line
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10282, 10339,
10861
10374, 10455, 10556, 10668, 11037, 11163
Anam National
10055, 10250, 10650
Bauer
10805
Andersson
11163
Baur
10009, 10037, 10146, 10361, 10455, 10512,
Anex
10037, 10421
Anglo
10009, 10264
Baysonic
10180
Anhua
10051
Bazin
10217
Anitech
10009, 10037, 10282
Beaumark
10178
10009, 10104, 10247, 10292, 10370, 10428,
Beijing
Ansonic
10535, 10544
10556, 10668, 11437
AOC
10003, 10009, 10018, 10019, 10030, 10052,
10001, 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10374,
10412, 10482, 10661, 10812, 10817, 10821
Beko
10060, 10092, 10093, 10108, 10178, 10179,
10037, 10292, 10370, 10418, 10428, 10486,
10606, 10714, 10715, 11037
10180, 10185, 10451, 10628
Belcor
10019
Aolingpu
10858
Bell & Howell
10016, 10154
Aolinpike
10264, 10412
BenQ
11032, 11756
Apex
10156, 10765
Beon
10032, 10037, 10418
Apex Digital
10748, 10765, 10767, 10879
Berthen
10668
Arcam
10216, 10217
Best
10337, 10370, 10421
Archer
10003
Bestar
10037, 10370, 10374
Ardem
10037, 10486, 10556, 10633, 10714, 10715
Bestar-Daewoo
10374
Aristona
10037, 10556
Binatone
10217
ART
11037
Black Diamond
10556, 10587, 10614, 11037
ASA
10070, 10087, 10104
Black Panther
10102
Asberg
10102
Black Strip
10035
Asora
10009
Blaupunkt
10036, 10170, 10191, 10195, 10200, 10455,
Astra
10037, 10264
Asuka
10217, 10218, 10264
ATD
10698
Atlantic
10001, 10206, 10320
Audinac
10180
208
10535
Blue Sky
10037, 10218, 10282, 10455, 10487, 10499,
10556, 10606, 10668, 10714, 10715, 11037,
11254, 11437
Blue Star
10282
Bondstec
10247
Chengdu
10009, 10817
Boots
10009, 10217
Ching Tai
10003, 10009, 10092, 10179
Bosch
10320
Chun Yun
Boxlight
10752, 10893
10000, 10003, 10009, 10092, 10179, 10180,
10700, 10843
BPL
10037, 10208, 10282
Chunfeng
10009, 10264
Bradford
10180
Chung Hsin
10036, 10053, 10108, 10180
Brandt
10109, 10287, 10335, 10560, 10625, 10714
Chungfeng
10412
Brandt Electronique
10335
Chunsun
10009, 10817
Brinkmann
10037, 10418, 10486, 10668
Cimline
10009, 10218
Brionvega
10087, 10362
Cinema
10672
Britannia
10216, 10217
Cineral
10092, 10451
Brockwood
10019
Citizen
Broksonic
10003, 10180, 10236, 10463
10030, 10039, 10046, 10056, 10060, 10092,
10186, 10280
Bruns
10087
City
10009
BTC
10218
Clairtone
10185
Bush
10009, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10208, 10217,
Clarion
10180
10218, 10235, 10264, 10282, 10355, 10361,
Clarivox
10037, 10070, 10337
10363, 10371, 10374, 10486, 10487, 10556,
Clatronic
10581, 10614, 10617, 10661, 10668, 10698,
10009, 10037, 10102, 10217, 10218, 10247,
10264, 10320, 10370, 10371, 10556, 10579,
10714, 11037
10606, 10648, 10714
Caihong
10009, 10817
Clayton
Cailing
10748
CMS
10216
Caishi
10891
CMS Hightec
10217
Candle
10030, 10046, 10056, 10186
Commercial Solutions 10047, 11447
Canton
10218
Concerto
10056
Carad
10037, 10610, 10668, 11037
Condor
10009, 10037, 10163, 10247, 10264, 10282,
11037
Carena
10037, 10455
Carnivale
10030
Conia
10754, 10821
Carrefour
10036, 10070
Conic
10032
Carver
10054, 10170
Conrac
10808
Cascade
10009, 10037
Conrowa
Casio
10037, 10163
Cathay
10037
CCE
10037, 10217
Celebrity
10000
Continental Edison
10109, 10287, 10487
Celera
10765
Cosmel
10037, 10337
Celestial
10767, 10819, 10820, 10821
Craig
10180
Centrex
10698, 10780, 10826
Crosley
10054, 10087, 10247
Centrum
11037
Crown
10009, 10037, 10039, 10053, 10180, 10208,
10320, 10370, 10411, 10418
10009, 10145, 10156, 10264, 10412, 10696,
10698, 10753, 11156, 11170
Contec
10009, 10036, 10037, 10157, 10180, 10185,
10216, 10264, 10698
Centurion
10037
10339, 10359, 10370, 10412, 10418, 10421,
Century
10087, 10238, 10247
10486, 10487, 10579, 10606, 10672, 10712,
CGE
10247, 10370, 10418
CGM
11037
Crown Mustang
10672
10714, 10715
10001, 10009, 10051, 10264, 10374, 10412,
CS Electronics
10216, 10218, 10247
10661, 10817
CTC
10247
Changfei
10009, 10374, 10817
Curtis Mathes
Changfeng
10264, 10412, 10696, 10753, 10817
10056, 10060, 10093, 10145, 10154, 10166,
Changhai
10009, 10817
10451, 10466, 10702, 11147, 11347
Changcheng
Changhong
10016, 10030, 10039, 10047, 10051, 10054,
10009, 10156, 10264, 10508, 10765, 10767,
CXC
10180
10783, 10817, 10820, 10821, 10848, 11156
Cybertron
10218
209
D-Vision
10037, 10556
D.Boss
10037
Daewoo
Dual
10037, 10217, 10259, 10394, 10531, 10544,
11137
10003, 10009, 10019, 10030, 10032, 10037,
Dual Tec
10217
10039, 10056, 10092, 10108, 10154, 10170,
Dumont
10017, 10019, 10070, 10087, 10102
10178, 10180, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10374,
Dunai
10544
10451, 10499, 10556, 10623, 10628, 10634,
Durabrand
10003, 10171, 10178, 10180, 10463, 11034,
11463
10661, 10672, 10700, 10706, 10865, 10880,
11661
DVX
10891
Dainichi
10216, 10218
Dwin
10720, 10774
Dansai
10009, 10032, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10208,
Dynatron
10012, 10037
10216
E-Elite
10218
Dansette
10412
Ecco
10706, 10773
Dantax
10606, 10714, 10715
ECE
10037
Datsura
10208
Edison-Minerva
10487
Dawa
10009
Elbe
10217, 10238, 10259, 10292, 10361, 10362,
10411, 10435, 10516, 10610, 10630
Daytek
10037, 10706
Dayton
10009
Elbe-Sharp
10516
Daytron
10019, 10374
Electroband
10000, 10185
Dayu
10374, 10661
Electrograph
11755
De Graaf
10208, 10363, 10548
Electrohome
10381
DEC
10418, 10556, 10698, 10785, 10795
Elekta
10009, 10037, 10264, 10282
Decca
10037, 10072, 10217, 10516, 10621
Elektra
10017, 11661
Deitron
10037, 10374
Elin
10009, 10037, 10104, 10163, 10361, 10548
Dell
11080, 11178, 11264, 11454
Elite
10218, 10320
Denko
10264
Elman
10102
Denon
10145, 10511, 10576
Elta
10009, 10264
Denstar
10628
Emco
10247
Denver
10037, 10587, 10606
Emerson
10019, 10037, 10038, 10039, 10070, 10087,
DER
10193
10154, 10163, 10171, 10177, 10178, 10179,
Desmet
10009, 10037, 10087, 10320
10180, 10185, 10236, 10247, 10280, 10282,
Diamant
10037
10320, 10361, 10370, 10371, 10463, 10486,
Diamond
10009, 10037, 10216, 10264, 10371, 10672,
10623, 10714
10698, 10706, 10825
Emperor
10282
Envision
10030, 10813
10698
Enzer
10753
Digatron
10037
Epson
10833, 10840
Digiline
10105, 10668
Erres
10012, 10037
Digital Life
10780, 10872, 10891
ESA
10171, 10812
Digitex
10820
ESC
10037, 10217
Digitor
10037, 10499, 10698, 11724
Ether
10003, 10009, 10030
Digix
10880
Etron
10001, 10009
DiK
10037
Eurofeel
10217, 10264
Dixi
10009, 10037, 10087
EuroLine
10556
DL
10037, 10780, 10848, 10872, 10891
Euroman
10037, 10216, 10217, 10264, 10421
Domeos
10037, 10668, 11037
Europa
10037
Domland
10394
Europhon
10102, 10163, 10217, 10516
Dongda
10009
Evolution
11756
Donghai
10009
Expert
10206
Dream Vision
11704
Exquisit
10037, 10247
DSE
10698
Fagor
10037
Dick Smith Electronics
210
Feilang
10009
Feilu
10009, 10817
GE
10092, 10093, 10109, 10135, 10178, 10180,
10021, 10027, 10030, 10047, 10051, 10055,
Feiyan
10264, 10412
10282, 10287, 10335, 10451, 10560, 10625,
Feiyue
10009, 10817
11147, 11347, 11447, 11454
Fenner
10009, 10374
GEC
10037, 10072, 10163, 10217, 10361, 10516
Ferguson
10037, 10053, 10073, 10109, 10193, 10238,
Geloso
10009, 10363, 10374
10287, 10335, 10443, 10548, 10560, 10625
General
10186, 10590
10037, 10163, 10171, 10193, 10216, 10264,
General Technic
10009
10361, 10363, 10371, 10412, 10512, 10531,
Genesis
10009, 10037
10544
Genexxa
10009, 10163, 10218
Filsai
10217
Gericom
10808, 10865
Finlandia
10045, 10072, 10163, 10208, 10287, 10346,
Giant
10217
10359, 10363,10548
Gibralter
10017, 10019, 10030
Fidelity
Finlux
10037, 10070, 10072, 10087, 10102, 10104,
Gintai
10721
10105, 10179, 10217, 10346, 10411, 10473,
Go Video
10886
10480, 10492, 10516, 10556, 10606, 10621,
Goldfunk
10668
10629, 10631, 10714, 10715, 10808
GoldHand
10216
Firstar
10009, 10236
GoldStar
Firstline
10009, 10037, 10072, 10163, 10208, 10216,
10056, 10109, 10154, 10163, 10178, 10216,
10217, 10235, 10238, 10247, 10321, 10361,
10217, 10247, 10290, 10361, 10363, 10377,
10374, 10411, 10531, 10544, 10556, 10587,
10455, 10556, 10606, 10714, 10715
Fisher
10001, 10019, 10030, 10032, 10037, 10039,
10668, 10714, 10808, 11037
Gooding
10487
10036, 10045, 10047, 10072, 10087, 10104,
Goodmans
10009, 10032, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10072,
10154, 10157, 10159, 10208, 10217, 10370,
10179, 10217, 10218, 10235, 10264, 10335,
10544, 10555
10360, 10371, 10374, 10451, 10480, 10487,
Flint
10037, 10072, 10218, 10264, 10455, 10610
10499, 10516, 10556, 10560, 10579, 10630,
Forgestone
10193
10634, 10661, 10668, 10714, 10808, 11037,
Formenti
10037, 10087, 10216, 10320
11163
Formenti-Phoenix
10216, 10320
Gorenje
10037, 10370, 10421
Fortress
10093
GPM
10218
Fraba
10037, 10370
Gradiente
10053, 10056, 10170
Friac
10009, 10037, 10102, 10370, 10421, 10499,
Graetz
10037, 10163, 10339, 10361, 10371, 10487,
10610
10714
Frontech
10009, 10163, 10217, 10247, 10264, 10363
Gran Prix
10648
Fujitsu
10009, 10037, 10072, 10163, 10179, 10186,
Granada
10037, 10045, 10072, 10108, 10146, 10163,
10206, 10217, 10259, 10361, 10683, 10809,
10208, 10217, 10226, 10339, 10356, 10359,
10853
10363, 10473, 10516, 10548, 10560
Fujitsu General
10009, 10163, 10206, 10217, 10683
Funai
10171, 10179, 10180, 10264, 10412, 10556,
Grandin
10009, 10037, 10163, 10282, 10320, 10374,
10455, 10579, 10610, 10668, 10714, 10715,
10668, 11977
11037
Furi
10145, 10264, 10412, 10817
Gronic
Futronic
10264, 10795
Grundig
Future
10037
10163
10036, 10037, 10070, 10191, 10195, 10370,
10443, 10487, 10535, 10556, 10587, 10630,
Futuretech
10180
Galaxi
10037, 10361
Grunpy
10179, 10180
Galaxis
10037, 10370
H&B
10808
Ganxin
10817
Haaz
10706
Gateway
11755, 11756
Haier
10037, 10264, 10508, 10587, 10698, 10768,
GBC
10009, 10218, 10374
10672, 10706
10779, 10869, 10891, 11034
Haihong
10009
211
Haiyan
10264, 10412, 10817
Home Electronics
10606
Halifax
10217
Hongmei
10009, 10093, 10264, 10817, 10848
Hallmark
10178
Hongyan
10264, 10412, 10817
Hammerstein
10060, 10264
Hornyphon
10012, 10037
Hampton
10216, 10217
Hoshai
10282
Hanimex
10218
Hua Tun
10009
Hankook
10019, 10030, 10056, 10178, 10180, 10628
Huafa
10009, 10145
Hanseatic
10009, 10037, 10087, 10195, 10217, 10282,
Huanghaimei
10009
10320, 10361, 10377, 10394, 10428, 10499,
Huanghe
10009, 10817
10544, 10556, 10634, 10661, 10714, 10808,
Huanglong
10009
11137
Huangshan
10009, 10264, 10412, 10817
Hantarex
10009, 10037, 10102, 10238, 10516, 10865
Huanyu
10216, 10264, 10374, 10817, 10848
Hantor
10037
Huaqiang
10264, 10412
Harley Davidson
10179
Huari
10145, 10264, 10412
Harman/Kardon
10054
Huodateji
10051
Harsper
10865
Hyper
10009, 10216, 10217, 10247
Harvard
10180
Hypson
10037, 10264, 10282, 10411, 10455, 10621,
Harwa
10773
Harwood
10009, 10032, 10037, 10412, 10487
Hyundai
Havermy
10093
Iberia
10037
HCM
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10282,
ICE
10216, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10371, 10556
10668, 10714, 10715, 11037
10037, 10698, 10706, 10753, 10849, 10865
10412, 10418, 10606
ICeS
10216, 10218
Helios
10865
Imperial
10037, 10163, 10247, 10361, 10370, 10418,
Hello Kitty
10451
10630
Hema
10009, 10217
Imperial Crown
10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10412, 10661
Hemmermann
10544
Indiana
10037
Hher
10714
Infinity
10054
Higashi
10216
InFocus
10752
Hikona
10218
Ingelen
10163, 10361, 10487, 10610, 10714
Himitsu
10180, 10628, 10779
Ingersoll
10009
10009, 10036, 10037, 10179, 10218, 10235,
Inno Hit
Hinari
10009, 10037, 10072, 10102, 10217, 10247,
10282, 10290, 10516
10264, 10355
Hisawa
10218, 10282, 10455, 10610, 10714
Innova
10037
Hisense
10009, 10037, 10145, 10156, 10208, 10264,
Innowert
10865
10508, 10512, 10556, 10696, 10706, 10748,
Inteq
10017
10753, 10780, 10821, 10848, 11156, 11170
Interbuy
10037, 10247, 10264, 10512
10087
Interfunk
10012, 10037, 10087, 10163, 10200, 10247,
Hit
Hitachi
10009, 10016, 10019, 10027, 10030, 10032,
10275, 10361,10512
10036, 10037, 10038, 10039, 10044, 10056,
Internal
10072, 10092, 10105, 10108, 10109, 10145,
Intervision
10151, 10156, 10157, 10163, 10165, 10178,
10009, 10037, 10102, 10163, 10217, 10218,
10247, 10264, 10282, 10370, 10377, 10394,
10179, 10186, 10194, 10217, 10356, 10359,
10361, 10363, 10381, 10473, 10480, 10481,
10037
10455, 10486, 10487
IR
10011, 10012, 10032, 10035, 10036, 10037,
10492, 10499, 10508, 10512, 10516, 10548,
10045, 10070, 10072, 10073, 10087, 10093,
10576, 10578, 10629, 10634, 10719, 10744,
10102, 10104, 10105, 10108, 10109, 10146,
10884, 11037, 11045, 11137, *[11145],
10157, 10163, 10191, 10193, 10194, 10195,
11156, 11170, 11225, 11256, 11481, 11576
10200, 10206, 10216, 10217, 10226, 10235,
Hitachi Fujian
10037, 10108, 10145, 10150, 10499, 10828
10238, 10247, 10287, 10290, 10291, 10292,
Hitsu
10009, 10218, 10455, 10610
10320, 10356, 10359, 10361, 10363, 10370,
HMV
10087, 10193
10374, 10512, 10516, 10535, 10556
212
Irradio
10218, 10247, 10290, 10371
IRT
10451, 10628, 10698, 11661
Isukai
10037, 10218, 10282, 10455
Kennedy
10206, 10435
ITC
10217, 10320
Kennex
11037
ITS
10216, 10264, 10371
Kenwood
10019, 10030
ITT
10163, 10179, 10193, 10208, 10339, 10346,
KIC
10217
10361, 10473, 10480, 10544, 10548, 10610
Kingsley
10216
10163, 10179, 10208, 10339, 10346, 10361,
Kiota
10001, 10371, 10455
ITT Nokia
Kendo
10037, 10102, 10235, 10247, 10362, 10411,
10428, 10512, 10610, 11437
10363, 10473, 10480, 10548, 10606, 10610
Kioto
10054, 10556, 10706, 10785
ITV
10037, 10264, 10374
Kiton
10037, 10668
Janeil
10046
KLH
10765, 10767
JBL
10054
KLL
10037
JCB
10000
Kloss
10024, 10046
10003, 10009, 10036, 10051, 10092, 10156,
Kneissel
Jean
10037, 10238, 10259, 10292, 10362, 10374,
10411, 10435, 10499, 10556, 10610
10179, 10236, 10721
Jensen
10698, 10706, 10761, 10815, 10817
Kolin
10036, 10053, 10108, 10150, 10180
Jiahua
10051
Kolster
10102, 10247
JiaLiCai
10009, 10264, 10412
Kongque
10009, 10264, 10817
Jinfeng
10051, 10208, 10226, 10817
Konichi
10009
Jinhai
10848
Konka
Jinque
10009, 10264, 10412, 10817
10628, 10632, 10638, 10641, 10703, 10707,
Jinta
10009, 10264, 10412, 10848
10714, 10725, 10726, 10754, 10779, 10795,
Jinxing
10009, 10037, 10054, 10145, 10156, 10264,
10816, 10817
10037, 10218, 10282, 10371, 10418, 10587,
10556, 10698, 10817, 10821
Kontakt
10487
JMB
10443, 10499, 10556, 10634
Korpel
10037
JNL
10698
Korting
10087, 10320, 10421
Jocel
10712
Kotron
10264
Jubilee
10556
Koyoda
10009
Juhua
10264, 10412, 10817
Kraking
10238
JVC
10036, 10053, 10093, 10193, 10218, 10371,
Kriesler
10012
10418, 10463, 10508, 10576, 10606, 10653,
KTV
10030, 10039, 10180, 10185, 10217, 10280
10683, 10731, 11253
Kuaile
10009, 10264, 10412
Kaige
10009, 10264, 10412, 10817
Kulun
10009
Kaisui
10009, 10037, 10216, 10217, 10218, 10282,
Kunlun
10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10374, 10661,
10817
10455
Kambrook
10217, 10264, 10556
Kyoshu
10032, 10264, 10412, 10418
Kamp
10216
Kyoto
10032, 10163, 10216, 10217
Kangchong
10848
L&S Electronic
10714, 10808
Kangli
10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10661, 10817
LaSAT
10486
Kangyi
10009, 10264, 10412
Leader
10009
Kapsch
10104, 10163, 10206, 10361
Lecson
10037
10037, 10163, 10264, 10282, 10421, 10606,
Legend
10009
10610, 10714
Lemair
10032, 10411
Kathrein
10556
Lenco
10037, 10163, 10374, 10721, 11037
Kawa
10371
Levis Austria
10037
Kawasho
10216
Leyco
10037, 10072, 10264, 10579
Kaypani
10052
KB Aristocrat
10163
KEC
10180
Karcher
213
LG
10001, 10003, 10019, 10030, 10032, 10037,
Matsui
10163, 10177, 10191, 10195, 10208, 10217,
10442, 10556, 10606, 10644, 10698, 10700,
10235, 10335, 10355, 10363, 10371, 10433,
10714, 10715, 10856, 11148, 11178, 11265,
10443, 10455, 10487, 10516, 10544, 10556,
11637, 10033
Liesenk & Tter
10009, 10011, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10072,
10038, 10039, 10056, 10060, 10108, 10178,
10579, 10629, 10714, 11037
10037
Matsushita
10051, 10250, 10650
Liesenkotter
10012, 10037
Matsuviama
10587
Lifetec
10037, 10218, 10264, 10374, 10668, 10714,
Maxam
10264
11037, 11137, 11437
Maxdorf
10773
Lihua
10817
Maxent
11755
Lloyd's
10001, 10009, 10264
MCE
10009
Lloytron
10032
Mediator
10012, 10037
Loewe
10037, 10087, 10136, 10292, 10362, 10512,
Medion
10037, 10512, 10556, 10668, 10698, 10714,
10808, 10880, 11037, 11137, 11437
10516, 10633, 10655
10001, 10009, 10011, 10016, 10060, 10193,
Megapower
10700
10264, 10418, 10698, 10706, 10773, 10880
Megas
10610
10668
Megatron
10003, 10145, 10178
Longjiang
10264, 10412, 10817
MEI
10185, 11037
Luma
10206, 10259, 10362, 10363, 11037
Meile
10264, 10412, 10817, 10848
Lumatron
10217, 10361
Melectronic
Lux May
10009, 10037, 10556, 10581
10195, 10216, 10217, 10247, 10346, 10361,
Luxman
10056, 10412, 10579
10374, 10411, 10480, 10492, 10512, 10634,
Luxor
10163, 10179, 10194, 10208, 10217, 10290,
10661, 10714
Logik
Logix
10356, 10361, 10363, 10473, 10480, 10548,
Memorex
10009, 10016, 10056, 10060, 10150, 10154,
10178, 10179, 10250, 10463, 11037
10631, 11037, 11163
10047, 10054, 10154, 10156, 10178
Memphis
M&S
10054
Mercury
M Electronic
10009, 10037, 10104, 10105, 10109, 10163,
LXI
10009, 10037, 10104, 10105, 10163, 10191,
10337
10001, 10009, 10060, 10264, 10473, 10556,
10706
10217, 10287, 10346, 10374, 10480
Mermaid
10037
Madison
10037
Merritt
10163
Magnadyne
10087, 10102, 10247, 10516, 10544
Metronic
10625
Magnafon
10102, 10216, 10516
Metz
10037, 10070, 10087, 10275, 10367, 10388,
Magnavox
10447, 10535, 10587, 10668, 10746
10020, 10024, 10030, 10036, 10037, 10054,
10096, 10179, 10186, 10187, 10386, 10706,
MGA
10019, 10030, 10037, 10150, 10178, 10218,
10374
10729, 10780, 10802, 11254, 11454
Magnum
10037, 10606, 10648, 10714, 10715
Micromaxx
10037, 10630, 10668, 10808, 11037
Majestic
10016
Microstar
10808
10035, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10235, 10264,
MicroTEK
10706
10320, 10361
Midland
10017, 10032, 10039, 10047, 10051, 10135
Manhattan
10037, 10163, 10668, 11037
Minato
10037
Marantz
10030, 10037, 10054, 10412, 10556, 10704,
Minerva
10070, 10108, 10487, 10516, 10535
Manesth
10854, 10855, 11154
Minoka
10359, 10412
Marelli
10087
Minutz
10021
Mark
10037, 10217, 10486, 10714, 10715
Mistral Electronics
10193
Master's
10499
Mitsubishi
10019, 10030, 10036, 10037, 10056, 10087,
Masuda
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10371
10093, 10108, 10150, 10154, 10178, 10179,
Materin
10208, 10858
10180, 10208, 10236, 10250, 10381, 10512,
10535, 10556, 10817, 10836, 10868, 11037,
11250
Mitsuri General
214
10163
Mivar
10216, 10217, 10290, 10291, 10292, 10370,
Noblex
10154, 10180
10516, 10609
Nobliko
10070, 10102, 10216
Monaco
10009
Nokia
Monivision
10700, 10843
Morgan's
10037
Motorola
10055, 10093
Norcent
10019, 10030, 10056, 10060, 10163, 10185,
Nordic
10217
10216, 10361, 10370, 10512
Nordmende
10037, 10109, 10163, 10195, 10287, 10335,
MTC
10109, 10163, 10179, 10208, 10320, 10339,
10346, 10359, 10361, 10374, 10473, 10480,
10548, 10606, 10610, 10631
10748, 10824
MTEC
10032
MTlogic
10714
Norfolk
10163
10037
Mudan
10560, 10714
10009, 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10412,
Normerel
10817
Noshi
10018
10193
Novak
10012, 10037
Multitec
10037, 10486, 10668, 11037
Novatronic
10037, 10105, 10374, 10531
Multitech
10009, 10037, 10102, 10180, 10216, 10217,
NTC
10092
Multibroadcast
10247, 10264, 10363, 10486, 10556
Nu-Tec
10037, 10455, 10698, 10706, 10820
Murphy
10039, 10163, 10216
Oceanic
10163, 10208, 10361, 10473, 10548
Musikland
10037, 10218, 10247
Okano
10009, 10037, 10370
Myryad
10556
Omega
10264
NAD
10156, 10178, 10361, 10866
Omni
Naiko
10037, 10606
Nanbao
10009, 10264, 10412, 10848
On Command
10531
Nansheng
10264, 10412, 10817
Onimax
10714
Naonis
10363
Onking
10280
NAT
10226
Onwa
National
10051, 10055, 10208, 10226, 10508
NEC
Neckermann
10264, 10698, 10706, 10780, 10826, 10872,
10891
10102, 10180, 10218, 10371, 10433, 10581,
10602
10009, 10011, 10019, 10030, 10036, 10046,
Optimus
10154, 10166, 10250, 10650
10051, 10053, 10056, 10154, 10156, 10165,
Optoma
10887
10170, 10178, 10186, 10217, 10264, 10320,
Optonica
10093, 10165
10374, 10381, 10412, 10455, 10497, 10499,
Orion
10011, 10037, 10177, 10179, 10235, 10236,
10508, 10603, 10661, 10704, 10705, 10817,
10264, 10320, 10321, 10355, 10412, 10443,
10882, 11170, 11270, 11704
10463, 10516, 10531, 10544, 10556, 10606,
10037, 10087, 10163, 10191, 10200, 10247,
10655, 10714, 10880, 11463
10320, 10363, 10370, 10411, 10418, 10512,
Orline
10037, 10218
10556
Ormond
10668, 11037
NEI
10037, 10163, 10287, 10337, 10371
Orsowe
10516
Neovia
10865
Osaki
10032, 10037, 10072, 10217, 10218, 10264,
Nesco
10179, 10247
Netsat
10037
Osio
NetTV
11755
Oso
10218
Network
10032, 10337
Osume
10032, 10036, 10037, 10072, 10157, 10218
Neufunk
10037, 10218, 10556, 10610, 10714
Otto Versand
New Tech
10217
10355, 10374, 10412, 10556
10290
10036, 10037, 10093, 10109, 10191, 10217,
10226, 10235, 10247, 10320, 10361, 10512,
10535, 10544, 10556
Newave
10009, 10092, 10093, 10178, 10721
Nicam
10544
Pacific
Nicamagic
10216
Pael
10216
Nikkai
10009, 10032, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10072,
Palladium
10037, 10247, 10363, 10370, 10411, 10418,
10630, 10655, 10714, 11137
10216, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10337
Nikko
10030, 10092, 10178
Nikon
10848
10037, 10556, 10714, 11037, 11137
Palsonic
10001, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10377,
10412, 10418, 10698, 10773, 10779
215
Panama
10037, 10217, 10247, 10264
Prinz
10194, 10361, 10544
Panashiba
10001
Prism
10051
10037, 10051, 10054, 10055, 10108, 10163,
Profex
10009, 10163, 10361, 10363, 10370
10208, 10226, 10250, 10361, 10367, 10508,
Profex Fidelity
10102
10516, 10548, 10650, 10853, 11310, 11410,
Profi
10009
11650
Profitronic
10037, 10102
Panavision
10037, 10411
Proline
Panda
10009, 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10412,
Panasonic
10037, 10072, 10321, 10411, 10556, 10621,
10625, 10630, 10634
10508, 10698, 10706, 10780, 10817, 10821,
Proscan
10047, 11347, 11447
10826, 10848, 10891
Prosonic
10037, 10217, 10451, 10579, 10668, 10714
Pathe Cinema
10163, 10216, 10238, 10320, 10370
Protech
Pausa
10009
10247, 10264, 10337, 10418, 10486, 10668,
Peng Sheng
10891
11037
Penney
10003, 10018, 10019, 10021, 10027, 10030,
Proton
10009, 10037, 10102, 10163, 10180, 10217,
10001, 10003, 10009, 10030, 10039, 10052,
10056, 10178, 10466, 10644
10032, 10039, 10047, 10051, 10056, 10060,
10135, 10156, 10178, 11347
ProVision
10037, 10556, 10714
10037, 10072, 10163, 10216, 10282, 10320
Pulsar
10017, 10019
Phase
10032
Pye
Philco
10019, 10020, 10030, 10032, 10037, 10054,
Perdio
10012, 10037, 10087, 10193, 10374, 10412,
10556
10056, 10087, 10092, 10096, 10145, 10178,
Qingdao
10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10412, 10817
10180, 10186, 10247, 10370, 10418, 10451,
Quadral
10218, 10418
10463, 10628, 10774, 11661
Qualcraft
10039
Philex
10193, 10548
Quasar
10009, 10051, 10055, 10165, 10247, 10250,
Philips
10000, 10009, 10012, 10017, 10019, 10020,
10024, 10027, 10030, 10032, 10037, 10051,
10650, 10865
Quelle
10011, 10037, 10070, 10104, 10200, 10361,
10512, 10535, 10544, 10668, 11037
10054, 10056, 10080, 10087, 10092, 10108,
10178, 10186, 10187, 10191, 10193, 10200,
Questa
10032, 10036
10238, 10361, 10374, 10423, 10556, 10690,
R-Line
10037, 10163
10721, 10772, 10774, 11154, 11454, 11756
Radialva
10218, 10337
10037, 10087, 10216, 10320, 10486
Radiola
10012, 10037, 10217, 10556
Phonola
10012, 10037, 10080, 10087, 10193, 10216
Radiomarelli
10037, 10087, 10516
Pilot
10019, 10030, 10037, 10039, 10706, 10712
RadioShack
10019, 10030, 10032, 10037, 10039, 10047,
Phoenix
Pioneer
10056, 10154, 10165, 10178, 10180
10011, 10037, 10038, 10109, 10163, 10166,
10170, 10287, 10361, 10423, 10428, 10486,
Radiotone
10009, 10037, 10264, 10412, 10428, 10579,
10648, 10668, 11037
10512, 10679, 10760, 10866
Pionier
10486
Rank Arena
10036, 10157, 10602, 10753
Plantron
10009
RBM
10070
Playsonic
10037, 10217, 10339, 10714, 10715
RCA
Polaroid
10765, 10865
10051, 10060, 10090, 10092, 10093, 10135,
Polytron
10282, 10697
10178, 10560, 10618, 10625, 10679, 10753,
Polyvision
10697
11047, 11147, 11247, 11347, 11447, 11454,
Portland
10019, 10039, 10092, 10374
Powerpoint
10037, 10487
10000, 10018, 10019, 10030, 10038, 10047,
11547
Realistic
10019, 10030, 10032, 10039, 10056, 10154,
10165, 10178, 10180
Prandoni-Prince
10361, 10363, 10516
Premier
10037, 10264
Recor
10037, 10264, 10418
10009, 10264, 10412, 10761, 10783, 10815,
Rediffusion
10036, 10346, 10361, 10548
10817
Reflex
10037, 10668, 11037
Princess
10698
Relisys
10865
Princeton
10700, 10717
Reoc
10714
Prinston
11037
Revox
10037
Prima
216
Rex
10163, 10206, 10259, 10264, 10363, 10411
RFT
10037, 10072, 10087, 10264, 10370, 10428
Sanyo
10108, 10145, 10146, 10154, 10156, 10157,
10011, 10036, 10045, 10072, 10088, 10104,
Rhapsody
10185, 10216
10159, 10180, 10208, 10216, 10217, 10264,
Ricoh
10037
10280, 10339, 10370, 10381, 10412, 10486,
Rinex
10264, 10418, 10698, 10773
10508, 10544, 10555, 10556, 10721, 10799,
Roadstar
10009, 10037, 10218, 10264, 10282, 10418,
10893, 11154
10668, 10714, 11037
Sanyuan
10009, 10093, 10817
10087
SBR
10012, 10037, 10193, 10556
Rover
10036
Schaub Lorenz
Rowa
10009, 10037, 10216, 10217, 10264, 10556,
Robotron
10587, 10698, 10712, 10748, 10817
10037, 10361, 10374, 10486, 10548, 10606,
10714
Schneider
10012, 10037, 10070, 10163, 10217, 10218,
Rownsonic
10163
10247, 10259, 10361, 10371, 10394, 10544,
Royal
10418, 10825
10556, 10648, 10668, 10714, 11037, 11137
Royal Lux
10335, 10412
Scimitsu
10019
Runco
10017, 10030, 10497, 10603
Scotch
10178
Ruyi
10817
Scotland
10163
Saba
10087, 10109, 10163, 10250, 10287, 10335,
Scott
10019, 10178, 10179, 10180, 10236
10361, 10498, 10516, 10548, 10560, 10625,
Sears
10714
10047, 10054, 10056, 10146, 10154, 10156,
10159, 10171, 10178, 10179
Saccs
10238
Seaway
10556, 10634
Sagem
10455, 10610
Seelver
11037
Saige
10009, 10817
SEG
Saisho
10009, 10011, 10177, 10217, 10235, 10264,
10217, 10218, 10264, 10362, 10487, 10634,
10374, 10516, 10544, 10556
10668, 11037, 11163, 11437
10009, 10036, 10037, 10102, 10163, 10216,
Saivod
10037, 10668, 10712, 11037
SEI
10087, 10102, 10177, 10206, 10516, 10544
Saka
10163
Sei-Sinudyne
10037, 10087, 10102, 10206, 10516, 10544
Sakyno
10455
Seleco
Salora
10163, 10194, 10208, 10290, 10356, 10359,
10163, 10206, 10259, 10264, 10346, 10362,
10363, 10371, 10411, 10435
10361, 10363, 10473, 10480, 10516, 10548,
Semivox
10180
10606, 10621, 10631
Semp
10156, 11356
Salsa
10335
Sencora
10009
Sambers
10102, 10516
Sentra
10035
Sampo
Samsung
10009, 10030, 10032, 10036, 10039, 10052,
Serino
10093, 10455, 10610
10092, 10093, 10154, 10171, 10178, 10650,
Shancha
10264, 10412, 10817
10700, 10721, 11755
Shanghai
10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10412, 10817,
10009, 10019, 10030, 10032, 10037, 10039,
10848
10056, 10060, 10072, 10090, 10092, 10093,
Shaofeng
10154, 10156, 10163, 10178, 10179, 10195,
Sharp
10145, 10817
10009, 10030, 10032, 10036, 10039, 10053,
10208, 10216, 10217, 10226, 10264, 10290,
10093, 10157, 10165, 10193, 10200, 10256,
10370, 10482, 10556, 10587, 10618, 10644,
10386, 10491, 10516, 10650, 10688, 10689,
10682, 10702, 10718, 10766, 10774, 10812,
10720, 10818, 10851, 11193
10814, 10817, 10821, 11060
Shen Ying
10003, 10009, 10092, 10179
10039
Shencai
10009, 10145, 10264, 10412
Sandra
10216, 10217
Sheng Chia
10009, 10093, 10179, 10236
Sanjian
10264, 10412
Shenyang
10009, 10264, 10696, 10753, 10817
Sansei
10451
Sherwood
10009
Sansui
10037, 10264, 10371, 10412, 10455, 10463,
Shintoshi
10037
10587, 10602, 10655, 10698, 10706, 10714,
Shivaki
10037, 10178, 10374, 10443, 10451
10727, 10729, 10861, 11537
Shogun
10019
10009
Shorai
10179
Samsux
Santon
217
Show
10009, 10072, 10418, 10706
SSS
10019, 10180
Siarem
10087, 10102, 10516
Stag
10032
10032, 10037, 10146, 10157, 10191, 10195,
Staksonic
10009
10200, 10361, 10535
Standard
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10320, 10374,
Siemens
Siera
10012
Siesta
10370
Starlite
10009, 10037, 10180, 10264
Signature
10016
Stenway
10218, 10282
Silva
10037, 10216, 10361, 10648
Stern
10163, 10206, 10259, 10363, 10411
Silva Schneider
10037
Strato
10009, 10037, 10264
Silver
10036, 10037, 10179, 10361, 10455, 10715
Studio Experience
10843
SilverCrest
11037
Sunic Line
10037
Simpson
10186, 10187
Sunkai
Singer
10009, 10087, 10102, 10163, 10335, 10362,
11037
10037, 10321, 10355, 10455, 10487, 10531,
10610
10371, 10433, 10435, 10548, 10698, 10706,
Sunstar
10009, 10037, 10264, 10371, 10579
11537
Sunwood
10037
Sinotec
10264, 10418, 10706, 10773
Superla
10516
Sinudyne
10087, 10102, 10177, 10206, 10235, 10516,
Superscan
10864
10544
Supersonic
Skantic
10356
10009, 10037, 10208, 10264, 10455, 10698,
10805
SKY
10037, 10282
SuperTech
10009, 10037, 10216, 10218
Skygiant
10180
Supervision
10264
Skysonic
10696, 10753
Supra
10009, 10039, 10056, 10178
Skyworth
10009, 10037, 10264, 10696, 10698, 10727,
Supre-Macy
10046
10748, 10753, 10805, 10817, 10825
Supreme
10000
Sliding
10865
Susumu
10218, 10287, 10335
SLX
10512, 10668
SVA
10587, 10698, 10748, 10768, 10865, 10870,
Smaragd
10487
Soemtron
10865
Svasa
Solavox
10032, 10037, 10072, 10163, 10361, 10548
Swissline
10247
Sole
10813
Sylvania
10020, 10030, 10054, 10096, 10171, 10381
Sonawa
10218
Symphonic
10171, 10180
Songba
10009
Synco
10000, 10036, 10060, 10092, 10093, 10178,
Soniko
10037
Sonitron
10208, 10217, 10339, 10370
Sysline
10037
Sonoko
10009, 10037, 10282
Sytong
10216
Sonolor
10163, 10208, 10282, 10361, 10548
T+A
10447
Sontec
10009, 10037, 10370
Tacico
10009, 10092, 10178, 10179
Sony
10871, 10872
10455
10451
10000, 10011, 10036, 10037, 10053, 10080,
Tai Yi
10009
10093, 10102, 10111, 10145, 10150, 10156,
Taishan
10009, 10374, 10817
10157, 10170, 10250, 10353, 10650, 10834,
Tandberg
10362, 10367, 10411
11100, 11505, 11651
Tandy
10039, 10072, 10093, 10163, 10217, 10218
Sound & Vision
10102, 10374
Targa
10702
Soundesign
10178, 10179, 10180, 10186
Tashiko
10032, 10036, 10092, 10146, 10163, 10216,
Soundwave
10032, 10037, 10320, 10418, 10715
Sowa
10036, 10051, 10060, 10092, 10156, 10178,
10217, 10359, 10363, 10650, 10721
Tatung
10003, 10009, 10011, 10036, 10037, 10051,
10226
10054, 10055, 10060, 10072, 10154, 10156,
Spectra
10009
10217, 10516, 10556, 10621, 10629, 11156,
Spectricon
10003
11254, 11756
Squareview
10171
TCL
10412, 10698, 10706, 10727, 10826, 11537
Ssangyong
10009, 10032
TCM
10714, 10808
218
Teac
10009, 10037, 10170, 10171, 10178, 10217,
Texet
10009, 10216, 10217, 10218, 10374
10247, 10264, 10282, 10412, 10418, 10455,
ThemeScene
10887
10512, 10544, 10556, 10668, 10698, 10706,
Thomson
10712, 10714, 10721, 10755, 11037, 11437,
11724, 11755
Tec
Thorn
10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10247, 10259,
10035, 10036, 10037, 10072, 10073, 10104,
10109, 10163, 10193, 10238, 10335, 10359,
10337, 10361
Tech Line
10037, 10109, 10287, 10335, 10560, 10625,
11447
10361, 10499, 10512, 10535
10037, 10668, 11437
Thorn-Ferguson
10073, 10193, 10238, 10499
Techica
10218
Tiane
10093, 10817
Technema
10320
TMK
10056, 10177, 10178
Technics
10051, 10250, 10556, 10650
TML
11756
TechniSat
10037, 10163, 10556, 10655
TNCi
10017
Technisson
10714
Tobishi
10218
Technol Ace
10179, 10264, 10374, 10412
Tobo
10009, 10264, 10412, 10748
Technosonic
10556
Tokai
10009, 10037, 10163, 10337, 10374, 10668,
Techview
10847
Techwood
10003, 10051, 10056, 11163
Tokaido
Tecnimagen
10556
Tokyo
10035
Teco
10009, 10036, 10051, 10092, 10093, 10178,
Tomashi
10218, 10282
10218, 10264, 10280, 10653
Tongguang
10264, 10412
10009, 10037, 10208, 10217, 10264, 10418,
Tongtel
10587, 10780
Tedelex
11037
11037
10556, 10606, 10706, 10726, 10891, 11537
Tophouse
10180
Tek
10009, 10264, 10706, 10795
Toshiba
10009, 10035, 10036, 10060, 10070, 10093,
Teknika
10016, 10019, 10039, 10054, 10056, 10060,
10102, 10109, 10145, 10154, 10156, 10191,
10092, 10150, 10179, 10180, 10186
10195, 10217, 10264, 10381, 10412, 10508,
10037, 10394
10556, 10618, 10644, 10650, 10714, 10718,
10037, 10056, 10073, 10109, 10287, 10335,
10821, 10832, 10845, 11156, 11256, 11265,
10346, 10421, 10486, 10498, 10560, 10587,
11356, 11508, 11656, 11704
Telecor
Telefunken
10625, 10698, 10702, 10706, 10712, 10714,
Tosonic
10185
10753, 10819, 10820, 10821
Totevision
10039
Telefusion
10037
Towada
10102, 10217, 10264
Telegazi
10037, 10556
Toyoda
10009, 10037, 10264, 10412
Telemeister
10320
Trakton
10009, 10217, 10264
Telesonic
10037
Trans Continens
10037, 10217, 10668, 11037
Telestar
10009, 10037, 10412, 10556, 10579
TRANS-continents
10621
Teletech
10009, 10037, 10337, 10668, 11037
Transonic
Teleton
10036, 10163, 10186, 10206, 10217, 10259,
10009, 10037, 10264, 10418, 10455, 10512,
10587, 10698, 10712, 10780, 10858
10363
Triad
10037, 10218, 10556
10216, 10320
Trical
10157
Teleview
10037
Trident
10516
Tempest
10009, 10037, 10264, 10455, 10556
Tristar
10193, 10218
Tennessee
10037
Triumph
10177, 10346, 10516, 10556
Tensai
10009, 10037, 10104, 10105, 10163, 10217,
Tsoschi
10282
10218, 10247, 10320, 10371, 10374, 10377,
Tuntex
10009, 10030, 10092
10556, 10715, 11037
TVS
10463
Tenson
10009, 10320
TVTEXT 95
10556
Tera
10030, 10092, 10466
Uher
10037, 10206, 10320, 10374, 10418, 10480,
Tesla
10037
Televideon
Tevion
10486
10556, 10648, 10668, 10714, 10767, 11037,
Ultravox
10037, 10087, 10102, 10216, 10247
11137
Unic
10163
219
Unic Line
10037, 10455
Weipai
10009
United
10037, 10606, 10714, 10715, 11037
Welltech
10714
Universal
10027, 10037
Weltblick
10217, 10320
Universum
10009, 10011, 10032, 10036, 10037, 10070,
Westinghouse
10003, 10889
10104, 10105, 10146, 10157, 10163, 10170,
Weston
10037
10177, 10191, 10200, 10217, 10247, 10264,
Wharfedale
10037, 10264, 10556, 10706, 10861
10290, 10346, 10361, 10362, 10370, 10411,
White Westinghouse 10037, 10186, 10216, 10320, 10337, 10463,
10623
10418, 10421, 10473, 10480, 10492, 10512,
10535, 10544, 10556, 10618, 10631, 10668,
Windsor
11037
11037, 11437
Windstar
10282, 10337
10037, 10087, 10163, 10337
Windy Sam
10556
Utax
10163
Wintel
10714
V2max
10865
World-of-Vision
10880
V7 Videoseven
11755
Worldview
10455
V7Videoseven
10880
Xenius
10634, 10661
Vector Research
10030
Xiahua
Vestel
10037, 10163, 10217, 10556, 10668, 11037,
Univox
10009, 10264, 10412, 10698, 10773, 10779,
10817
11163
Xianghai
10009
Victor
10036, 10053, 10250, 10650, 10653
Xiangyang
10264, 10412
Videocon
10508
Xiangyu
10009
Videologic
10216, 10218
Xihu
10264, 10412, 10817
Videologique
10218
Xinaghai
10412
Videomac
10009, 10264
Xingfu
10009
Videosat
10247
Xinghai
10264
Videotechnic
10217, 10320
Xinrisong
10848
Videoton
10356
XLogic
10698
Vidikron
10054
XMS
10698
Vidtech
10019, 10036, 10178
Xoceco
10779, 10785
Viewsonic
10724, 10857, 10864, 10885, 11755
Xrypton
10037
Viking
10046
Xuelian
10848
VInc
11756
Yamaha
10019, 10030, 10650, 10769, 10833, 10839
Vision
10032, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10320
Yamishi
10217, 10282, 10455
Vistar
10206, 10361, 10548
Yapshe
10250
Vizio
10864, 10885, 11756
Yingge
10009
Voxson
10087, 10163, 10178, 10363, 10418
Yokan
10037, 10109
10037, 10109, 10163, 10217, 10356, 10418,
Yoko
Waltham
10009, 10037, 10216, 10217, 10218, 10247,
10264, 10339, 10421
10443, 10668, 11037
10000, 10016, 10017, 10018, 10019, 10020,
Yongbao
10848
10021, 10024, 10027, 10030, 10047, 10051,
Yonggu
10009
10054, 10055, 10056, 10060, 10080, 10096,
Yoshita
10706
10111, 10135, 10154, 10156, 10165, 10166,
Youlanasi
10817
10178, 10179, 10180, 10186, 10187, 10866,
Yousida
10009, 10848
11147, 11156, 11347
Yuhang
10009
Warumaia
10374, 10661
Zanela
10238
Watson
10009, 10037, 10218, 10320, 10394, 10579,
Zanussi
10206, 10264, 10363
Wards
10668, 11037, 11437
Zenith
10016, 10017, 10092, 10178, 10463
Watt Radio
10102, 10216, 10544
Zenor
10208, 10339
Waycon
10156
ZhuHai
10009, 10374
Wega
10036, 10037, 10087
Zonda
10003, 10698, 10779
Wegavox
10037
ZX
10418
220
CABLE
GE
00237
00003, 00007, 00008, 00011, 00013, 00014,
Gehua
00476
00017, 00237
Gemini
00015, 00797
ADB
01063, 01269
General Instrument
00003, 00011, 00014, 00015, 00276, 00476,
Aichi Denshi
01512
Alcatel
00896
GMI
Allegro
00153, 00315
Golden Channel
01063, 01110
Americast
00899
GoldStar
00040, 00144
Amstrad
01222
Goodmind
00797
Antronix
00022
Hamlin
00009, 00020, 00034, 00259, 00273
Archer
00022, 00153, 00797
Hitachi
00011, 00014
Auna
00277, 01269
HyperVision
00619
Austar
00012, 00276
Hytex
00007
Bell & Howell
00014
i3 Micro
01602
Bell South
00899
Jasco
00015, 00153, 00315
ABC
Birmingham Cable Communications
00276
00810
00015, 00797
Jebsee
00400
Jerrold
00003, 00011, 00012, 00014, 00015, 00276,
British Telecom
00003
Cable & Wireless
01068
KNC
00008
Cabletenna
00022
Leon
00015
Cabletime
00448, 00665
LG
00040, 00144
Cableview
00022
Macab
00817
Canal Plus
00443
Magnavox
00014
Century
00153
Maspro
01510
Citizen
00153, 00315
Memorex
00000
Clearmaster
00883
MNET
00019, 00443
ClearMax
00883
Moser
00451
Comcrypt
00443
Motorola
00276, 00476, 00810, 01106, 01187, 01254,
Comtronics
00040
Contec
00019
Movie Time
Coolmax
00883
Mr Zap
01112
Cryptovision
00600
Mr. Zap
01112
Daeryung
00008, 00277, 00477, 00877, 01877
MS
00015
Digeo
01187
Multichoice
00019, 00443
Digi
00637
Multitech
00883
Director
00476
MultiVision
00012
Dumont
00637
Myrio
01602
DX Antenna
01500
NEC
01496
Eastern
00002
Nokia
01569
Emerson
00797
Noos
00817
Everquest
00015, 00040
NSC
00063
Filmnet
00443, 00619
NTL
00003, 00250, 00277, 01060, 01068
Focus
00400
Oak
00007, 00019
Foxtel
01222
Ono
01068
France Telecom
00451, 00817, 00896
Optimus
00021
Freebox
01482
Optus
00276, 01060
Fujitsu
01497
Pace
00008, 00237, 01060, 01068, 01368, 01877
Funai
00019
Panasonic
00000, 00008, 00021, 00040, 00107, 00443,
Galaxi
00008
Garrard
00153
00476, 00810
01376, 01483
00063
01488
Panther
00637
221
Paragon
00000
TS
00003
Philips
00013, 00153, 00317, 00619, 00817, 01305
Tusa
00015
Pioneer
00144, 00533, 00877, 01500, 01877
TV86
00063
Popular Mechanics
00400
Unika
00022, 00153
Pulsar
00000
United Artists
00007
United Cable
00003
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
00003
Universal
00022, 00153, 00191
00000
US Electronics
00276
Quiero
00817
V2
00883
RadioShack
00015, 00315, 00797, 00883
Videotron
00250
RCA
00021, 01256
Videoway
00250
Recoton
00400
Viewmaster
00883
Regal
00020, 00259, 00273, 00279
Viewstar
00063, 00258
Regency
00002
Vision
00883
Rembrandt
00011
Visionetics
01064
Runco
00000
Visiopass
00451
Sagem
00817, 01089, 01112
Vortex View
00883
Salora
00000
Zenith
00000, 00008, 00525, 00899
Samsung
00000, 00040, 00144, 01060
Zentek
00400
Quasar
Scientific Atlanta
00008, 00017, 00237, 00277, 00477, 00877,
01510, 01877
SATELLITE
Sejin
01602
@sat
01300
Signal
00015, 00040
@Sky
01334
Signature
00011
ABsat
00123, 00668, 00713, 00832
SL Marx
00040
ADB
Sony
01006, 01460
00642, 00887, 01259, 01367, 01473, 01491,
01492, 01493, 01494, 01495
Sprucer
00021
Aegir
00520
Starcom
00003, 00014, 00015
AGS
00668, 00710
Stargate
00015, 00040, 00797
Aiwa
01514
Starquest
00015
Akai
00200, 00515
Sumitomo
01500, 01504
Akena
00668
Supercable
00276
Alba
00421, 00455, 00515, 00613, 00713
Supermax
00883
Aldes
00520
Tadiran
00040
Allsat
00200, 01017, 01043
Tandy
00258
Allsonic
00369
Tele Danmark
01016
Alltech
00713
Tele+1
00443
Allvision
01232, 01334, 01412
Telepiu
00443
Alpha
00668
Teleview
00040
AlphaStar
00772
Telewest
01068, 01368
Amitronica
00713
Thomson
01110, 01256
Ampere
00132, 00396, 00829
Time Warner cable
01877
Amstrad
Timeless
00040
Tocom
00012, 00013
Torx
00003
Anglo
00713
Toshiba
00000, 01509
Ankaro
00369, 00692, 00713, 01279
Trans PX
00153, 00276, 00315
AntSat
01017, 01083
TransACT
01106
Anttron
00421, 00613
Tri-Vision
01257
Apollo
00421, 00455
Tristar
00883
Arcon
00692, 00834, 01043, 01075, 01205, 01279
222
00132, 00243, 00345, 00396, 00501, 00675,
00689, 00713, 00742, 00795, 00847, 00863,
00882, 00885, 01113, 01175
Arcus
01143
CCE
00345
Arion
01205
Century
00856
Armstrong
00243
Channel Master
00212
Arnion
01300
Chaparral
00053, 00209, 00216
ASA
00397
Cherokee
00123, 00710, 01480
Asat
00200
Chess
00114, 00713, 01085, 01334
ASCI
00114, 01334
CityCom
ASLF
00713
01232
AssCom
00853
Claasen Nachrichten 00520
AST
00321, 00351
Clark
00613
Astacom
00668, 00710
Clemens Kamphus
00396, 00834
Aston
00142, 01261
CNS
01367
Astra
00243, 00607, 00713
CNT
00520
Astrastar
00548
Cobra
00396
Astro
00133, 00173, 00358, 00369, 00501, 00520,
Colombia
00132, 00668
00548, 00607, 00613, 00658, 01099, 01100,
Columbia
00132
01113
Columbus
00668
Athena
00668
Comag
00132, 01232, 01412
Atsat
01300
Condor
00369, 00607
AtSky
01334
Connexions
00396
Audioline
01429
Conrad
00115, 00132, 00369, 00501, 00607
Audioton
00613
Conrad Electronic
00607
Aurora
00642, 00879
Cosat
00592
Austar
00497, 00642, 00863, 00879, 01173, 01259
Crossdigital
01109
Avalon
00396
Crown
00243
Axiel
00668, 00710
Cryptovision
00455
Axis
00369, 00834, 00880, 01111
Cyfra+
01076
Beko
00455
Cyrus
00200
Bentley Walker
01017
D-box
00723, 00873
Best
00369
Daeryung
00396
Bestar
00243
Daewoo
00421, 00713, 01111, 01296
Black Diamond
01284
Daumling
00794
Blaupunkt
00173
Delfa
00863
Blue Sky
00713, 00885
Deltasat
01075
Boca
00132, 00243, 00713, 00794, 00829, 01232
Dgtec
01242, 01542
Boston
00132, 00668, 00710
Digatron
01294
Brainwave
00692, 01294
Digena
01100
00115, 00299, 00607, 00818, 01075, 01176,
Digenius
00299, 01161
00847, 01175, 01847
Digiality
00607
Broco
00713
Digipro
01105
BskyB
00847, 01175
DigiQuest
00863
BT
00515, 00668, 00710
DigitAll World
01227
Bubu Sat
00713
Digiturk
01076
Bush
01284, 01471
DirecTV
BVV
00692
00749, 00819, 01076, 01108, 01109, 01142,
Cambridge
00501, 00515
01377, 01392, 01414, 01442, 01443, 01444,
Canal Digital
00853
01609, 01639, 01640, 01749, 01856
Canal Satellite
00853, 01339
Discoverer
00605
Canal+
00853
Discovery
00668, 00710, 01480
CanalSatellite
00853, 01339
Dish Network
00775
British Sky Broadcasting
00099, 00247, 00392, 00566, 00639, 00724,
223
Dish Network System
Foxtel
00775, 01005, 01170, 01505, 01775
00455, 00497, 00720, 00879, 01162, 01173,
01176, 01356
Dishpro
00775, 01005, 01505, 01775
Fracarro
00421, 00668, 00871
Distratel
00084, 00885, 01205, 01283
Freecom
00173, 00421, 00501
Distrisat
00200
Freesat
00882
DMT
01075
Fresat
00885
DNR
00692
FTEmaximal
DNT
00200, 00396
Dream Multimedia
01237, 01437, 01537, 01637
DST
00421
Dune
00369
Fugionkyo
01105
DX Antenna
01530
Galaxis
00115, 00369, 00592, 00692, 00834, 00853,
Echostar
00159, 00167, 00269, 00280, 00396, 00454,
EIF
Einhell
00331, 00369, 00713, 00794, 00863, 01209,
01449
Fuba
00115, 00173, 00299, 00369, 00396, 00417,
00421, 00573, 01161, 01214
00863, 00879, 01101, 01111, 01557
00610, 00668, 00713, 00775, 00853, 00871,
Galaxisat
00321
01005, 01086, 01170, 01200, 01323, 01409,
Gardiner
00818
01467, 01477, 01505, 01775
Garnet
01075
00417
GbSAT
01214
00132, 00243, 00421, 00501, 00692, 00713,
GE
00566
00794
Gecco
01273, 01412
Elap
00587, 00668, 00710, 00713
General Instrument
00869
Elsat
00713
GF
00834, 01043
Elta
00200, 00369, 00421
GF Star
01043
Emanon
00421
Globo
01087, 01251
Emme Esse
00369, 00871
GOD Digital
00200
eMTech
01214
GOI
00775, 01775
Engel
00713, 01017
Gold Box
00853
Eurieult
00084, 00136, 00417, 00882, 00885
Goldbox
00292, 00853
Euro1
01278
Golden Interstar
01283
Eurocrypt
00455
Goldvision
01017
EuroLine
01251
Gooding
00571
Europa
00501, 00607, 00863
Goodmans
00455, 01246, 01284
European
00794
Gradiente
00099, 00856, 00887
Europhon
00132, 00299, 00607
Granada
00455
Eurosat
00243
Grandin
00084, 00136, 00417, 00885
Eurosky
00114, 00115, 00132, 00243, 00299, 00369,
Grocos
00243
00501, 00607
Grundig
Eurostar
00173, 00345, 00455, 00501, 00571, 00750,
00805, 00847, 00853, 00879, 01150, 01291,
00115, 00607, 00818, 00880, 00898
01330, 01335, 01435
Eutelsat
00713
Exator
00421, 00515, 00613
Hanseatic
Expressvu
00775, 01775
Hantor
00421
Fagor
00592
Hanuri
00520
Fenner
00157, 00369, 00605, 00668, 00713
Hauppauge
01294, 01298
Ferguson
00455, 00711, 01291
HB
01214
Fidelity
00501, 00675
HDT
01011, 01159
Finlandia
00455
Helium
00607
Finlux
00397, 00455, 00573
Hinari
00421
Flair Mate
00713
Hirschmann
00173, 00299, 00369, 00396, 00397, 00501,
Force
01101, 01194
Fortec Star
01017, 01083, 01293
00573, 00607, 00668, 00710, 00882, 01012,
01085, 01111, 01113
Hisense
224
00605, 01099, 01100
01535
Hitachi
00455, 00489, 00819, 01250, 01284, 01518,
Kathrein
00114, 00115, 00123, 00173, 00200, 00249,
01523, 01525, 00035
00331, 00358, 00442, 00480, 00553, 00613,
Hnsel & Gretel
00132
00658, 00713, 00742, 00818, 00898, 01057,
Homecable
00238
01221, 01561, 01567
Homecast
01214
Kathrein Eurostar
00115
Houston
00396, 00592, 00668
Kenwood
00853
HTS
00775, 01775
Key West
00132, 00794
Hughes
00749
Kiton
00114
Klap
00668, 00710
Kolon
00421
Konig
00607
00749, 01142, 01442, 01443, 01444, 01749
Koscom
00834, 01043, 01334, 01409
00863, 01176, 01225, 01427, 01568
Kosmos
00331, 00442
Hughes Network Syst
00749
Hughes Network Systems
Humax
Huth
00132, 00243, 00607, 00692, 00794, 00829,
KR
00592, 00613
01017, 01075
Kreiling
00114, 00249, 00658, 01461, 01480
Hwalin
00885
Kreiselmeyer
00173
Hypson
00136, 00417
Kyostar
00421, 00613
Hyundai
01011, 01075, 01159
L&S Electronic
00132, 00369, 01043, 01334
iCan
01367
Labgear
01296
ID Digital
01176
LaSAT
IEEC
00605
00115, 00132, 00157, 00173, 00243, 00299,
00369, 00520, 00607
ILLUSION sat
01557
Legend
00269
iLo
01535
Lemon
00692, 01461
Imex
00084, 00136, 00520
Lenco
00115, 00369, 00421, 00607, 00628, 00692,
Imperial
01429
Indovision
00887
Lennox
00592
Ingelen
00114, 00396, 00882
Lenson
00501
Innova
00099
Leyco
00515
International
00132, 00243
LG
01075, 01226, 01414
Interstar
01017, 01105, 01214
Lifesat
00132, 00157, 00299, 00369, 00605, 00713,
00713
Intertronic
00243
Intervision
00592, 00607, 00628
Lifetec
00587
InVideo
00871
Lodos
01284
IQ
00210
Loewe
00243
IQ Prism
00210
Logix
01017, 01075
IR
00173, 00282, 00331, 00358, 00455
Lorenzen
Irdeto Technology
00879
ISkyB
00887
Lupus
00369
Italtel
00871
Luxor
00345, 00501, 00573
Jadeworld
00642
M vision
01557
Jaeger
01334
Magnavox
00722, 00724
Janeil
00152
Manata
00132, 00136, 00417, 00668, 00710, 00713
JOK
00690, 00710
Manhattan
00455, 00520, 00592, 00834, 01017, 01083
Jolly
00592
Marantz
00200
JVC
00492, 00515, 00571, 00775, 01170, 01507,
Marave
00417
01043, 01122
00132, 00299, 00607, 00692, 00742, 00794,
00867, 01161, 01294
01531, 01775
Mascom
00520
K-SAT
00713
Maspro
00173, 00571, 00692, 00713, 00750, 01530
Kamm
00713, 00880
Mastec
01334
Kaon
01300
Matsui
00173, 00571, 00710, 01284
KaTelco
01111
Matsushita
00500
225
Max
00607
Okano
00243, 00331, 00442, 00668
Maximum
01075, 01334
Opentel
01232, 01412
MB
00605
Optex
MDS
01225
00114, 00136, 00417, 00592, 00834, 01043,
01283
Mediacom
01206
Optus
00879, 01143
Mediamarkt
00243
Orbis
01334
MediaSat
00292, 00501, 00853
Orbit
00351
Medion
00132, 00299, 00369, 00713, 01043, 01075,
Orbitech
00114, 00157, 00421, 00501, 00548, 00834,
01099, 01100
01161, 01232, 01334, 01412
Medison
00713
Origo
00497
Mega
00200
OSAT
00345
Melectronic
00818
Ouralis
01205
Memorex
00269, 00724
Oxford
00515, 00668
00084, 00132, 00136, 00243, 00421, 00520,
Pace
Metronic
00200, 00241, 00329, 00455, 00497, 00720,
00791, 00795, 00847, 00853, 00867, 00879,
00613, 00713, 00818, 00885, 01205, 01215,
00887, 01175, 01323, 01356, 01423, 01623
01279, 01282, 01283, 01334
Metz
00173
Pacific Satellite
00834
Micro
00501, 00607, 00613, 00713, 01294
Packard Bell
01111
Micro electronic
00713
Packsat
00710
Micromaxx
00299, 00369
Palcom
00299, 00587, 01161
Microstar
01075
Palladium
00243, 00396, 00421, 00501, 00571
Microtec
00713
Palsat
00157, 00501
Minerva
00571
Panarex
01159
Mitsubishi
00455, 00749
Panasat
00615, 00879
00132, 00200, 00243, 00713, 00794, 00829,
Panasonic
Morgan's
00152, 00247, 00455, 00500, 00701, 00847,
01304, 01320, 01404, 01508, 01526
01232
Motorola
00856, 00869
Panda
00173, 00455, 00607, 00834
Multichoice
00642, 00879
Pansat
01011, 01159
Multistar
00331
Patriot
00132, 00515, 00668, 00710
Myryad
00200
Paysat
00724
Mysat
00713
Philips
NEC
00496, 01270, 01519
00571, 00613, 00668, 00710, 00722, 00724,
NEOTION
01334
00749, 00750, 00805, 00818, 00853, 00856,
Netgem
01322
00887, 00898, 01076, 01114, 01118, 01142,
Netsat
00099, 00887
01442, 01749
Neuhaus
00501, 00592, 00607, 00692, 00713, 00834
Phoenix
01273
Neuling
00132, 01232
Phonotrend
00592, 00863, 01017, 01200
Neusat
00099, 00133, 00173, 00200, 00292, 00455,
00587, 00692, 00713, 00834, 01279, 01334,
Pilotime
01339
01409
Pino
01334
Neveling
01161
Pioneer
00292, 00329, 00352, 00853, 01308
Newton
00396
Planet
00396, 00871
Next Level
00869
Plasmatic
00442
NextWave
01017, 01143
Polytron
00396
Nikko
00200, 00243, 00713
Praxis
01123
Nokia
00397, 00455, 00573, 00723, 00751, 00853,
Predki
00421
00873, 01023, 01223, 01310, 01311, 01312,
Preisner
00132, 00396, 00794, 01101, 01113
01723
Premier
00292, 00592
Nordmende
00421, 00455, 00520
Premiere
00292, 00723, 00873, 01429
Octagon
00421, 00613
Prima
00795
OctalTV
01294, 01505
Primacom
01111
226
Pro Visat
00520
Schaub Lorenz
01214
Prod
00573, 00639, 00723, 00873
Schcke
00613
Profile
00710
Schneider
Promax
00455
Prosat
00628, 01173
Proscan
00392, 00566
Protek
01567
Proton
01535
SCS
ProVision
00520
Sedea Electronique
00132, 00421, 01105, 01206, 01283
Pye
00571
Seemann
00243, 00396, 00515
Pyxis
00834
SEG
00157, 00668, 00710, 00805, 00898, 01206,
01251
Schwaiger
00132, 00157, 00587, 00605, 00607, 00692,
00863, 00885, 01075, 01083, 01111, 01334,
01474
00115, 00299
00114, 00369, 00421, 00605, 00742, 01075,
01087, 01191, 01251
QNS
01367, 01404
Quadral
00369, 00628, 00668, 00710, 01012
Seleco
00592, 00871
Quelle
00115, 00299, 00607, 00742
Septimo
00885, 01205
Radiola
00200
Serino
00610
RadioShack
00869
Servi Sat
00136, 00592, 00713
Radix
00285, 00396, 00882, 01113
ServiSat
01251
Rainbow
00613
Sharp
00494, 01517
RCA
00143, *[00392], 00566, 00855, 01291,
Siemens
00173
01392
Silva
00299
Realistic
00052
Skantin
00713
Rebox
01214
Skardin
00587
Red Star
00369
SKR
00713
Regal
01251
SKT
01449
RFT
00200
SKY
Roadstar
00713, 00853
00099, 00711, 00847, 00856, 00887, 01014,
01175, 01847, 01848, 01856
Roch
00136
SKY Italia
01847, 01848
Romsat
00421
Sky Television
01014
Rover
00369, 00628, 00713
Sky XL
01251, 01412
S-ZWO
01207
Sky+
01175
SAB
01251
Skymaster
Saba
00115, 00520, 00607, 00690, 00692, 00710,
00157, 00587, 00605, 00628, 00713, 00880,
01075, 01085, 01200, 01409
00885, 01012
Skymax
00200
Sabre
00455
Skyplus
01232, 01334, 01409, 01412
Sagem
00820, 01114, 01253, 01307
SkySat
00114, 00157, 00501, 00605, 00607, 00713
00853, 00863, 01017, 01108, 01109, 01206,
Skyvision
01334
01243, 01244, 01276, 01292, 01293, 01343,
SL
00132, 00243, 00299, 00692, 00742, 01294
01377, 01442, 01458, 01570, 01609
SL Marx
00692
00493, 01219
SM Electroni
00157, 00587, 00713, 01200, 01409
SAT
00321, 00351, 00501, 00675
Smart
Sat Control
01300
Sat Cruiser
01143
Sat Partner
00421, 00501, 00520, 00613, 00692
Samsung
Sanyo
00115, 00132, 00299, 00396, 00713, 00794,
00829, 00882, 01101, 01113, 01232, 01273
Sony
00275, 00282, 00292, 00294, 00486, 00489,
00492, 00493, 00494, 00496, 00500, 00639,
00847, 00853, 01524, 01558, 01639, 01640
Sat Team
00713
Satcom
00605, 00607
SR
Satec
00713, 00834
Star
00887
Satelco
00369, 01232
Star Choice
00869
Satline
00628
Star Trak
00180, 00421
Satplus
00157, 01100
Starland
01122
Satstation
01083
Starlite
00200
00132, 00243
227
Stream
01847, 01848
Tivo
01142, 01442, 01443, 01444
Strong
00132, 00369, 00421, 00520, 00613, 00853,
Tokai
00200
00879, 01105, 01147, 01158, 01159, 01300,
Tonna
01409
00455, 00501, 00587, 00592, 00668, 00713,
00834
STS
00210
Topfield
01206, 01207, 01545
STVI
00136, 00417
Toshiba
00082, 00455, 00486, 00749, 00790, 01285,
01446, 01501, 01516, 01530, 01749
Sunkai
00123
Sunny
01300
TPS
Sunny Sound
00369
Triad
00321, 00351, 00372
Sunsat
00713
Triasat
00501
Sunstar
00132, 00243, 00369, 00642, 00794, 00829
Triax
00820, 01253, 01307
00114, 00115, 00132, 00200, 00396, 00501,
Supermax
01143, 01283
00713, 00853, 01099, 01113, 01227, 01251,
Supernova
00887
01291, 01296
Tantec
00455
Trio
01075
Tarbs
01225
TT-micro
01429
Tatung
00455
Turnsat
00713
TCL
01143
Twinner
00136, 00713
Teac
01225, 01227, 01251, 01322
UEC
00879, 01162
Techniland
00592
Uher
00157
00114, 00157, 00200, 00396, 00455, 00501,
UltimateTV
01392, 01640
00548, 00863, 01099, 01100, 01195, 01322
Uniden
00052, 00074, 00076, 00238, 00722, 00724,
TechniSat
00834
Technomate
01283
Technosat
01143, 01206
Unisat
00132, 00200, 00243
Technotrend
01429
United
01251
Technowelt
00132, 00607
Universum
Techsan
01017
Techwood
00114, 01284
US Digital
01535
Teco
00243
USDTV
01535
tekComm
01017
Van Hunen
01161
Telasat
00115, 00605, 00607
Variosat
00173
Teleciel
00613, 01043
Vega
00369
Telefunken
00421
Ventana
00200
00114, 00115, 00173, 00299, 00397, 00571,
00607, 00675, 00742, 01087, 01099, 01251
00243, 00396, 00501, 00607, 00613, 00692,
Vestel
00114, 00742, 01251
00750, 00834
Victor
00492
00520
Visionic
01105, 01206, 01279, 01283
Telesat
00605
Visiosat
00114, 00142, 00690, 00710, 00713
Telestar
00114, 00157, 00501, 01099, 01100, 01251,
Vivid
01162
01334
Voom
00869
00396, 01251
Vortec
00421
Teletech
00114, 00880
VTech
00321, 00351, 00690, 00818
Televes
00132, 00455, 00501, 01214, 01300
Welltech
00157
Televisa
00887
Wetekom
00157, 00501, 00605, 00829
Telewire
00592
Wewa
00455
Tempo
01143
Wibo
00243
Tevion
00713, 01334, 01409
Wintel
00299, 01161
00115, 00292, 00392, 00455, 00607, 00668,
Wisi
Teleka
Telemaster
Telesystem
Thomson
01012, 01046, 01175, 01291, 01498, 01900
Woorisat
Thorn
00455
Worldsat
Tioko
00132, 00243
228
00173, 00299, 00321, 00351, 00372, 00396,
00455, 00501, 00607, 00638, 00690
00710, 00711, 00713, 00820, 00847, 00853,
00520
00114, 00123, 00668, 00710, 01012, 01251,
01323, 01480
Xcom
00123, 00668, 00832
DBX
30018, 30254
Xcom Multimedia
00668
Denon
30003, 30626, 30766, 30873, 31234,
XMS
01075
Xrypton
00369
DKK
Xsat
00123, 00668, 00713, 00847, 01214, 01323
DMX Electronics
30157
Xtreme
01300
Dual
30003, 30194, 30196
Yes
00887
Dynamic Bass
30179
Zaunkonig
00692
EEC
30194
Zehnder
*[31867], 31868
30000
00114, 00115, 00321, 00331, 00369, 00520,
Elektra
30437
00742, 00818, 01075, 01191, 01232, 01251,
Emerson
30155, 30164, 30305, 30469
01334, 01412
Fisher
30088, 30174, 30179, 30342, 31325
Zenith
00856, 01856
Garrard
30245, 30280, 30393, 30420, 30425
Zinwell
01173
GE
30009
Zodiac
00396, 00613
Genexxa
30032, 30164, 30305, 30426
Zwergnase
00243, 00794
Goldmund
30157
CD
GoldStar
30417, 31208
Goodmans
30245, 30280, 30305
Acoustic Research
30420
GPX
31296
ADC
30018
Grundig
30157
Adcom
30155, 30234
Harman/Kardon
30157, 30173, 30426, 31202
Advantage
30032
Hitachi
30032, 30155, 30038
Aiwa
30012, 30124, 30157, 31690
Inkel
30180, 30196, 30437
Akai
30156, 30766, 31688
Integra
30101
Arcam
30157
Intersound
30245
Audio Alchemy
30194
IR
30000
Audio Dynamics
30018
JVC
30072, 30655, 31294, 31697
Audio Pro
30437
Kenwood
Audio Research
30157
Audio-Technica
30170
KLH
31318, 31711
Audiolab
30157
Kodak
30287
Audiomeca
30157
Korsun
31484
Audioton
30157
Koss
31317
Bestar
30164
Krell
30157
BSR
30194, 30245
Kyocera
30018
Burmester
30420
LG
31208
Bush
30245
Linn
30157
Cairn
30157
Loewe
30157
30028, 30036, 30037, 30157, 30190, 30626,
30681, 30826
California Audio Labs 30029, 30303
Luxman
30093, 30393
Cambridge
30157
LXI
30305
Carrera
30194
Magnavox
30157, 30305
Carver
30157, 30179, 30437
Marantz
30029, 30157, 30180, 30626
CCE
30157
Mark
30194
CDC
30420
Mark Levinson
31484
CEC
30174, 30420
Matsui
30157
Classic
31297
McIntosh
30287
Condor
30164, 30194
MCS
30029, 30043
Copland
30393
Memorex
30032, 30155, 30164, 30175, 30180, 30305
Crown
30122
Meridian
30157
Cyrus
30157
Micromega
30157
DAK
30245
Miro
30000
229
Mission
30157
Sharp
30037, 30180, 30861, 31658, 31684
Mitsubishi
30156
Sherwood
30180, 30196, 30426, 31067
MTC
30420
Shure
30043
Musical Fidelity
30393, 30437
Siemens
30157, 30180
Myryad
30157
Silsonic
30036, 30888
NAD
30000, 31208
Simaudio
30157
Nagaoka
30018
Sonic Frontiers
30157
Naim
30157
Sony
30000, 30100, 30185, 30490, 30604, 30605,
31364
Nakamichi
30147
NEC
30043, 30234
Soundesign
30145, 30425
Nikko
30164, 30170, 30174
STS
30018
NSM
30157
Sugden
30157
Oak
30145
Symphonic
30305
Onkyo
30101, 30868, 31685
TAG McLaren
30157
Optimus
30000, 30032, 30037, 30087, 30145, 30175,
Tandy
30032
30179, 30194, 30196, 30280, 30305, 30342,
Tascam
30420
30420, 30426, 30437, 30468, 31063, 31075
TDK
31208
Orion
30393
Teac
30174, 30180, 30393, 30420
Panasonic
30029, 30207, 30303, 30752, 31682
Tec
30245
Parasound
30194, 30420
Technics
30029, 30207, 30303
Penney
30043
Thomson
30053
Perform Hifi
30420
Thorens
30157
Philips
30157, 30287, 30626
Thule Audio
30157
Pioneer
30032, 30101, 30305, 30468, 31062, 31063,
Tivoli Audio
31553
31087
Tokai
30164, 30420
30164
Toshiba
31693
Polk Audio
30157
Traxdata
30626
Poppy
30164
Universum
30053, 30157, 30437
Proceed
30420
Vector Research
30194, 30417
Proton
30157
Victor
30072
QED
30157
Wards
30000, 30032, 30053, 30087, 30157, 30179
Quad
30157
Yamaha
30000, 30032, 30036, 30037, 30170, 30187,
PMG
30888, 31292
Quasar
30029
Radiola
30157
Yoko
30194
RadioShack
31075
Yorx
30461
30009, 30032, 30053, 30155, 30179, 30305,
Zonda
30157
RCA
30420, 30468, 30764, 31062
Realistic
30155, 30164, 30175, 30179, 30180, 30420
CDR
Restek
30157
Classic
Revox
30157
Denon
30626, 30766, 31868
Roadstar
30461
Fisher
31325
Roksan
30420
GPX
31296
Rotel
30157, 30420
Harman/Kardon
31202
Royal
30164, 30420
JVC
30072, 31294
SAE
30157
Kenwood
30626
Sansui
30157, 30202, 30305
LG
31208
Sanyo
30087, 30179, 30342
Marantz
30626
SAST
30157
NAD
31208
Scott
30155, 30164, 30305
Philips
30626
Sears
30305
Pioneer
31062, 31087
230
31297
RCA
30053, 30420
Technics
20229, 20353
Sony
30000, 30100, 31364
Thorens
20029
TDK
31208
Universum
20375, 20439
Teac
30420
Victor
20244, 20273, 20274
Yamaha
30888, 31292
Wards
20027, 20029
Wharfedale
20439
Yamaha
20094, 20097
TAPE
Aiwa
20029, 20197, 20200, 21315
Akai
20283, 20439
PVR
Arcam
20076
ABS
Carver
20029
Alienware
21972
Denon
20076, 20371, 21311, 21471
CyberPower
21972
Fisher
20074
Dell
21972
Garrard
20308, 20309, 20375, 20439
DirecTV
20739
Genexxa
20439
Gateway
21972
GoldStar
20353, 20375
Hewlett Packard
21972
Grundig
20029, 20229, 20375
Howard Computers
21972
Harman/Kardon
20029, 20182, 21314
HP
21972
Inkel
20070, 20071, 20337
Hughes Network Systems
JVC
1
20244, 20273, 20274, 20303, 20304, 20310,
21972
20739
21309
Humax
20739
Kenwood
20070, 20071, 20092, 20233, 20234, 21364
Hush
21972
LG
20375
iBUYPOWER
21972
Luxman
20308, 20309
Linksys
21972
Magnavox
20029
Media Center PC
21972
Marantz
20009, 20029
Microsoft
21972
Memorex
20099
Mind
21972
Mitsubishi
20283, 20439
Niveus Media
21972
Myryad
20029
Northgate
21972
Onkyo
20135, 20136, 20282
Panasonic
20616
Optimus
20027, 20220, 20337, 20439
Philips
20618, 20739
Orion
20308, 20309, 20353
RCA
20880
Panasonic
20229
ReplayTV
20614, 20616
Philips
20029, 20229
Sonic Blue
20614, 20616
Phonotrend
20337
Sony
20636, 21972
Pioneer
20027, 20099, 20220, 21306, 21312
Stack 9
21972
Polk Audio
20029
Systemax
21972
Radiola
20029
Tagar Systems
21972
RCA
20027, 20220
Tivo
20618, 20636, 20739
Revox
20029, 20190
Toshiba
21008, 21972
Sansui
20009, 20029
Touch
21972
Sanyo
20074
Viewsonic
21972
Sharp
20231, 20371
Voodoo
21972
Sherwood
20337
ZT Group
21972
Siemens
20029
Sonic
20375
TV/DVD Combination
Sony
20170, 20234, 20243, 20291, 21313
Advent
41016
TaeKwang
20439
Apex Digital
40830
Tandberg
20109
Audiovox
41071, 41121, 41122
Teac
20280, 20283, 20289, 20308, 20309
Axion
41071
2,
3
231
Broksonic
40695
Optimus
20162
Bush
40516, 40713, 40884
Orion
20002, 20479, 21479
Denver
41353, 41359
Panasonic
20162, 21035, 21308
Emerson
41268
Penney
20240, 21035, 21237
Go Vision
41071
Philco
20479
Grundig
40695
Quasar
20162, 21035
Hitachi
41247
RadioShack
20000
Jensen
41016
RCA
20240, 20807, 21035, 21060
Konka
40719, 40720
Samsung
20432, 21014
Panasonic
41490
Sansui
20000, 20479, 21479
Philips
40854, 41260
Sanyo
20240, 21330
Prima
41016
Sears
20000, 21237
RCA
41022
Sharp
20807
Samsung
40899
Sony
20000, 21232, 21295
Sansui
40695
Sylvania
21781
Sova
41122
Symphonic
20000
Sylvania
40675, 41268
Teac
20000
40695
Thomas
20000
10698, 11037
Toshiba
20845, 21145, 21323
10587
Zenith
20000, 20479, 21479
Toshiba
Bush
3
3
Denver
3
Sylvania
10171
TV/VCR/DVD Combination
TV/VCR Combination
America Action
3,
4
3 10180
Akai
40899
Broksonic
40868
Audiovox
3
10180
Emerson
40821
Emerson
3
10236
Funai
41334
11977
Magnavox
40821
Panasonic
41362, 41462
Funai
3
4
RCA
41132
20000, 20479
Sharp
40630
America Action
20278
Superscan
40821
Audiovox
20278
Sylvania
40821
Broksonic
20002, 20479, 21479
Toshiba
Citizen
21278
Sharp
Colt
20072
Aiwa
2,
4
41045
4
20807
Curtis Mathes
21035
CABLE/PVR Combination
Daewoo
21278
Americast
Emerson
20002, 20294, 20479, 21278, 21479
Digeo
01187
Funai
20000, 21333
Freebox
01482
GE
20240, 20807, 21035, 21060
General Instrument
00476, 00810
GoldStar
21237
Jerrold
00476, 00810
Harley Davidson
20000
Motorola
00476, 00810, 01106, 01187, 01376
Hitachi
20000
Nokia
01569
Lloyd's
20000
Pace
00237, 01877
Magnasonic
21278
Pioneer
00877, 01877
Magnavox
20000, 21781
RCA
01256
Magnin
20240
Scientific Atlanta
00877, 01877
Memorex
20162, 21237
Sony
01006
MGA
20240
Supercable
00276
Mitsubishi
20043, 20807
Thomson
01256
232
1
00899
Zenith
00899
DBS/PVR Combination
@sat
01300
Atsat
01300
1
1
2
3
4
: These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT/CBL mode.
: These preset codes can be recorded in the DVD mode.
: These preset codes can be recorded in the TV mode.
: This preset code can be recorded in the VCR mode.
[ ] : Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory.
British Sky Broadcasting
01175
Canal Satellite
01339
Comag
01412
Digiturk
01076
DirecTV
00099, 00392, 00639, 01076, 01142, 01377,
01392, 01442, 01443, 01444, 01640
Dish Network System
00775, 01505
Dishpro
00775, 01505
Dream Multimedia
01237
Echostar
00610, 00775, 01170, 01505
Euro1
01278
Expressvu
00775
Force
01194
Foxtel
01356
GbSAT
01214
Grundig
01150
DVD preset codes
B
Model No.
41470
DVD-550
DVD-700
DVD-900
DVD-1000
DVD-1400
DVD-1500
DVD-1710
DVD-1910
DVD-2200
DVD-2800
DVD-2800II
DVD-2900
DVD-2910
DVD-3800
DVD-3910
DVD-A11
DVD-A1
DVD-A1XV
40490
DVD-800
DVD-1600
DVD-2000
DVD-2500
DVD-3000
DVD-3300
Hughes Network Systems
01142, 01442, 01443, 01444
Humax
01176, 01427, 01568
Hyundai
01159
JVC
01170
Kathrein
01221, 01561
Maximum
01334
Motorola
00869
Nokia
01310, 01311
Opentel
01412
Pace
01423, 01623
Panasonic
01320
Philips
00099, 01142, 01442
Proscan
00392
RCA
01392
Rebox
01214
Sagem
01253, 01307
Samsung
01442
SKY
01175, 01848
Skyplus
01412
Sony
00639, 01640
Star Choice
00869
Strong
01158, 01300
Thomson
01900
Topfield
01206, 01545
TPS
01253, 01307
Zehnder
01075, 01412
233
TOKYO, JAPAN
www.denon.com
Denon Brand Company, D&M Holdings Inc.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising